JP2022168340A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of diversifying movement of game balls flowing down a game area, and capable of increasing a player's degree of attention to a game.

SOLUTION: A game machine includes: a first winning hole 51 provided so as to open in one side in a horizontal direction; and a second winning hole 52 provided so as to open in the other side in a horizontal direction. The game machine includes ball entry state switching means that switches a first ball enterable state for allowing game balls to enter the first winning hole 51, a second ball enterable state for allowing game balls to enter the second winning hole 52, and a ball entry disable state for preventing game balls from entering neither the first winning hole 51 nor the second winning hole 52, and is provided between the first winning hole 51 and the second winning hole 52.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 3

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine equipped with a display device that variably displays a plurality of patterns (see, for example, Patent Document 1). This gaming machine has a shooting means for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board, and when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means), a jackpot lottery or the like is performed. An internal lottery is executed, and the variable display of patterns is started. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns on the display device, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

JP 2005-074175 A

However, the starting ball entry means and the entry of the game ball into the variable winning device follow a fixed path from the vertically upward side to the vertically downward side, and the movement of the game ball becomes monotonous. , there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of diversifying the movement of a game ball flowing down a gaming area and increasing the attention of a player to a game.

The gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine comprising shooting means for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board, and ball entry means for entering game balls flowing down the game area. The ball-entering means includes a first ball-entering area that opens on one side in the substantially horizontal direction, and a second ball-entering area that opens on the other side in the substantially horizontal direction. , the gaming machine includes a first ball-enterable state in which a game ball can enter a first ball-entering area, and a second ball-enterable state in which a game ball can enter a second ball-entering area. and a non-enterable state in which a game ball is not allowed to enter either the first ball-entering area or the second ball-entering area. It is characterized by comprising a ball entry generating means provided with a guiding part capable of guiding a game ball to either the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area between the two ball entry areas.

According to the present invention, it is possible to diversify the movement of the game ball flowing down the game area, and to improve the attention of the player to the game.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention; front view of game board Front view of variable winning device Perspective view of variable winning device Three-sided view of the variable winning device A perspective view showing detailed configurations of the first bridge and the second bridge. A perspective view of the variable winning device in a state in which the first bridge is projected Three-sided view of the variable winning device with the first bridge protruding A perspective view showing the detailed configuration of the first bridge and the second bridge in a state in which the first bridge is projected. Perspective view of the variable winning device with the second bridge protruding Three-sided view of the variable winning device in a state in which the second bridge is projected A perspective view showing the detailed configuration of the first bridge and the second bridge with the second bridge protruding. Figure showing the display screen of the pattern display device Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine Diagram showing the contents of each counter used for internal lottery A diagram showing a success/failure table that stores values of random numbers for winning a jackpot A diagram showing a distribution table storing random number values related to distribution destinations of jackpot types Figure showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing A diagram showing a flow chart of the winning process for the working opening Diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing Diagram showing a flowchart of main processing A diagram showing a flowchart of game round control processing Diagram showing a flowchart of data setting processing Diagram showing a flowchart of fluctuation start processing Diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing A diagram showing a flowchart of prize ball determination processing A diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing process A diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process A diagram showing a flowchart of transition processing at the end of the open/close execution mode Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio emission control device and the display control device The figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interruption process performed with a sound emission control apparatus. A diagram showing a flow chart of effect determination processing A diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state, etc. A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device and the variable winning device when shifting to the open/close execution mode A perspective view showing a detailed configuration of a modified example of the first bridge and the second bridge in a state in which the first bridge is projected. A perspective view showing a detailed configuration of a modified example of the first bridge and the second bridge in a state in which the first bridge is projected. It is a front view of a variable winning device according to a second embodiment of the present invention. A diagram showing a distribution table storing random number values related to distribution destinations of jackpot types Diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing A diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing process A diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process A diagram showing a flowchart of V winning detection processing A diagram showing a flowchart of transition processing at the end of the open/close execution mode A diagram showing a flow chart of effect determination processing A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device and the variable winning device when shifting to the open/close execution mode Front view of a game board according to a third embodiment of the present invention Front view of the game board with the vicinity of the first winning hole and the second winning hole enlarged Schematic diagram showing the front of the first prize-winning opening and the second prize-winning opening in a state in which the first bridge is pushed down. Schematic diagram showing the front of the first prize-winning opening and the second prize-winning opening in a state in which the second bridge is pushed down. Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine A diagram showing a flow chart of the winning process for the working opening Diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing Diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing A diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process A diagram showing a flow chart of effect determination processing Front view of a game board according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention Front view of variable winning device Three-sided view of the variable winning device Enlarged front view showing the variable prize winning device when the rotating bridge is in a protruded state Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine Diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing A diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing process A diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process A diagram showing a flowchart of round prize ball determination processing Diagram showing a flowchart of bridge rotation processing A diagram showing a flow chart of effect determination processing A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device and the variable winning device when shifting to the open/close execution mode Enlarged front view showing the variable prize winning device when the rotating bridge is in a non-enterable state A diagram showing a modified example of the display screen of the symbol display device and the variable winning device when shifting to the open/close execution mode. Front view of a game board according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention Front view of variable winning device A diagram showing the detailed configuration of the variable winning device with the moving bridge moved to the left A diagram showing the detailed configuration of the variable winning device with the moving bridge moved to the right Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine A diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing process A diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process Front view of a variable winning device according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention A diagram showing the detailed configuration of the variable winning device A diagram showing the detailed configuration of the variable winning device with the moving bridge moved to the left A diagram showing the detailed configuration of the variable winning device with the moving bridge moved to the right Front view of a game board according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention Front view of variable winning device Front view showing the detailed configuration of the variable prize winning device A diagram showing the detailed configuration of the variable winning device with the lifting bridge rotated Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine A diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing process A diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process Front view of a game board according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention Front view of variable winning device A diagram showing the detailed configuration of the variable winning device A diagram showing the detailed configuration of the variable winning device with the upper bridge protruding. A diagram showing the detailed configuration of the variable winning device with the lower bridge protruding. Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine A diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing process A diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process

[First embodiment]
A first embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention.
The pachinko machine 10 is a pachinko game machine which is a kind of game machine. As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 comprises an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a game machine main body attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward (front side). 12.

The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame (not shown) supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable with one of the left and right side portions as the supporting side, and an inner frame (not shown) disposed in front of the inner frame. A front door frame 13 supported by the inner frame so as to be rotatable forward with one of the left and right side portions as the support side, and a front door frame 13 disposed behind the inner frame and rearward with one of the left and right side portions as the support side. and a back pack unit (not shown) supported by the inner frame so as to be rotatable.

The gaming machine main body 12 has a locking device (not shown) provided at the leading end of the rotation. This locking device has a function of locking the game machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and has a function of locking the front door frame 13 with respect to the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. have. These locked states are released by unlocking the cylinder lock 14 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlock key.

The front door frame 13 has a substantially elliptical window portion 21 provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame, and a window panel 22 fitted in the window portion 21 . In the present embodiment, the window panel 22 is made of transparent and colorless glass, but may be made of synthetic resin or the like to be transparent and colorless.
In addition, the front door frame 13 includes a display lamp portion 23 provided above the window portion 21 as a part of light emitting means configured by various lamp portions and the like provided around the window portion 21, and a display lamp portion A speaker unit 24 is provided on both the left and right sides of 23 and outputs sound effects according to the game situation, and an upper bulging portion 25 and a lower bulging portion 26 provided below the window portion 21. there is

The upper bulging portion 25 and the lower bulging portion 26 are vertically arranged side by side and both bulge forward.
The upper bulging portion 25 has an upper plate 25a provided inside so as to open upward. The upper plate 25a temporarily stores the game balls paid out by the payout device 71 (see FIG. 14) provided in the back pack unit, and while aligning them in a line, moves them toward the game ball launching mechanism 81 (see FIG. 14). It has the function of guiding.
The lower bulging portion 26 also has a lower plate 26a provided inside so as to open upward. The lower tray 26a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 25a.

Further, the front door frame 13 has a firing handle 27 as a firing means provided on the right side of the lower tray 26a. The shooting handle 27 is operated by a player of the pachinko machine 10 to shoot a game ball from a game ball shooting mechanism 81 provided below the inner frame toward a game area provided above the inner frame. do. The shooting handle 27 changes the shooting intensity of the game ball shot toward the game area, ie, the momentum of shooting, by changing the amount of rotation operation.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 31 has an inner rail portion 32 and an outer rail portion 33 attached to its surface, and is mounted on an inner frame. The game area described above is formed on the game board 31 so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 . Almost the entire area of this game area can be visually recognized from the front through the window portion 21 .
The inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 constitute a guide rail 34 for the game ball to the game area, and the guide rail 34 is launched from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 when the player rotates the shooting handle 27. The game ball that has been hit is guided to the upper part of the game area.

The guide rail 34 is formed so that its exit portion is arranged on one side of the game area and faces the center of the upper part of the game area. For this reason, the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is shifted from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side as the rotation amount of the shooting handle 27 by the player increases. Shift to the side of the side. In this embodiment, the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is provided on the left side of the game area.

The game board 31 has, in the game area, a plurality of large and small openings which are formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. In addition, the game board 31 has an upper operating port 36, a lower operating port 37, a variable winning device 5, and an out port 39 provided at each opening. The game board 31 includes through gates 41 provided on the left and right sides of the central portion, a main display device 42 provided on the upper right side, a variable display unit 43 provided on the central portion, and the like. have. Furthermore, the game board 31 has, in the game area, various members (accessories) such as a large number of nails 44 planted in order to appropriately disperse the falling directions of the game balls or to adjust them.

Each of the upper operating port 36, the lower operating port 37, and various winning ports of the variable winning device 5 is provided with detection sensors 40a to 40d (see FIG. 14) for detecting the entry of game balls, and these detection sensors 40a to 40 d is arranged on the back side of the game board 31 . Specifically, the upper working port 36 has a detection sensor 40a, the lower working port 37 has a detection sensor 40b, and the variable winning device 5 has detection sensors 40c and 40d. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40a to 40d. The detection sensors 40a to 40d may be of any kind as long as they can individually detect winning of game balls, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor can be employed.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 pays out three prize balls when a ball enters the upper working port 36 and when a ball enters the lower working port 37 . The pachinko machine 10 pays out 10 or 15 prize balls when a ball enters the variable prize winning device 5.例文帳に追加In addition, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls in each of the operation ports 36 and 37 may be different.

Out port 39 is provided at the bottom of the game area of game board 31 . Game balls that do not enter various winning holes are discharged from the game area through the out hole 39.例文帳に追加In addition, the out port 39 is provided with a detection sensor 40e (see FIG. 14) for detecting an entry of a game ball. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out prize balls when a ball enters the out hole 39, unlike when a ball enters the various winning holes.

Each through gate 41 is provided with a detection sensor 40f (see FIG. 14) for detecting an entry of a game ball. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out prize balls when a ball enters each through gate 41, unlike the case where a ball enters a prize winning opening.

Here, the entry ball means that a game ball passes through a predetermined opening. It also includes a mode in which the game area continues to flow down. However, in the following description, in order to distinguish clearly from the entry of game balls into the out port 39, entry of game balls into various winning ports is also expressed as winning. Further, entering the through gate 41 refers to continuing to flow down the game area without being ejected from the game area after passing through the gate provided in the game area. A ball entering the through gate 41 is also referred to as winning a prize, like entering a ball into various winning holes.

The upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37 are unitized as an operation port device and installed on the game board 31 . Each operating port 36, 37 is opened upward to allow the game ball flowing down the game area to enter, and the upper operating port 36 is arranged upward and the lower operating port 37 is arranged downward. are arranged vertically side by side. The lower operating port 37 has an electric accessory 37a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

The electric accessory 37a is connected to an electric accessory driving section 37b mounted on the back side of the game board 31. As shown in FIG. The electric accessory 37a is set to either a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) or an open state (supported state or guided state) by being driven by the electric accessory drive section 37b. The closed state is a state in which the lower operation opening 37 is closed by bringing the upper end of the electric accessory 37a closer to the left and right. The open state is a state in which the lower operation opening 37 is opened by separating the upper end of the electric accessory 37a in the left-right direction.

Here, when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessory 37a and the upper operation opening 36 becomes narrower than one game ball. Further, when the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessory 37a and the upper operation opening 36 becomes wider than one game ball. Therefore, the game ball cannot enter the lower operation opening 37 when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state, and can enter the lower operation opening 37 when the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state. can.

In addition, instead of the closed state and the open state described above, the electric accessory 37a has a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the lower operation port 37 (a state in which the game ball can be entered unlike the closed state), and a lower It may be configured to switch between the operation port 37 and the state in which the game ball is likely to win. In addition, the lower operation port 37 may be configured to perform such switching not by setting the electric accessory 37a but by displacing the lower operation port 37. 37 may not include the electric accessory 37a.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the variable winning device. In FIG. 3, the vertically upward direction is defined as the +Z-axis direction, and the two axes perpendicular to the Z-axis are defined as the X and Y axes. The same applies to the following drawings.
The variable winning device 5 is provided below the lower operation opening 37 as shown in FIG. The variable prize winning device 5 includes a first prize winning port 51 provided on the left side of the game area and a second prize winning port 52 provided on the right side of the game area.
In addition, the player can guide the game ball to the variable winning device 5 by adjusting the rotational operation amount of the shooting handle 27 and adjusting the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area.

Here, the game board 31 has a panel 53 provided so as to cover the front side of the variable winning device 5 . This panel 53 is transparent (or translucent) so that the variable winning device 5 can be seen from the front side.
Therefore, the player can visually recognize the variable winning device 5 from the front through the panel 53 .

FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the variable winning device. FIG. 5 is a trihedral view of the variable winning device. Specifically, FIG. 4 is a view of the front of the variable winning device 5 as seen from the upper right side. 5(A) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 5 viewed from above, FIG. 5(B) is a front view of the variable winning device 5, and FIG. 5(C) is a right side view. It is sectional drawing of the variable winning device 5 seen from the side.

As shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, the first prize winning opening 51 is provided in an opening 311 formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by applying router processing. This first prize winning opening 51 is provided so as to open to the right, and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped cover 511 that guides the game ball entering through this opening to the opening 311, and inside the cover 511 It is provided with the aforementioned detection sensor 40c for detecting the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of prize balls based on the detection result.
A game ball guided by the cover 511 and entered into the opening 311 is discharged from the game area through the discharge passage 311a. The game balls passing through the discharge passage 311a join the game balls discharged from the game area through the discharge passage 39a of the out port 39 (see FIG. 5(C)).

The second prize winning opening 52 is provided in an opening 312 formed in the game area so as to pass through in the front-rear direction by applying router processing. The second winning opening 52 is provided so as to open to the left, and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped cover 521 that guides the game ball entered through this opening to the opening 312, and inside the cover 521 It is provided with the aforementioned detection sensor 40d for detecting the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number (15 in this embodiment) of prize balls based on the detection result.
A game ball guided by the cover 521 and entered into the opening 312 is discharged from the game area through the discharge passage 312a. The game balls passing through the discharge passage 312a join the game balls discharged from the game area through the discharge passage 39a of the out port 39 in the same manner as the game balls passing through the discharge passage 311a.

Thus, in this embodiment, the first winning hole 51 functions as a small winning ball winning hole for executing payout of a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of winning balls when a game ball enters, The second winning hole 52 functions as a multi-ball winning hole that pays out a larger number (15 in this embodiment) of winning balls than the first winning hole 51 when a game ball enters.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the first prize winning opening 51 is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction (+X axis direction side). The second prize winning port 52 is provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction (−X axis direction side).
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first winning hole 51 and the second winning hole 52 function as ball entry means for entering game balls flowing down the game area.

The first prize winning port 51 includes a substantially rectangular plate-shaped first bridge 512 provided on the right side of the cover 511, a U-shaped arm 513 attached to the back side of the first bridge 512, and a first bridge driver 514 that drives the first bridge 512 via an arm 513 .
The first bridge 512 is provided so as to be able to protrude through a hole 313 having a rectangular cross section formed in the game board 31, and is provided so as to be inclined from the lower end of the cover 511 to the upper end of the cover 521. It is
Arm 513 is provided to connect the rear surface of first bridge 512 and the shaft of first bridge driving section 514 .

The second prize winning port 52 includes a substantially rectangular plate-shaped second bridge 522 provided on the left side of the cover 521, a U-shaped arm 523 attached to the back side of the second bridge 522, and the arm 523 and a second bridge driver 524 that drives the second bridge 522 via the .
The second bridge 522 is provided so as to be able to protrude through a hole 314 having a rectangular cross section formed in the game board 31, and is provided so as to be inclined from the lower end of the cover 521 to the upper end of the cover 511. It is
The arm 523 is provided to connect the back surface of the second bridge 522 and the shaft of the second bridge driving section 524 .

As described above, in this embodiment, the first bridge 512 is provided so as to be projectable and retractable with respect to the game board 31, and is inclined so as to descend toward the first prize winning opening 51 side. The bridge 522 is provided so as to be projectable and retractable with respect to the game board 31, and is inclined so as to descend toward the second prize winning opening 52 side.
In addition, in this embodiment, the first bridge driving section 514 and the second bridge driving section 524 function as bridge driving sections that cause the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 to protrude from the game board 31. is doing. In other words, first bridge driver 514 and second bridge driver 524 function as dielectric drivers that independently drive first bridge 512 and second bridge 522 .
Furthermore, in this embodiment, the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 are provided so as to cross each other.

FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing detailed configurations of the first bridge and the second bridge.
As shown in FIG. 6, the first bridge 512 includes a flat plate portion 5121 located on the cover 511 side (−X axis direction side), a flat plate portion 5122 located on the cover 521 side (+X axis direction side), and a flat plate portion 5122 located on the cover 521 side (+X axis direction side). It has a connection portion 5123 that connects the portion 5121 and the flat plate portion 5122 .
The connecting portion 5123 is located on the front side of the first bridge 512 and formed to have a width narrower than the flat plate portions 5121 and 5122 . In other words, the first bridge 512 has a slit 5124 formed in its central portion and formed along the projecting/retracting direction from the back side to the front side.

The second bridge 522 includes a flat plate portion 5221 located on the cover 521 side (+X axis direction side), a flat plate portion 5222 located on the cover 511 side (−X axis direction side), and a flat plate portion 5221 and a flat plate portion 5222. It has a connection portion 5223 for connection.
The connecting portion 5223 is located on the back side of the second bridge 522 and is formed to have a width narrower than that of the flat plate portions 5221 and 5222 . In other words, the second bridge 522 has a slit 5224 that is formed in its central portion and is formed along the projecting/retracting direction from the front side to the rear side.

The slit 5124 of the first bridge 512 and the slit 5224 of the second bridge 522 are meshed along the projecting/retracting direction (Y-axis direction) of the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522. there is
Thus, in this embodiment, the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 connect the slit 5124 of the first bridge 512 and the slit 5224 of the second bridge 522 to the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 . are intersected by meshing along the projecting/retracting direction of the bridge 522 .

FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the variable winning device with the first bridge projected. FIG. 8 is a trihedral view of the variable winning device with the first bridge projected. FIG. 9 is a perspective view showing detailed configurations of the first bridge and the second bridge in a state in which the first bridge is projected. Specifically, FIG. 7 is a diagram of the front of the variable winning device 5 as seen from the upper right side. 8(A) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 5 as viewed from above, FIG. 8(B) is a front view of the variable winning device 5, and FIG. 8(C) is a right side view. It is sectional drawing of the variable winning device 5 seen from the side.
7 to 9 are diagrams showing the variable winning device 5 in a state in which only the first bridge 512 is projected.

As shown in FIGS. 7 to 9, the first bridge drive unit 514 projects the first bridge 512 through the hole 313 formed in the game board 31 by projecting the shaft toward the window panel 22. to protrude from the game board 31 (see arrows in FIGS. 8 and 9). Since the first bridge 512 is provided so as to incline from the lower end of the cover 511 to the upper end of the cover 521, by projecting from the game board 31, the game area between the cover 511 and the cover 521 flows down. A game ball to be played can be guided to the opening of the cover 511 (see the arrow in FIG. 8).

Here, the protrusion width D1 of the first bridge 512 from the game board 31 is set to be narrower than the interval D2 between the game board 31 and the panel 53 . In other words, the projecting width D1 of the first bridge 512 from the game board 31 is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball.
In this embodiment, the width D1 of protrusion of the first bridge 512 from the game board 31 is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball, but is set to the same width as the diameter of the game ball. It may be set so as to be wider than the diameter of the game ball.

The width of the opening of the cover 511 is set so as to narrow from the entrance side (right side) toward the back side (left side). According to this, the cover 511 can smoothly enter the game ball guided along the slope of the first bridge 512 to the first winning hole 51 .
The upper surface portion of the cover 511 has a shape that protrudes toward the cover 521 side (opening direction side) from the lower surface portion of the cover 511 .

Also, the first bridge drive unit 514 retracts the shaft body toward the window panel 22 , thereby retracting the first bridge 512 into the game board 31 through the hole 313 formed in the game board 31 . By immersing the first bridge 512 in the game board 31 , it is possible to guide the game balls flowing down the game area between the covers 511 and 521 to the out port 39 .

Thus, the first winning port 51 has an open state in which the first bridge 512 protrudes from the game board 31 and guides the game ball to the opening of the cover 511, and a state in which the first bridge 512 is immersed in the game board 31. and a closed state in which the game ball is guided to the out port 39.
Then, the first bridge driving section 514 drives the first bridge 512 to set the first winning port 51 to either an open state or a closed state.

In other words, the first bridge 512 functions as a first guide that guides game balls to the first winning hole 51 .
Then, the first bridge drive unit 514 sets the first bridge 512 to be valid (open state) by causing the first bridge 512 to protrude with respect to the game board 31, and the first bridge 512 is set to the game. The first bridge 512 is disabled (closed state) by immersing it in the board 31 .

As described above, the width D1 of protrusion of the first bridge 512 from the game board 31 is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball. The first bridge 512 can be quickly immersed in the game board 31 as compared with the case where it is set.
According to this, the first bridge driving section 514 is operated by the first bridge 512 immediately after setting the first winning opening 51 to the closed state and immediately before setting the first winning opening 51 to the closed state. It is possible to suppress over-winning in which the game ball guided to the opening of the cover 511 is made to enter the first winning port 51.例文帳に追加

In addition, as described above, the upper surface of the cover 511 has a shape that protrudes toward the cover 521 (opening direction side) from the lower surface of the cover 511, so that the first winning port 51 is closed. In this case, compared to the case where the upper surface portion of the cover 511 does not protrude toward the cover 521 side (opening direction side) from the lower surface portion of the cover 511, the game ball may enter the first winning hole 51 by mistake. It becomes difficult to win prizes.
In this embodiment, the upper surface of the cover 511 protrudes toward the cover 521 (opening direction side) from the lower surface of the cover 511. However, the upper surface of the cover 511 may have a shape that does not protrude.

FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the variable winning device with the second bridge projected. FIG. 11 is a trihedral view of the variable winning device with the second bridge protruding. FIG. 12 is a perspective view showing the detailed configuration of the first bridge and the second bridge with the second bridge projected. Specifically, FIG. 10 is a diagram of the front of the variable winning device 5 as viewed obliquely from the upper right side. 11(A) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 5 viewed from above, FIG. 11(B) is a front view of the variable winning device 5, and FIG. 11(C) is a right side view. It is sectional drawing of the variable winning device 5 seen from the side.
10 to 12 are diagrams showing the variable winning device 5 in a state where only the second bridge 522 is projected.

As shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, the second bridge driving section 524 projects the shaft toward the window panel 22 so that the second bridge 522 is driven through the hole 314 formed in the game board 31. to protrude from the game board 31 (see arrows in FIGS. 11 and 12). Since the second bridge 522 is provided so as to incline from the lower end of the cover 521 to the upper end of the cover 511, by projecting from the game board 31, the game area between the cover 511 and the cover 521 flows down. A game ball to be played can be guided to the opening of the cover 521 (see the arrow in FIG. 11).

Here, the projecting width D1 of the second bridge 522 from the game board 31 is set to be narrower than the interval D2 between the game board 31 and the panel 53 . In other words, the projecting width D1 of the second bridge 522 from the game board 31 is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball.
In this embodiment, the width D1 of protrusion of the second bridge 522 from the game board 31 is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball, but is set to the same width as the diameter of the game ball. It may be set so as to be wider than the diameter of the game ball.

The opening width of the cover 521 is set so as to narrow from the entrance side (left side) toward the back side (right side). According to this, the cover 521 can cause the game ball guided along the slope of the first bridge 522 to enter the second winning hole 52 smoothly.
The upper surface portion of the cover 521 has a shape that protrudes toward the cover 511 side (opening direction side) from the lower surface portion of the cover 521 .

Also, the second bridge driving section 524 retracts the shaft toward the window panel 22 to retract the second bridge 522 into the game board 31 through the hole 314 formed in the game board 31 . By immersing the second bridge 522 in the game board 31 , it is possible to guide the game balls flowing down the game area between the covers 511 and 521 to the out port 39 .

In this way, the second prize winning port 52 has an open state in which the second bridge 522 protrudes from the game board 31 and guides the game balls to the opening of the cover 521, and a state in which the second bridge 522 is immersed in the game board 31. and a closed state in which the game ball is guided to the out port 39.
The second bridge driving section 524 drives the second bridge 522 to set the second prize winning opening 52 to either an open state or a closed state.

In other words, the second bridge 522 functions as a second guide that guides game balls to the second winning opening 52 .
Then, the second bridge drive unit 524 sets the second bridge 522 to be valid (open state) by causing the second bridge 522 to protrude with respect to the game board 31, and the second bridge 522 is set to the game. The second bridge 522 is disabled (closed state) by immersing it in the board 31 .

As described above, the width D1 of protrusion of the second bridge 522 from the game board 31 is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball. The second bridge 522 can be quickly immersed in the game board 31 as compared with the case where it is set.
According to this, the second bridge driving section 524 is operated by the second bridge 522 immediately after setting the second winning opening 52 to the closed state and immediately before setting the second winning opening 52 to the closed state. It is possible to suppress over-winning in which the game ball guided to the opening of the cover 521 wins.

Further, as described above, the upper surface of the cover 521 protrudes toward the cover 511 side (opening direction side) from the lower surface of the cover 521, so that the second winning opening 52 is closed. In this case, compared to the case where the upper surface portion of the cover 521 does not protrude toward the cover 511 side (opening direction side) than the lower surface portion of the cover 521, the game ball may enter the second winning hole 52 by mistake. It becomes difficult to win prizes.
In this embodiment, the upper surface of the cover 521 has a shape that protrudes toward the cover 511 (opening direction side) from the lower surface of the cover 521, but it may have a shape that does not protrude.

Here, the first winning hole 51 and the second winning hole 52 are normally set to a closed state in which game balls cannot win. When the internal lottery wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode and the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the first winning hole 51 or the second winning hole 52 is set to an open state in which game balls can win. be.
The opening and closing execution mode (specific control state) means that the first winning hole 51 or the second winning hole 52 is set to the open state, and the game ball is inserted into the first winning hole 51 or the second winning hole 52. It means a mode that makes it possible to enter the ball. In addition, in the open/close execution mode, after setting the first prize winning port 51 or the second prize winning port 52 to the open state, it is called one round game until it is set to the closed state again.

In the following description, the first winning opening 51 and the second winning opening 52 are also simply referred to as the big winning opening 50 .

Returning to the description of the game board 31, the configuration of the main display device 42 and the like will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 2, the main display device 42 has a main display portion 45 and a character object display portion 46, and includes a segment display (not shown) in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner, , a dot display, etc. are arranged.
The main display device 42 is provided on the game board 31 so as to protrude toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. That is, the main display device 42 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 22 . Also, the distance between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22 is narrower than one game ball. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 prevents game balls from falling between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22.例文帳に追加In other words, the pachinko machine 10 prevents game balls from falling in front of the main display device 42 .

The main display portion 45 includes a first result display portion 45a for displaying the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning at the upper working port 36, and the internal lottery performed based on the winning at the lower working port 37. A second result display section 45b for displaying the result of the lottery is provided (see FIG. 14). The main display unit 45 may further include a round display unit for clearly indicating the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode when the opening/closing execution mode is entered (or when the opening/closing execution mode is entered). .

The first result display unit 45a executes the variable display of the pattern with the winning of the upper working port 36 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper working port 36. to display the results of When the result of this internal lottery is the result corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the first result display section 45a displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.
The second result display unit 45b executes the variable display of the pattern with the winning of the lower working opening 37 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the lower working opening 37. to display the results of When the result of this internal lottery is the result corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the second result display section 45b displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37 function as starting ball entry means for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter, and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters. do.

The character object display unit 46 performs variable display of the pattern with the winning of each through gate 41 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41. to display the results of The accessory display unit 46 displays a predetermined stop result when the result of the internal lottery is the result corresponding to the shift to the electric role open state. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the electric role open state. In this electric operation open state, the electric accessory 37a provided in the lower operation opening 37 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In the present embodiment, the main display unit 45 and the character object display unit 46 are configured by a segment display device, a dot display device, or the like. It may also consist of other types of displays such as EL displays, CRTs, dot matrix, and the like. The patterns to be variably displayed on the main display unit 45 and the accessory display unit 46 include a configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of characters, a configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, and a configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of characters. , or a configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed can be adopted.

The variable display unit 43 includes a pattern display device 47 that variably displays (variable display or switching display) a pattern, which is one type of pattern. Also, the variable display unit 43 has a center frame 48 arranged so as to surround the pattern display device 47 . The upper portion of the center frame 48 is provided so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game balls from falling in front of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, and does not cause the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G is lowered due to the falling of the game balls. It is configured.

The pattern display device 47 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display. This symbol display device 47 starts the variable display of symbols based on the winning to the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37 . That is, when the symbol display device 47 performs the variable display in the first result display section 45a of the main display section 45 and when the second result display section 45b of the main display section 45 performs the variable display, The variable display is executed accordingly.
The pattern display device 47 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or another display device such as a CRT.

The center frame 48 includes a first holding lamp portion 49a provided in the lower left region of the pattern display device 47, a second holding lamp portion 49b provided in the lower right region of the pattern display device 47, and a second holding lamp portion 49b. and a third holding lamp portion 49c provided in the region on the right side of the holding lamp portion 49b.

The first reservation lamp part 49a is a part that displays the number of reserved game balls that have won the upper operation opening 36, and is lit according to the number of reserved balls. The first holding lamp portion 49a can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the first result display portion 45a and the symbol display device 47. FIG.
The second reservation lamp part 49b is a part that displays the number of reserved game balls that have won the lower operation opening 37, and lights up according to the number of reserved games. The second holding lamp portion 49b can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the second result display portion 45b and the symbol display device 47. FIG.
The third reservation lamp portion 49c is a portion that displays the number of reserved game balls that have won each through gate 41, and lights up according to the number of reserved games. The third holding lamp portion 49 c can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the accessory display portion 46 .
It should be noted that each of the holding lamp units 49a to 49c may have another configuration such as being displayed as an image on a part of the pattern display device 47. FIG.

FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display screen of the pattern display device.
As shown in FIG. 13, the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is divided into three columns of display areas. Column Z3 is displayed. In each pattern row Z1 to Z3, 8 kinds of patterns consisting of numbers "1" to "8" are arranged in ascending order from the bottom to the top, and "8" is followed by "1". configured as follows. In addition, in FIG. 13, the center line of each display area is shown by the dashed-dotted line.

The symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) based on the winning of the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37. By starting the variable display of symbols, an effect for a game round is executed on the display screen G. - 特許庁The effect for this game round is switched from the variable display to the stop display in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2, and finally, predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed on the effective line L. end with a state
In other words, the game cycle means the period from the start of variable display on the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47 to the display of a predetermined stop result based on the wins to the operation ports 36 and 37 .

It should be noted that the pattern display device 47 is not limited to this, and may be arbitrarily selected. For example, the number of symbol rows, the direction of scrolling of each symbol row, the number of symbols of each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns in each pattern row may be a combination of a picture and a number instead of only numbers, or may be a picture only.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 14, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a sound emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 includes a payout control device 70 for executing payout control for causing the payout device 71 to pay out game balls, and a power source/power source for executing shooting control for causing the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot game balls. and a launch control device 80, which are mounted on the back pack unit.

The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control (main control) of the game, and a power outage monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. Note that the main controller 60 includes a board box that houses the main control board 61 and the like. The substrate box may comprise marking means for marking upon its opening and may comprise marking structures for marking upon its opening. Specifically, as trace means, a circuit board box is formed by connecting a plurality of case bodies, and a connecting part (crimped part) that requires breaking of a predetermined part when separating each case body is provided, or a structure that peels off At this time, it is possible to adopt a structure in which a sealing seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off because the adhesive layer remains on the object to be adhered is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the plurality of case bodies. Also, as the trace structure, it is possible to employ a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between these case bodies.

The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61 and a ROM 63 and a RAM 64 that constitute the MPU 62 . Here, the MPU 62 is an element in which, in addition to the ROM 63 and RAM 64, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, and the like are combined into a chip.
In this embodiment, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 62, but they may be integrated into individual chips. This also applies to the MPUs of other controllers other than the main controller 60 .

The ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside to hold stored information. The ROM 63 has various areas such as a win/fail table storage area 63a, a distribution table storage area 63b, and a reach table storage area 63c. These areas are described in detail later.
The RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 63, and is a volatile storage means that requires external power supply to hold the stored information. is. This RAM 64 has various areas such as a various counter area 64a, a reserved ball storage area 64b, and an electrical work reservation area 64c. These areas are described in detail later.

The MPU 62 has an input port and an output port. An input port of the MPU 62 is connected to a power failure monitor board 65 provided in the main controller 60 and a plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40f. The output port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, the payout control device 70, and the sound emission control device 90. In addition, the output port of the MPU 62 includes an electric accessory drive unit 37b that opens and closes the electric accessory 37a of the lower operation port 37, and a first bridge drive unit that projects and retracts the first bridge 512 of the variable prize winning device 5. 514 , a second bridge driving section 524 that causes the second bridge 522 of the variable winning device 5 to project and retract, the main display section 45 , and the accessory display section 46 .

The main control board 61 has a driver circuit. The MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric role open state, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b to open and close the electric accessory 37a. Also, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the first bridge driving section 514 and the second bridge driving section 524 to cause the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 to protrude. Also, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the main display section 45 to display the results of the internal lottery performed based on the winnings to the operation ports 36 and 37 . Further, the MPU 62 executes display control of the accessory display section 46 to display the results of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41 .

The blackout monitoring board 65 relays the main control board 61 and the power supply/launch control device 80 having a function of supplying operating power, and monitors the stable DC voltage of 24 volts output from the power supply/launch control device 80. . Therefore, the MPU 62 receives power through the blackout monitoring board 65 .
The detection sensors 40a to 40f are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the upper operation opening 36, the lower operation opening 37, various winning openings of the variable winning device 5, the out opening 39, and each through gate 41. The MPU 62 performs prize winning determination (ball entry determination) to various prize winning ports, the out port 39, and each through gate 41 based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40a to 40f. In addition, the MPU 62 executes an internal lottery based on the winning determination for the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37 .

The payout control device 70 executes payout control to cause the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls and rental balls (game balls to be lent to players during games) based on commands (control instructions) transmitted from the main control device 60. do.

The power supply/launch control device 80 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, the power supply/launch control device 80 generates the operating power required for each of the main control board 61 and the payout control device 70 based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, and the generated operation supply power. The power/launch control device 80 includes a power failure power supply unit such as a backup capacitor. This power-off power supply unit supplies power for memory retention to the RAM 64 of the main control unit 60 even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted.

In addition, the power supply/shooting control device 80 executes shooting control for causing the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot game balls. Here, the game ball shooting mechanism 81 includes a shooting rail extending toward the guide rail 34 of the game board 31, a ball feeding device for supplying game balls stored in the upper tray 25a onto the shooting rail, and a and a solenoid that is an electric actuator that shoots the game ball supplied to the guide rail 34 toward the guide rail 34 . The power supply/launch control device 80 supplies a drive signal (launch permission signal) to the solenoid to launch the game ball when a predetermined launch condition is met.

<Electrical Configuration for Execution of Internal Lottery by MPU 62 of Main Control Unit 60>
FIG. 15 is a diagram showing the contents of each counter used for internal lottery.
The MPU 62, as shown in FIG. 15, uses the values (information) of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 to execute an internal lottery or the like. Specifically, the MPU 62 uses the big win random number counter C1 for the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, uses the big win type counter C2 for the lottery for the type of the big win, and determines whether to generate the ready-to-win display. , the reach random number counter C3 is used. Also, the MPU 62 uses the random number initial value counter CINI to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and uses the variation type counter CS to determine the display continuation time on the main display section 45 and the symbol display device 47. Further, the MPU 62 uses the electric accessory open counter C4 for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 37a of the lower operation port 37 is set to the electric role open state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 (see FIG. 14).

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 . Of the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b (see FIG. 14) provided as acquired information storage means. Further, among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 is stored in the electric role holding area 64c (see FIG. 14) of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 41. be done.

The reserved ball storage area 64b includes a first result display section reservation area Ra, a second result display section reservation area Rb, and an execution area AE.

The first result display holding area Ra provided as the first acquired information storage means has four storage areas of a first area Ra1 to a fourth area Ra4. Each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 is set to have a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 uses a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as reservation information in time series to each area Ra1 to Ra4 in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 36. store it. Specifically, when the winning to the upper working port 36 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the MPU 62 outputs the pending information in the order of the first area Ra1→second area Ra2→third area Ra3→fourth area Ra4. Store in chronological order.

As described above, since the first result display portion reservation area Ra includes four storage areas, up to four winnings of game balls to the upper operation opening 36 are reserved. In addition, the first result display reserved area Ra includes storage areas for writing the reserved numbers stored in the areas Ra1 to Ra4.
In addition, the number of reservations related to the upper working port 36 is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more, and may be singular. may

The second result display holding area Rb provided as the second acquired information storage means comprises four storage areas, a first area Rb1 to a fourth area Rb4. Each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 is set to have a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 uses a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as reservation information in time series to each area Rb1 to Rb4 in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the lower operation port 37. store it. Specifically, when the winning to the lower opening 37 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the MPU 62 outputs the pending information in the order of the first area Rb1→second area Rb2→third area Rb3→fourth area Rb4. Store in chronological order.

As described above, since the second result display portion reservation area Rb has four storage areas, up to four winnings of game balls into the lower operation opening 37 are reserved. The second result display portion reservation area Rb has a storage area for writing the number of reservations stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4.
In addition, the number of reserves related to the lower working port 37 is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more, and may be singular. may

The execution area AE stores the pending information stored in the storage area of the first result display portion pending area Ra or the second result display portion pending area Rb when starting the variable display of each of the result display portions 45a and 45b. This is the area to move the .

The electrician reservation area 64c includes four storage areas, like the first result display reservation area Ra and the second result display reservation area Rb. Therefore, the winning of game balls to each through gate 41 is reserved up to four.
The number of pending gates 41 is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more. may

<Detailed description of each counter>
The details of each counter will be described below.
First, the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. For example, the electric accessory release counter C4 is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 250 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 250. ing.
The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the electric role holding area 64c of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins in each through gate 41. be.
Then, based on the value of the electric role product open counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64c, the MPU 62 draws a lottery (electric role object release lottery).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of support modes with mutually different frequencies of enabling game balls to enter the lower operation opening 37 by setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a low frequency support mode (low frequency guide state) in which the frequency of setting the electric role product 37a to the open state is relatively low, and the frequency of setting the electric role product 37a to the open state is low. and a relatively high frequency support mode (high frequency guide state).

The low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode have the same probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery (for example, both 4/5). However, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state more times when the electric role open state is won, and the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state. The opening time of one time to do is also getting longer. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the closing time for setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state between each opening in the one-time electrical open state is shorter than the opening time of one time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time (role The duration of one fluctuation display in the object display section 46) is shortened.

Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, game balls are more likely to enter the lower operation opening 37 as compared with the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning in the upper working opening 36 than in the lower working opening 37 . In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that the game ball will enter the lower operating port 37 is higher than the upper operating port 36.例文帳に追加
When it is detected that a prize has been entered into the lower operating port 37, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game while not reducing the number of game balls. It can be carried out.

Note that the configurations of the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are not limited to this. For example, the high frequency support mode may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery as compared to the low frequency support mode. Further, for example, a plurality of types of reserved time may be prepared, and the high-frequency support mode may be configured so that it is easier to select a shorter reserved time than the low-frequency support mode, and the average of the selected reserved time may be configured to be shortened. Furthermore, by combining the conditions of the number of times the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the opening time, and the securing time, the high frequency support mode changes the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state to the low frequency support mode. may be configured to be relatively high compared to .

Next, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. For example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 599. . Also, the jackpot random number counter C1 reads the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time as an initial value each time it loops. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599, like the jackpot random number counter C1.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is transferred to the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. stored in Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the reservation area Ra for the first result display portion of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 36, and the game ball wins in the lower operating port 37. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery for the occurrence of a big hit (win/fail lottery) based on the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a success/failure table storing values of random numbers for winning a big win.
Among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored in the hit/fail table storage area 63a (see FIG. 14) of the ROM 63 provided as the hit/fail information group storage means, as shown in FIG. (whether or not information group).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has two winning lottery modes, a low probability mode (low probability state) in which it is difficult to win a big win and a high probability mode (high probability state) in which it is easy to win a big win. . The success/failure table includes a success/failure table for the low-probability mode (low-probability success/failure information group) shown in FIG. group).
The MPU 62 executes a lottery for the occurrence of a big hit by comparing these win/fail tables with the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

These hit/fail tables have lottery results (hit/fail results) of occurrence of a plurality of jackpots, such as "jackpot win", "special loss result", and "ordinary loss result".
Specifically, under the gaming state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, as shown in FIG. is.
On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the success/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to for the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, as shown in FIG. is. Here, the value of the random number for winning the jackpot stored in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is included in the value of the random number for "winning the jackpot" stored in the success/failure table for the high-probability mode.

The value and number of random numbers stored in each success/failure table are arbitrary, and it is sufficient that the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a "big win" than the low probability mode. Further, the value of the random number for "winning the jackpot" stored in the success/failure table for the high-probability mode must not include the value of the random number for "winning the jackpot" stored in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode. Alternatively, it may include a part of the random number values that are stored in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode and become the "big win".

In addition, in each win/fail lottery mode, random numbers other than "big win winning" results in a loss without winning a big win.
Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of loss results, ie, the "special loss result (small win result)" and the "normal loss result". These outliers are common in that none of them serve as a trigger for shifting to the lottery mode or the support mode. However, the difference is that the "special deviation result" serves as a trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, whereas the "normal deviation result" does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode.

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 29 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 29. .
The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. stored in Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the reservation area Ra for the first result display portion of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operation port 36, and the game ball wins in the lower operation port 37. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (distribution lottery) for the jackpot type when the jackpot occurs.

FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an allocation table storing random number values relating to allocation destinations of types of jackpots.
As shown in FIG. 17, the values of random numbers related to the allocation destination of the jackpot type are stored in the allocation table storage area 63b (see FIG. 14) of the ROM 63 provided as the allocation information group storage means. minute information group). The distribution table includes a first distribution table (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 17(a) and a second distribution table (second distribution information group) shown in FIG. 17(b). ing.
The MPU 62 executes a jackpot type lottery by comparing these distribution tables with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

In the first distribution table, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the reservation area Ra for the first result display unit to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning to the upper operation port 36 It is a table referred to when performing a lottery for the type of jackpot.
As shown in FIG. 17A, the first distribution table includes "low probability result (special distribution result corresponding to low probability)", "non-explicit small round high probability result (latency high probability result corresponding to small round )”, “explicit small-round high-probability result (high-probability result corresponding to few-rounds)”, and “most advantageous result (special distribution result corresponding to high-probability)” are the distribution destinations. Specifically, in the first distribution table, among the values “0 to 29” of the jackpot type counter C2, “0 to 9” are distributed to “low probability results”, and “10 to 14” are distributed to “unspecified low ``15 to 19'' are assigned to ``Highly Probable Round Results'', and ``20 to 29'' are assigned to ``Most Favorable Results''.

In the second distribution table, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the second result display portion reservation area Rb to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning to the lower operation port 37 It is a table referred to when performing a lottery for the type of jackpot.
The second distribution table, as shown in FIG. 17(b), has two distribution results, "low probability result" and "best result", as distribution destinations. Specifically, in the second distribution table, among the values “0 to 29” of the jackpot type counter C2, “0 to 9” are distributed to “low probability results”, and “10 to 29” are the “best results” ”.

Each distribution result has a difference in at least one of the following conditions (1) to (3).
(1) Winner lottery mode after completion of opening/closing execution mode (2) Support mode after completion of opening/closing execution mode (3) Aspect of opening/closing control of variable winning device 5 in opening/closing execution mode

First, the difference between the win/fail lottery modes (1) will be described.
The "low-probability result" is a distribution result in which the win-or-fail lottery mode is set to the low-probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the winning/failure lottery mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This low-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery.
"Unexplained few rounds high probability result", "Explicit few rounds high probability result", and "Most favorable result" are high probability of winning lottery mode after opening and closing execution mode regardless of the winning lottery mode before closing execution mode. This is the distribution result set in the mode. This high-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery.

Next, the difference in support mode (2) will be described.
The "low probability result" is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This high-frequency support mode shifts to a low-frequency support mode when the game times reach the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times).

The "non-explicit few rounds high probability result" is a distribution result that maintains the support mode before the end of the open/close execution mode. Here, if the support mode before the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode continues at least until "big win" is won in the lottery.
The "explicit few rounds high probability result" and "most advantageous result" are distribution results in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This high-frequency support mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery.

The difference in the opening/closing control mode of the variable winning device 5 in the opening/closing execution mode (3) will be described later in detail.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 238 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 238. .
The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37. stored in Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36, and the game ball enters the lower operating port 37. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (reach generation lottery) to determine whether to generate a reach display based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

The ready-to-win display is an expectation effect that occurs when the winning lottery does not result in a "big win" but results in a "normal failure".
Specifically, the MPU 62 determines the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reach table and the reserved ball storage area 64b when the result of the win/fail lottery does not result in a "big hit" but results in a "normal loss". By comparing with , a lottery is executed as to whether or not to generate a ready-to-win display, and when the ready-to-win display is to be generated in this lottery, the ready-to-win display is generated. The ready-to-win table is a table that stores values of random numbers related to occurrence of the ready-to-win display, and is stored in the ready-to-win table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 (see FIG. 14).

Here, in the case of "big win winning" in the lottery lottery and "most advantageous result" in the distribution lottery, the symbol display device 47 displays the same odd number or the same even number as the stop result. A combination of symbols having a number of is stopped on the activated line L. In addition, when "big win winning" is obtained in the winning lottery and "low probability result" is distributed in the distribution lottery, the symbol display device 47 displays a combination of symbols having the same even number as the stop result. is stopped on the effective line L. In addition, if it becomes "jackpot winning" in the winning lottery and is distributed to "unspecified small round high probability result" or "explicit small round high probability result" in the distribution lottery, or "jackpot winning" in the lottery lottery In the event that a "special failure result" is obtained without becoming, the symbol display device 47 selects a "normal failure result" in the winning lottery instead of a combination of symbols having the same number as the stop result. A special combination of symbols having numbers different from each other, which will never be displayed, is stopped on the activated line L. - 特許庁

The reach display is when the combination of symbols with the same number is finally stopped and displayed (it becomes a "big hit" in the winning lottery, and is distributed to the "best result" or "low probability result" in the distribution lottery. ), it occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, the reach display is used when the combination of special symbols is finally stopped and displayed ("jackpot winning" in the winning lottery, "unspecified small round high probability result" or "explicit small round high probability" in the distribution lottery) In the case of being sorted to "probable result" or "special losing result" instead of "big hit winning" in the winning lottery), it does not occur regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

In the ready-to-win display mode, some of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 (for example, the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3) are displayed on the activated line L. By stopping and displaying, the same combination of symbols is displayed to indicate the result of stopping, and in that state, the remaining symbol rows (for example, the symbol row Z2) are variably displayed.
Therefore, by generating the ready-to-win display, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big win" in the lottery after the start of the variable display on the pattern display device 47 and before displaying the predetermined stop result, Players can be expected to be sorted into a "low probability result" or "best result" in the sorting lottery.

Note that the ready-to-win display mode is not limited to this, and a part of the symbol rows are stopped and displayed, and the remaining symbol rows are variably displayed, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed in the background as a moving image. Alternatively, each pattern row may be reduced or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like may be displayed on substantially the entire display screen G as a moving image.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has an expected effect as a kind of variable display of the pattern display device 47. - 特許庁The expectation effect is such that the player expects that he or she has won a "big win" in the lottery after the start of the variable display on the symbol display device 47 and before the predetermined stop result is displayed. I mean performance. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of expectation effects, namely, the aforementioned ready-to-win display and advance notice display.

The notice display will not be "jackpot winning" in the lottery if it becomes "jackpot winning" in the lottery, or if it becomes "special losing result" without becoming "jackpot winning" in the lottery lottery. This is an expected effect that makes the effect more likely to occur than in the case of the "normal deviation result". This advance notice display may make it easier to select an effect with a low appearance rate instead of making the effect more likely to occur, or may be combined.
While the lottery to determine whether or not to generate the ready-to-win display is performed by the main controller 60, the lottery to determine whether to generate the advance notice display is performed by the sound emission control device 90. .

The mode of the advance notice display is that of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed, and some of the symbol rows (for example, symbol row Z1) is stopped on the activated line L, and a plurality of symbol rows (for example, symbol rows Z2 and Z3) are variably displayed or ready-to-win display is generated, a predetermined character etc. are displayed on the display screen G as moving images. This notice display occurs both when the reach display is generated and when the reach display is not generated, but it is set so that it is more likely to occur when the reach display is generated than when the reach display is not generated. It is
Note that the advance notice display is not limited to this, and for example, the background may be changed, and the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 may be changed and displayed.

Finally, the fluctuation type counter CS will be explained. For example, the fluctuation type counter CS is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 198 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value 198. .
The fluctuation type counter CS is updated at least once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is stored in the lottery counter buffer each time it is updated.
Then, the MPU 62 determines the pattern display duration time on the main display section 45 and the pattern display duration time on the pattern display device 47 based on the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer. These display duration times will be described later in detail.

<Regarding Various Processing Executed by Main Controller 60>
The MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing that advances the game, and main processing that is activated when the power is turned on. Timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing will be described in order below.
In addition to timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing, the MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but description of this processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing.
In timer interrupt processing, the MPU 62 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) executes steps S101 to S105, as shown in FIG.

In step S101, the MPU 62 executes reading processing of the plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40f. In this reading process, the MPU 62 reads the states of the plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40f, determines the states, and stores them in the RAM 64 as winning detection information. When the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensors 40a to 40d corresponding to various winning holes detect the winning of game balls, it sets a prize ball command for instructing the payout of the prize balls, and sets this set prize ball command. A command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . For example, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 40c corresponding to the first winning hole 51 has detected the winning of the game ball, payout control of a prize ball command for instructing 10 prize balls. When it is determined that the detection sensor 40d corresponding to the second winning hole 52 has detected the winning of game balls, a prize ball command for designating 15 prize balls is paid out. Send to the control device 70 .
The payout control device 70 performs payout control to cause the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command transmitted from the MPU 62 .

In step S102, the MPU 62 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 adds 1 to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI to update it, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. do. Note that the MPU 62 returns the value of the random number initial value counter CINI to 0 and clears it if it reaches the maximum value when adding 1 to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI.

In step S103, the MPU 62 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 adds 1 to each of the previous values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessary product release counter C4 and updates them. The subsequent value is stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 . Note that the MPU 62 returns the values of the counters C1 to C4 to 0 and clears them when the previous values of the counters C1 to C4 have reached the maximum value when 1 is added thereto.

In step S104, the MPU 62 executes the winning process for through. In this through winning process, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 40f corresponding to each through gate 41 has detected the winning of the game ball, the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric service reservation area 64c. Also, the MPU 62 sets a command for lighting the third suspension lamp portion 49 c and transmits the set command to the sound emission control device 90 .
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 turns on the third suspension lamp part 49c based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Further, the number of reserved game balls that have won the through gate 41 is, as described above, a maximum of four, and the third reservation lamp portion 49c is lit by the number corresponding to this reserved number.

In step S105, the MPU 62 executes the winning process for the working opening.
The prize winning process for the operating port will be described in detail below.

<Winning process for operating port>
FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the prize winning process for the working opening.
In the winning process for the working opening, the MPU 62 executes steps S201 to S207 as shown in FIG.

In step S201, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the detection sensor 40a corresponding to the upper operation port 36 has detected the winning of the game ball, thereby determining whether the game ball has won the upper operation port 36 (start winning). determine whether When the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has won in the upper working port 36, in step S202, the number of reserved balls stored in the first result display section reserved area Ra is grasped, and the reserved number is determined. The number is set in a predetermined storage area in the first result display section reservation area Ra as the first start-up reservation storage number RaN. Then, MPU62 performs the process after step S205.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has not entered the upper operating port 36, in step S203, the detection sensor 40b corresponding to the lower operating port 37 detects the winning of the game ball. is detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the lower operation opening 37 (start winning).
When the MPU 62 determines in step S203 that the game ball has not entered the lower working opening 37, it ends the winning processing for the working opening. In addition, when the MPU 62 determines that the game ball has won the lower operation opening 37 in step S203, in step S204, the number of reservations stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is grasped, The pending number is set in a predetermined storage area in the second result display portion pending area Rb as the second start pending storage number RbN. Then, MPU62 performs the process after step S205.

After executing the process of step S202 or step S204, the MPU 62 checks in step S205 if the number of starting suspension memories N (RaN or RbN) set in step S202 or step S204 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Determine whether or not there is
When the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the start suspension memory number N is not less than the upper limit value, the MPU 62 ends the prize winning process for the operation port. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the start pending memory number N is less than the upper limit value, the MPU 62 adds 1 to the value of the start pending memory number N and updates it in step S206.

In step S207, the MPU 62 stores a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process out of the empty storage area of the reservation area for the result display section. The suspension information is stored in the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the start suspension storage number N updated in step S206.

For example, when the MPU 62 sets the first start pending memory number RaN in step S202, each of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process A set of values is stored as pending information in the first storage area of the empty storage areas in the first result display portion pending area Ra, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the first start pending storage number RaN updated in step S206. For example, when the MPU 62 sets "3" to the first start pending memory number RaN in step S202, the MPU 62 stores "4" in the first start pending memory number RaN updated in step S206. Hold information is stored in a certain fourth area Ra4.

Also, for example, when the MPU 62 sets the second start pending memory number RbN in step S204, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process are stored as suspension information in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the second result display section storage area Rb, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the second start suspension storage number RbN updated in step S206. do. For example, when the MPU 62 sets "3" to the second start pending memory number RbN in step S204, the MPU 62 stores the second start pending memory number RbN in the storage area corresponding to "4" updated in step S206. Hold information is stored in a certain fourth area Rb4.

Further, in step S207, the MPU 62 sets a command for turning on the first reservation lamp section 49a or the second reservation lamp section 49b, and transmits the set command to the sound emission control device 90. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the prize winning process for the operating port.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 turns on the first reservation lamp section 49a or the second reservation lamp section 49b based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62 . In addition, the number of reserved game balls that have won the upper operation opening 36 or the lower operation opening 37 is, as described above, a maximum of four pieces, and the first reservation lamp portion 49a or the second reservation lamp portion 49b is this reservation number The corresponding number of lights up.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing.
The MPU 62 executes a main process, which will be described later, which is activated when the power is turned on, and then executes a normal process, which is the main process for advancing the game. In this normal process, the MPU 62 executes steps S301 to S314 as shown in FIG. Specifically, the MPU 62 periodically executes steps S301 to S309 at a cycle of 4 msec, repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 when a remaining time occurs, and executes step S312 and subsequent steps according to the determination result of step S308. Run.

In step S301, the MPU 62 executes timer interrupt processing or external output processing for transmitting commands set in the previous normal processing to each sub-side control device. In this external output process, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the prize ball command is set, and if it determines that the prize ball command is set, the prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 70 Send. Further, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a command for effect such as a command corresponding to the effect for the game round or a command corresponding to the effect for the open/close execution mode is set, and the command for effect is determined. When it is determined that it is set, the command for that effect is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .

In step S302, the MPU 62 updates the variation type counter CS. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 adds 1 to the previous value of the fluctuation type counter CS to update it, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. . In addition, when the MPU 62 has reached the maximum value when adding 1 to the previous value of the fluctuation type counter CS, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is returned to 0 and cleared.

In step S303, the MPU 62 executes game round control processing for advancing the game round. In the game round control process, the MPU 62 executes a win/fail lottery and a sorting lottery, determines information related to a pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the pattern display device 47, and determines a pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45. decision of information related to
In step S304, the MPU 62 executes game state transition processing for shifting the game state. In the game state transition processing, the MPU 62 executes transition processing to each game state such as the opening/closing execution mode, the high probability mode, and the high frequency support mode.
The game round control process in step S303 and the game state transition process in step S304 will be described later in detail.

In step S305, the MPU 62 executes demonstration display execution determination processing. In this demonstration display execution determination process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 30 seconds) for starting a demonstration has elapsed without a new game round being started after the game round has ended. However, when it is determined that the start waiting period has elapsed, a demo command for starting the demo display is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .
Note that the sound emission control device 90 starts the demonstration display execution process based on the demonstration command transmitted from the MPU 62 .

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the start waiting period has passed by counting the number of times the process of step S305 is executed. For example, if the start waiting period is 30 sec and the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S305 is 4 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of times the process of step S305 is executed, and when it reaches 7500 times, the start waiting period is determined to have passed. Note that the configuration for measuring the start waiting period is arbitrary, and for example, the start waiting period may be measured using a real-time clock. In addition, when the MPU 62 starts a new game round while counting the number of execution times of the process of step S305, the count value is reset.

In step S<b>306 , the MPU 62 executes an electric support process for executing drive control of the electric accessory 37 a provided in the lower working port 37 . In this electric role support process, the MPU 62 executes the electric role product opening lottery based on the value of the electric role product opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64c of the RAM 64, and the electric role product opening lottery. When winning, the opening/closing process of the electric accessory 37a is executed. Further, the MPU 62 performs display control of the accessory display unit 46 so as to display the result of the electric accessory open lottery.

In step S307, the MPU 62 executes game ball launch control processing. In this game ball shooting control process, the MPU 62 causes the power supply/shooting control device 80 to execute shooting control for shooting a game ball based on the rotation of the shooting handle 27 by the player. Specifically, the power supply/shooting control device 80 causes the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot a game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 at a predetermined cycle (0.6 sec in this embodiment). . In addition, the solenoid is energized so as to shoot the game ball with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the shooting handle 27 . Further, the power supply/shooting control device 80 supplies a drive signal to the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot the game ball when a predetermined shooting condition is met.

In step S308, the MPU 62 determines whether a power failure flag is set in a power failure flag storage area (not shown) of the RAM 64 or not. This power failure flag is set in the RAM 64 when a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitor board 65 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 62 . The power failure monitoring board 65 outputs this power failure signal when it confirms the occurrence of power failure. This power failure flag is cleared when the main process is executed next time.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 sets various flags by substituting 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 or the like, and clears various flags by substituting 0. For example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the power outage flag by substituting 1 in the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 64 and clears the power outage flag by substituting 0 in the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 64 .

When the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag is set in step S308, the MPU 62 executes the power failure processing of step S312 and subsequent steps without executing the processing of step S309 and subsequent steps. Specifically, in step S312, the MPU 62 prohibits the generation of timer interrupt processing. In step S313, the MPU 62 calculates and stores a RAM determination value (checksum of the RAM 64). In step S314, MPU62 prohibits the access to RAM64. After that, the MPU 62 continues the infinite loop until the power supply is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S308 that the power failure flag has not been set, in step S309 it determines whether the timing for executing the next normal process has come, that is, whether the current normal process has It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has not yet arrived, that is, when the remaining time has occurred, in step S310 the random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and in step S311. , the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. The MPU 62 repeats steps S308 to S311 until it determines in step S309 that it is time to execute the next normal process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has come, that is, if the remaining time has not occurred, the next normal process is executed by executing step S301 again. Begin normal processing.

<Main processing>
FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main processing.
In the main process, the MPU 62 executes steps S401 to S412 as shown in FIG.
In step S401, the MPU 62 executes start-up processing upon power-on. In this start-up process, the MPU 62 waits for a predetermined time (for example, about 500 msec) after the power is turned on in order to wait for the sub-side control board (such as the control board of the sound emission control device 90) to become operable. ) has passed.

In step S402, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the permission prohibition period of 1 sec has elapsed. When the MPU 62 determines that 1 sec has not passed in step S402, it repeats the process of step S402. Further, when the MPU 62 determines that 1 sec has passed in step S402, the MPU 62 executes the processing after step S403.

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not 1 sec has passed by counting the number of times the process of step S402 is executed. For example, if the interval for repeatedly executing the processing of step S402 is 0.1 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of executions of the processing of step S402 and determines that 1 sec has elapsed when the number reaches 10000 times. Note that the configuration for measuring the permission prohibition period is arbitrary. For example, the permission prohibition period may be measured using a real-time clock.

In step S403, MPU62 permits the access to RAM64.
In step S404, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a RAM erase switch (not shown) provided in the power/emission control device 80 is turned on.
When the MPU 62 determines that the RAM erase switch is turned on in step S404, it executes the processing from step S409.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is not turned on, it determines in step S405 whether or not the power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64. do.

When the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag is not set in step S405, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S409.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag is set in step S405, it calculates the RAM determination value in step S406.
At step S407, the MPU 62 confirms the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 by determining whether the RAM determination value calculated at step S406 is normal. Specifically, the MPU 62 compares the RAM determination value calculated in step S406 with the RAM determination value saved in step S313 (power failure processing) of the normal processing, and if they match, , the RAM determination value is determined to be normal, and if they do not match, the RAM determination value is determined to be abnormal.

When the MPU 62 determines that the RAM determination value is not normal in step S407, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S409.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the RAM determination value is normal in step S407, it clears the power failure flag stored in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64 in step S408.

The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be determined by a method different from the method of confirming the consistency of the RAM determination value. The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be confirmed by determining in the main processing whether or not the keyword has been written normally.

As described above, when the MPU 62 determines that the RAM erase switch is turned on in step S404, determines that the power failure flag is not set in step S405, or determines that the RAM determination value is not normal, the processing from step S409 is executed.
Specifically, the MPU 62 clears the work area of the RAM 64 in step S409, and initializes the RAM 64 in step S410.

Therefore, for example, the administrator of the game hall can initialize the data stored in the RAM 64 by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM erase switch at the start of business of the game hall. Moreover, the pachinko machine 10 initializes the data stored in the RAM 64 when the occurrence of a power failure is not confirmed by the power failure monitoring board 65 or when the RAM determination value is abnormal.

After executing the process of step S408 or step S410, the MPU 62 transmits an initial command to the sub-side control board (such as the control board of the sound emission control device 90) in step S411, and timer interrupt in step S412. Allow the process to occur, and shift to the above-described normal process.
By receiving the initial command transmitted in step S411, the sub-side control board recognizes that communication with the main control board 61 is being performed normally, and executes its own initialization. do.

<Game Round Control Processing>
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game round control process.
In the game round control process, the MPU 62 executes steps S501 to S509 as shown in FIG.
In step S501, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. When the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that the game is in the opening/closing execution mode, it ends the game round control process without executing the processes after step S502. Therefore, when it is determined that the open/close execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 does not start the progress of the game cycle regardless of whether or not the winning of the game ball to the operation ports 36 and 37 is detected.
The MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress by referring to the opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64 . The same applies to each of the following processes. The MPU 62 sets the opening/closing execution mode flag when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, and clears the opening/closing execution mode flag when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that the open/close execution mode is not in progress, in step S502 it determines whether the main display section 45 is performing variable display. Determine whether or not
When the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display section 45 is not performing the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the game round start processing in steps S503 to S505.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display section 45 is performing the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the game cycle progressing process in steps S506 to S509.

First, the processing for starting a game cycle in steps S503 to S505 will be described.
In step S503, the MPU 62 grasps the number of reservations stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra and the number of reservations stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb, and these numbers of reservations is equal to or less than "0". When the MPU 62 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is equal to or less than "0", it ends the game round control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is not "0" or less, in step S504, the first result display section reservation area Ra or the second result display section reservation area A data setting process is executed to set the pending information stored in Rb for completion of game rounds. After that, in step S505, the MPU 62 causes the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47 to start variable display, executes a variation start process for finishing the game round, and ends the game round control process.
The data setting process in step S504 and the variation start process in step S505 will be described in detail below.

FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a flowchart of data setting processing.
In the data setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S601 to S611 as shown in FIG.
In step S601, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second start reservation memory number RbN in the second result display section reservation area Rb set in step S204 of the operation port winning process is "0" or less. do. When the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start pending memory number RbN is equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 executes data setting processing for the first result display section in steps S602 to S606, and proceeds to step S601. If it is determined that the second start pending memory number RbN is not equal to or less than "0", data setting processing for the second result display section in steps S607 to S611 is executed.

In this way, the data setting process includes the data setting process for the first result display section for setting the reservation information stored in the reservation area Ra for the first result display section for completing the game cycle, and the data setting processing for the second result display section. and a data setting process for the second result display section for setting the reservation information stored in the reservation area Rb for completion of the game cycle.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start pending storage number RbN is not equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 does not execute the data setting process for the first result display section. Execute the data setting process for In other words, when the MPU 62 determines that there is reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 37, the operation to the upper operation opening 36 is performed. The reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is preferentially played regardless of whether or not there is reservation information stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra based on the winning of the game ball. Set for one digestion.

First, data setting processing for the first result display section in steps S602 to S606 will be described.
In step S602, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the first start pending storage number RaN in the first result display portion pending area Ra to update the value.
In step S603, the MPU 62 moves the pending information stored in the first area Ra1 of the first result display portion pending area Ra to the execution area AE.
In step S604, the MPU 62 executes data shift processing for shifting the pending information stored in the storage area of the first result display portion pending area Ra. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the pending information stored in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 to the first area Ra1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the pending information in the second area Ra2 to the first area Ra1, shifts the pending information in the third area Ra3 to the second area Ra2, and shifts the pending information in the fourth area Ra4 to the third area Ra1. Shift to area Ra3.

At step S605, the MPU 62 clears the second result display flag stored in the RAM 64. FIG. This second result display section flag is a flag for specifying which main display section 45, out of the first result display section 45a and the second result display section 45b, starts the variable display when completing a game round. is. In this step S605, the MPU 62 clears the second result display section flag, so that when the game cycle is completed, the variable display is made on the first result display section 45a based on the winning of the game ball into the upper working hole 36. indicates that the

In step S606, the MPU 62 sets a shift command for recognizing that the hold information has been shifted, transmits the set shift command to the sound emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This command at the time of shift indicates that the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit has been shifted based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 36. It contains information for 90 to recognize.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the first holding lamp portion 49a based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 reduces the lighting number of the first reservation lamp portion 49a as the number of reserved game balls that have won the upper operation opening 36 decreases.

Next, data setting processing for the second result display section in steps S607 to S611 will be described.
In step S607, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the second start pending storage number RbN in the second result display portion pending area Rb to update it.
In step S608, the MPU 62 moves the pending information stored in the first area Rb1 of the second result display portion pending area Rb to the execution area AE.
In step S609, the MPU 62 executes data shift processing for shifting the pending information stored in the storage area of the second result display portion pending area Rb. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the pending information stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 to the first area Rb1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the pending information of the second area Rb2 to the first area Rb1, shifts the pending information of the third area Rb3 to the second area Rb2, shifts the pending information of the fourth area Rb4 to the third Shift to area Rb3.

At step S610, the MPU 62 sets the second result display section flag in the RAM 64. FIG. In this step S610, the MPU 62 sets the second result display section flag, so that when the game cycle is completed, the second result display section 45b displays a variable display based on the winning of the game ball into the lower operation opening 37. indicates that the

In step S611, the MPU 62 sets a shift command for recognizing that the hold information has been shifted, transmits the set shift command to the sound emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This command at the time of shift indicates that the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit has been shifted based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 37. It contains information for 90 to recognize.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the second holding lamp portion 49b based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 reduces the lighting number of the second reservation lamp portion 49b as the number of reserved game balls that have entered the lower opening 37 decreases.

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start process.
In the fluctuation start process, the MPU 62 executes steps S701 to S718 as shown in FIG.
In step S701, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S701 that the win/loss lottery mode is not the high-probability mode, in step S702, the win/fail table for the low-probability mode (see FIG. 16A) is stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. If it is determined in step S701 that the win/loss lottery mode is the high-probability mode, the win/fail table for the high-probability mode (see FIG. 16(b)) is read out from the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 in step S703. read out.

After executing the process of step S702 or step S703, the MPU 62 executes the suitability determination process in step S704. In this success/failure determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE with the success/failure table read out in step S702 or step S703 to obtain the result of the success/failure lottery (result of success/failure). judge. In addition, as described above, the winning result is one of "big win winning", "special losing result", and "normal losing result". The same is true for

In step S705, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result determined in step S704 is "big hit". If the MPU 62 determines in step S705 that the win/loss result is "jackpot winning", it executes the processing from step S706 onwards. , the processing after step S712 is executed.

First, in step S705, the processing (processing after step S706) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the winning result is "big hit winning" will be described.
In step S706, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display flag is set in the RAM 64. FIG.

When the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 64 in step S706, the first result display section 45a based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 36 starts the variable display. Therefore, in step S707, the first distribution table (see FIG. 17A) is read from the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63. FIG.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S706, the second result display section 45b based on the winning of the game ball to the lower opening 37 , the second distribution table (see FIG. 17B) is read from the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 in step S708.

After performing the process of step S707 or step S708, MPU62 performs a distribution determination process in step S709. In this distribution determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE with the distribution table read out in step S707 or step S708 to determine the result of the distribution lottery ( distribution result).

In step S710, the MPU 62 executes a stop result setting process for the jackpot result. In this stop result setting process for the jackpot result, the MPU 62 determines in step S709 the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display section 45a or the second result display section 45b of the main display section 45. A decision is made according to the sorting result, and the decided information is stored in the RAM 64 . Here, the MPU 62 compares the allocation result determined in step S709 with the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 63, and determines the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45. Determine relevant information. The stop result table for the jackpot result defines the mode of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 so as to be different for each sorting result.

In step S711, the MPU 62 sets a flag in the RAM 64 according to the distribution result determined in step S709. Specifically, when the MPU 62 specifies that the distribution result is a "low probability result", it sets a low probability result flag and specifies that it is a "non-explicit small round high probability result" , set the non-explicit small round high-probability result flag, and if it is specified as "explicit small-round high-probability result", set the explicit small-round high-probability result flag, and set the "most favorable result" , then set the best result flag. Then, MPU62 performs the process after step S716.
In addition, in each of the following processes, the MPU 62 executes determination of the distribution result by referring to these flags.

Next, the process (process after step S712) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the win/loss result is not the "big hit win" in step S705 will be described.
In step S712, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result determined in step S704 is the "special losing result".
If the MPU 62 determines in step S712 that the win/loss result is the "special failure result", it executes the processing from step S713 onwards, and if it determines that the success/failure result is not the "special failure result" in step S712. , the process after step S715 is executed.

In step S713, the MPU 62 executes stop result setting processing for the special outlier result. In this stop result setting process for the special outlier result, the MPU 62 determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display section 45a or the second result display section 45b of the main display section 45, and The information obtained is stored in the RAM 64 . Here, the MPU 62 refers to the stop result table for special outlier results stored in advance in the ROM 63 to determine information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 45 . The mode of the picture set in the stop result table for the special winning result is different from the mode of the picture set in the stop result table for the big win result.
At step S714, the MPU 62 sets a special out flag in the RAM 64. FIG.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special loss result" by referring to this special loss flag.

On the other hand, in step S715, the MPU 62 executes the stop result setting process for the normal deviation result. In this stop result setting process for the out-of-normal result, the MPU 62 determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display section 45a or the second result display section 45b of the main display section 45, and The information obtained is stored in the RAM 64 . Here, the MPU 62 refers to the stop result table for the normal outlier result stored in the ROM 63 in advance, thereby determining information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 45 . The mode of the picture set in the stopping result table for the normal losing result is different from the mode of the picture set in the stopping result table for the jackpot result and the stopping result table for the special losing result.

After executing any of the processes of steps S711, S714, and S715, the MPU 62 executes a process of setting the display duration (display duration) in step S716.
In the display duration setting process, the MPU 62 acquires the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 64 .

In addition, in the display duration setting process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the symbol display device 47 will display the ready-to-win state. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines that the sorting result determined in step S709 is a "low probability result" or "best result", and the success/failure result determined in step S704 is a "normal deviation result". At the same time, when winning the ready-to-win generation lottery, it is determined that the ready-to-win display occurs. In addition, as described above, the MPU 62 compares the reach table stored in advance in the reach table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 with the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b. Run a reach generation lottery.

When the MPU 62 determines that the reach display occurs, the change type counter obtained from the change type counter buffer by referring to the reach generation display duration table stored in the reach display table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 A display continuation time corresponding to the value of CS is determined, and the determined display continuation time is set in a display continuation time counter provided in various counter areas 64 a of the RAM 64 .
On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 62 refers to the reach non-occurrence display duration table stored in the reach table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, so that the change type counter A display continuation time corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS acquired from the buffer is determined, and the determined display continuation time is set in a display continuation time counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM64.

Specifically, the reach non-occurrence display duration table is set so that the display duration is shortened as the pending number increases. Therefore, the display continuation time for consuming the pending information related to the upper working port 36 is set to be shorter as the number of pending items related to the upper working port 36 increases. Further, the display duration time when the pending information related to the lower working port 37 is consumed is set to be shorter as the number of pending items related to the lower working port 37 increases. Further, the reach non-occurrence display duration table is set so that the display duration is shorter when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode than when it is the low-frequency support mode. In other words, if the pending number is the same, the display duration time in the high-frequency support mode is shorter than that in the low-frequency support mode.
Furthermore, the display duration determined by referring to the reach occurrence display duration table is different from the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table.

In addition, the reach non-occurrence display duration table may be set to a relationship opposite to the above-described relationship, such as the display duration becomes longer as the number of holds increases, depending on the number of holds and support mode It may be configured so that it does not fluctuate. Alternatively, the display duration table may be set individually for each of the win/fail result and the sorting result.

At step S717, the MPU 62 sets the variation command and the type command. In step S301 of normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the command for variation and the type command set in step S717 to the sound emission control device 90. FIG.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 executes predetermined processing based on the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62 . This processing will be described later in detail.

The variation command includes information related to display duration. Also, the variation command does not include information as to whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur.
Here, as described above, the display duration determined by referring to the reach generation display duration table and the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table different.
Therefore, even if the variation command does not include the information on whether or not the ready-to-win display occurs, the ready-to-win display is performed by the sound emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, based on the information on the display duration time. It is possible to determine whether or not it occurs. In this sense, it can be said that the variation command indirectly includes information as to whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur. Note that the variation command may directly include information as to whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur.

The type command includes information related to the win/fail result. In other words, the type command includes each piece of information related to "big win win", "special loss result", and "normal loss result" as information related to win/fail results. Also, the type command includes information related to sorting results. In other words, the type command includes, as information related to the sorting result, each of the "low probability result", the "non-explicit few round high probability result", the "explicit few round high probability result", and the "best result". contains information.
In the following description, the win/fail result and the sorting result are collectively referred to as the game result. In other words, the type command contains information about the game result.

In step S718, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64, and causes the main display section 45 to start variable display based on the determination result. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the fluctuation start process.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 64, the first Since it indicates that the result display section 45a is to start the variable display, the first result display section 45a is caused to start the variable display.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64, the second Since it indicates that the result display section 45b is to start the variable display, the second result display section 45b is caused to start the variable display.

Returning to the description of the game round control process, the game round progressing process of steps S506 to S509 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S502, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the main display section 45 is performing variable display. Execute the process.

In step S506, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the display continuation time set in step S716 of the fluctuation start process has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value set in the display continuation time counter of the RAM 64 has become "0" or less. The value of the display duration counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has not elapsed, in step S507, the MPU 62 executes processing for variable display. In this process for variable display, the MPU 62 updates the display on the main display section 45 during variable display. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game round control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has elapsed, in step S508, the MPU 62 executes fluctuation end processing. In this fluctuation end processing, the MPU 62 stores the information (main (information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the display unit 45). Then, at the end of the game cycle, the MPU 62 controls the display of the main display section 45 so that the main display section 45 displays the pattern corresponding to the specified information on the main display section 45 during the variable display.

Here, the pattern finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 45 differs for each type of game result. Therefore, the manager of the game hall or the like can confirm the game result by looking at the main display section 45 at the end of the game round. According to this, the manager of the game hall can easily check whether or not the pachinko machine 10 behaves in the same manner as in the case of winning a lottery to generate a big win. can be done systematically.
The display area of the main display section 45 is narrower than that of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. Compared to Z1 to Z3, it is difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, at the end of the game cycle, the player checks the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 instead of the main display unit 45 to determine whether or not the player has won the big win. Attention to the screen G can be increased.

In step S509, the MPU 62 sets a fluctuation end command. The MPU 62 transmits the fluctuation end command set in step S509 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game round control process.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 executes processing for ending the effect of the game round based on the variation end command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Here, the sound emission control device 90 may be configured to independently end the effect of the game round without requiring reception of the variation end command.

<Game state transition processing>
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes steps S801 to S815 as shown in FIG.
In step S801, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S802 onward.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the open/close execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S812 onward.

First, the processing (processing after step S802) when it is determined in step S801 that the MPU 62 is not in the opening/closing execution mode will be described.
In step S802, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the variable display on the main display section 45 has ended. When the MPU 62 determines in step S802 that the variable display on the main display section 45 has not ended, it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S802 that the variable display of the main display section 45 has ended, it determines in step S803 whether the success/failure result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. determine whether Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is "big win winning" or "special losing result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 sets an opening/closing execution mode flag in the RAM 64, and then executes the processing from step S804.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the win/fail result does not correspond to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (if it determines that the win/fail result is the "normal deviation result"), the game Terminate state transition processing.

In step S804, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special losing result".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S804 that the win/loss result is the "special loss result", the MPU 62 sets "2" to the open/close counter SOC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S805. This open/close counter SOC is a counter for specifying the total number of opening and closing times of the large winning opening 50 of the variable winning device 5 in the MPU 62 when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S804 that the win/loss result is not the "special loss result", i.e., if it determines that the win/loss result is the "jackpot winning", in step S806, the distribution result is a small-round high-probability result ("implicit small-round high-probability result" or "explicit small-round high-probability result").

When the MPU 62 determines in step S806 that the result of allocation is a small round high probability result, in step S807 the MPU 62 sets the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "2". In addition, when the MPU 62 determines in step S806 that the distribution result is not the high probability result for a small number of rounds, that is, when it determines that the distribution result is the "low probability result" or the "best result", step In S808, "15" is set in the round counter RC. This round counter RC is a counter for specifying the number of round games by the MPU 62 when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of opening/closing execution modes with mutually different end conditions. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has, as opening/closing execution modes, a number-of-rounds stipulation mode that shifts to when the win/fail result is a "jackpot win", and an opening/closing number mode to shift to when the win/fail result is a "special losing result". and a prescribed mode.

The round number regulation mode ends on the condition that a predetermined number of round games have been executed. Here, the number of round games corresponds to the value set in the round counter RC.
The number-of-opening/closing-number regulation mode ends on the condition that the large winning hole 50 is opened and closed a predetermined total number of times, or that a predetermined number of game balls win the large winning hole 50.例文帳に追加Here, the total number of openings and closings of the big winning opening 50 corresponds to the value set in the opening/closing counter SOC. This opening/closing number regulation mode does not end under the condition of the number of executions of the round game.

Incidentally, the pachinko machine 10 executes opening and closing of the big winning hole 50 once per round game. Also, one round game continues until one of the following two conditions is satisfied. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 sets the big winning hole 50 to the open state, and then sets the big winning hole 50 to the closed state again by satisfying one of the following two conditions.
(1) elapse of a predetermined upper limit duration time (upper limit duration period);

After executing the processing of step S808, the MPU 62 executes prize ball determination processing in step S809.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a flowchart of prize ball determination processing.
In the prize ball determination process, the MPU 62 executes steps S901 to S903 as shown in FIG.
In step S901, the MPU 62 executes prize ball lottery processing. In this prize ball lottery process, the MPU 62 sets the number of prize balls of the variable prize winning device 5 to a large number (15 in this embodiment) or a small number of prize balls based on a predetermined probability (50% in this embodiment). A lottery is executed as to whether the ball (10 balls in this embodiment) is selected.

In step S902, the MPU 62 determines whether or not multiple prize balls have been won in the prize ball lottery process of step S901.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that the multiple prize balls have been won, it sets a multiple prize ball flag in the RAM 64 in step S903.
This multi-prize ball flag is a flag for specifying that the number of prize balls of the variable winning device 5 is multi-prize balls.
It should be noted that the MPU 62 clears the multi-prize ball flag stored in the RAM 64 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Also, the MPU 62 clears the multi-prize ball flag stored in the RAM 64 when the power is turned on.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that the multi-prize ball has not been won (if it is determined that the small-prize ball has been won), the multi-prize ball flag is not set in the RAM 64. End the prize ball determination process.

Returning to the description of the game state transition processing, the processing after step S810 will be described with reference to FIG.
After executing any of the processes of steps S805, S807, and S809, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 as waiting time (waiting period) for opening in step S810. Set "1000". The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for opening is 2 seconds. The waiting time for opening is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

As described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the win/fail result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 sets the waiting time for opening to the timer counter T regardless of the type of the game result. set. In other words, the waiting time for opening is the same regardless of the type of game result.
The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be slightly different according to the type of game result to such an extent that the player recognizes the same. In addition, for example, the waiting time for the opening is greatly different between the game result of "low probability result" or "best result" and the game result other than these. It is good also as a structure which makes it differ greatly according to the kind.

At step S811, the MPU 62 sets an opening command. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the game state transition process. This opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Further, the opening command includes information as to whether the number of prize balls of the variable prize winning device 5 should be a large number of prize balls or a small number of prize balls. The MPU 62 transmits the opening command set in step S811 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 recognizes the transition to the opening/closing execution mode based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes predetermined processing. This processing will be described later in detail.

Next, the processing (processing after step S812) when it is determined in step S801 that the MPU 62 is in the open/close execution mode will be described.
In step S812, the MPU 62 executes a big winning opening opening/closing process.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing process.
In the big winning opening opening/closing process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1024 as shown in FIG.
In step S1001, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the big winning opening 50 is open.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the large winning opening 50 is not open, it executes the processing from step S1002.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the big winning opening 50 is open, it executes the processing from step S1006.

First, in step S1001, the processing (processing after step S1002) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the big winning opening 50 is not open will be described.
In step S1002, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the open/close counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1002 that both the value of the opening/closing counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1002 that at least one of the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, in step S1003, the timer counter T Determines whether the value is less than or equal to "0".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1003 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", it ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1003 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", in step S1004, it executes a special winning opening opening process.
The special winning opening opening process of step S1004 will be described in detail below.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process.
In the big winning opening opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1109 as shown in FIG.
In step S1101, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special loss result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the win/fail result is the "special loss result", in step S1102, the MPU 62 sets "8" to the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64, and At S1103, the timer counter T is set to "85". As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 sec.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the win/fail result is not the "special loss result", in step S1104, it sets "8" to the winning counter PC, and in step S1105, the distribution result is a small-round high-probability result ("implicit small-round high-probability result" or "explicit small-round high-probability result").

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the result of allocation is the small round high probability result, it sets the timer counter T to "85" in step S1103 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the allocation result is not the small round high probability result, it sets the timer counter T to "15000" in step S1106. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 seconds.

After executing the processing of step S1103 or step S1106, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the multi-ball flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S1107.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1107 that the multi-prize ball flag is not set in the RAM 64, in step S1108, it executes processing for opening the first winning hole. In this first winning hole opening execution process, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the first bridge drive unit 514 to project the first bridge 512 and open the first winning hole 51. set. In addition, in the opening execution processing of the first prize winning opening, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the second bridge driving section 524 to immerse the second bridge 522 and close the second winning opening 52. set to

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1107 that the multi-prize ball flag is set in the RAM 64, in step S1109, it executes processing for opening the second winning hole. In this second winning hole opening execution process, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the second bridge drive unit 524 to project the second bridge 522 and open the second winning hole 52. set. Further, in the second winning hole opening execution process, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the first bridge drive unit 514 to immerse the first bridge 512 and close the first winning hole 51. set to

After executing the first winning opening opening execution process in step S1108 or the second winning opening opening execution process in step S1109, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening process.

The value set in the winning counter PC in step S1102 or step S1104 defines the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 50. FIG.
In addition, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1103 or step S1106 defines the upper limit continuous time from when the big winning port 50 is set to the open state until it is set to the closed state again. Therefore, the MPU 62 sets two types of upper limit duration time with different lengths by setting the timer counter T to "85" or "15000", as described above. Specifically, the MPU 62 has a long-time mode (long-term mode) in which the upper limit duration is set to 30 sec, and a short-time mode (short-term mode) in which the upper limit duration is set to 0.17 sec, which is shorter than that of the long-time mode. aspect).

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 causes the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot a game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 at a cycle of 0.6 sec. In addition, as described above, the MPU 62 sets the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls to the big winning hole 50 to eight by setting the winning counter PC to "8".
Therefore, the upper limit duration of the long time mode is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 50 and the firing period of the game balls, so the upper limit of 8 game balls is easy to win in the big winning slot 50 .
On the other hand, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is shorter than the product of the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 50 and the firing cycle of the game balls. (shorter than the period), it is difficult to let the game ball enter the big winning hole 50.例文帳に追加It should be noted that it is possible to win about one game ball into the big winning hole 50 depending on the timing.

Returning to the explanation of the big winning opening opening/closing process, the processes after step S1005 will be explained with reference to FIG.
MPU62 sets an opening command in step S1005, after performing the big winning a prize opening opening process of step S1004. In addition, the MPU 62 transmits the open command set in step S1005 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the big winning opening 50 has been set to the open state based on the open command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, the processing (processing after step S1006) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the big winning opening 50 is being opened in step S1001 will be described.
In step S1006, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less. That is, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the upper limit continuation time set in the timer counter T in step S1103 or step S1106 of the special winning opening opening process has elapsed.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", it executes the processing from step S1007.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processing from step S1018.

First, processing (processing after step S1007) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0" will be described.
In step S1007, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a prize has been awarded to the special prize opening 50. It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not a prize has been awarded to the large winning opening 50 is executed based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40 c and 40 d corresponding to the large winning opening 50 .

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1007 that no prize has been awarded to the large winning opening 50, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening/closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1007 that a prize has been awarded to the large prize winning port 50, in step S1008, the value of the prize winning counter PC is updated by subtracting 1 from it.

In step S1009, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1009 that the value of the winning counter PC is not equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1009 that the value of the winning counter PC is equal to or less than "0", in step S1010 the closing execution process is executed. In this closing execution process, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the first bridge driving section 514 when the first bridge 512 is protruding and the first winning opening 51 is set in the open state. immerses the first bridge 512 and sets the first winning port 51 to the closed state. In addition, in the closing execution process, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the second bridge driving section 524 when the second bridge 522 is protruding and the second winning opening 52 is set in the open state. By doing so, the second bridge 522 is immersed and the second prize winning opening 52 is set to the closed state.

In step S1011, the MPU 62 sets a closing command. The MPU 62 transmits the closing command set in step S1011 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the big winning opening 50 has been set to the closed state based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S1012, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special losing result".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1012 that the win/fail result is the "special loss result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1023, which will be described later.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1012 that the win/loss result is not the "special loss result", it executes the processing from step S1013 onward.
In step S1013, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter RC to update it.

In step S1014, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1014 that the value of the round counter RC is not less than "0", it sets the value of the timer counter T to "500" in step S1015. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1015 is set to the open state of the big prize winning port 50, then set to the closed state again, and set the big winning port 50 to the open state again. Defines the open standby time. In addition, in this embodiment, the release waiting time is 1 sec. This opening standby time is the same regardless of the type and progress of the opening/closing execution mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1014 that the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processing from step S1016.
In step S1016, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T to "2000" as a waiting time (waiting period) for ending. As described above, the value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the ending is 4 seconds. Note that the waiting time for the ending is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

The waiting time for the ending is the same regardless of the type of game result, like the waiting time for the opening. That is, the waiting time for this ending is the same regardless of the type of opening/closing execution mode.
The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be slightly different according to the type of game result to the extent that the player recognizes the same. In addition, for example, the waiting time for the ending is greatly different between the game result of "low probability result" or "best result" and the game result other than these. It is good also as a structure which makes it differ greatly according to the kind.

In step S1017, the MPU 62 sets an ending command. The MPU 62 transmits the ending command set in step S1017 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 recognizes the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, the processing (processing after step S1018) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less will be described.
In step S1018, the MPU 62 executes closing execution processing in the same manner as in step S1010 described above.
In step S1019, the MPU 62 sets a closing command as in step S1011 described above.

In step S1020, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special loss result".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1020 that the win/loss result is not the "special loss result", that is, when it determines that the win/loss result is "big win", it executes the processing from step S1021 onwards.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1020 that the win/fail result is the "special loss result", it executes the processing from step S1023 onwards.

First, the process (process after step S1021) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the win/fail result is not the "special loss result" in step S1020 will be described.
In step S1021, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter RC to update it.

In step S1022, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1022 that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes after step S1015 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1022 that the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes after step S1016 described above.

Next, processing (processing after step S1023) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1012 or step S1020 that the win/fail result is the "special losing result" will be described.
In step S1023, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the open/close counter SOC to update it.

In step S1024, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the open/close counter SOC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1024 that the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is not equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1015 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1024 that the value of the open/close counter SOC is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes after step S1016 described above.

Returning to the description of the game state transition processing, the processing after step S813 will be described with reference to FIG.
After executing the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S812, the MPU 62 checks in step S813 whether the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less. judge.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S813 that at least one of the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or less than "0", it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S813 that both the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are less than or equal to "0", in step S814 the value of the timer counter T is set to " 0” or less.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S814 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S814 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, in step S815, the opening/closing execution mode flag and the multiple prize balls flag stored in the RAM 64 are displayed. is cleared, the transition processing at the end of the open/close execution mode is executed. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the game state transition process.
The transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode will be described in detail below.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a flowchart of transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.
In the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1201 to S1212 as shown in FIG.
In step S1201, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the sorting result is the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit few rounds high probability result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the sorting result is the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit small round high probability result", it executes the processing from step S1202.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the sorting result is not the "highest advantage result" or the "high probability result of explicit few rounds", it executes the processing from step S1205.

First, the processing (processing after step S1202) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the distribution result is the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit small round high probability result" will be described.
In step S1202, the MPU 62 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. FIG. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64 . Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.

In step S1203, the MPU 62 clears the count limit flag stored in the RAM 64. FIG.
Here, the high-frequency support mode is continued at least until "big win" is won in the winning lottery when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number of times limit flag is not set.

At step S1204, the MPU 62 sets the high probability mode flag to the RAM 64. FIG. The MPU 62 maintains the high-probability mode flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64 . As a result, the MPU 62 sets the win/fail lottery mode to the high probability mode. This high-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

When ending the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 sets the flags (low probability result flag, non-explicit small round high probability result flag, explicit small round high probability clear the most favorable result flag) and the special outlier flag. Further, in step S701 of the fluctuation start process described above, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 64, thereby determining whether or not the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode. there is

Next, the processing (processing after step S1205) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the distribution result is not the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit small round high probability result" will be described.
In step S1205, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is the "non-explicit small round high probability result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1205 that the allocation result is the "non-explicit small round high probability result", the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1206.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1205 that the allocation result is not the "non-explicit small round high probability result", it executes the processing from step S1208.

First, the processing (processing after step S1206) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1205 that the allocation result is the "non-explicit small round high probability result" will be described.
In step S1206, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1206 that the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64, it executes the processes after step S1203 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1206 that the high frequency support flag is not set in the RAM 64, it sets the high probability mode flag in the RAM 64 in step S1207. The MPU 62 maintains the high-probability mode flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64 . As a result, the MPU 62 sets the win/fail lottery mode to the high probability mode. This high-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Next, the processing (processing after step S1208) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1205 that the allocation result is not the "non-explicit small round high probability result" will be described.
In step S1208, the MPU 62 determines whether the sorting result is a "low probability result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1208 that the sorting result is not the "low-probability result" (when it determines that the win-or-fail result is the "special failure result"), it ends the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. do.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1208 that the sorting result is the "low-probability result", it executes the processing after step S1209.

In step S1209, the MPU 62 clears the high probability mode flag. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the win/fail lottery mode to the low probability mode. This low-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is obtained in the winning lottery and the distribution result is other than a "low-probability result".

At step S1210, the MPU 62 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. FIG. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64 . Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1211, the MPU 62 sets "100" to the value of the number-of-games counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. FIG.
At step S1212, the MPU 62 sets a count limit flag in the RAM 64. FIG. The MPU 62 maintains the number limit flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64 . After that, the MPU 62 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number-of-times limit flag is set, 100 games, which is the end reference number of times set in the game number counter, are played. Continue until times are digested. The MPU 62 clears the high-frequency support flag and the number-of-times limit flag when 100 games have been played. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low-frequency support mode.
Note that the MPU 62 executes these processes as electrical support processes in step S306 of the normal process, but detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

In this way, if the winning lottery results in a "jackpot winning" and the distribution result in the distribution lottery becomes a "most advantageous result" or a "high probability result", the game state is the current state. Regardless of the game state, after the opening/closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends, the game shifts to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued at least until "big win" is achieved in the lottery.

Also, when the current support mode is the high-frequency support mode, if the win-or-loss lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the distribution result in the distribution lottery is "unexplained small round high probability result", After the opening/closing execution mode (that is, round number regulation mode) ends, the game state shifts to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued at least until "big win" is achieved in the lottery.

On the other hand, when the current support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the win-or-loss lottery results in a "jackpot win", and the distribution result in the distribution lottery is the "non-explicit small round high probability result". Then, the game state shifts to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends. The high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode continue at least until "big win" is achieved in the lottery.

In addition, if the winning lottery results in a "big win" and the distribution result in the distribution lottery results in a "low probability result", the game state is the opening and closing execution mode (that is, After the end of the round number regulation mode), it shifts to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The low-probability mode continues at least until a "jackpot win" is achieved in the lottery, and the high-frequency support mode continues until the "jackpot win" is achieved in the lottery. Transition to frequency support mode.

Further, when the winning lottery does not result in a "big hit", that is, when the winning result in the winning lottery is a "special losing result" or a "normal losing result", the game state does not shift.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60, based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37, the It functions as game state transition means for shifting the game state to the opening/closing execution mode.
Also, the variable winning device 5 has shifted to a state in which a game ball can enter when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the bridges 512 and 522 and the bridge driving units 514 and 524 allow game balls to enter the first winning hole 51 and prevent game balls from entering the second winning hole 52. A first ball-enterable state, a second ball-enterable state in which the game ball is allowed to enter the second prize-winning port 52 and the game ball is not allowed to enter the first prize-winning port 51, and a first prize-winning. A ball entry state switching provided between the first prize winning port 51 and the second prize winning port 52 is switched to a state in which a game ball is not allowed to enter either the port 51 or the second prize winning port 52.例文帳に追加functioning as a tool.

Specifically, each of the bridge drive units 514 and 524 protrudes the first bridge 512 with respect to the game board 31 and retracts the second bridge 522 with respect to the game board 31, thereby It is switched to the first ball entering possible state in which the game ball is entered into the first winning hole 51 via the bridge 512 . Each bridge driving unit 514, 524 protrudes the second bridge 522 with respect to the game board 31 and retracts the first bridge 512 with respect to the game board 31, thereby It is switched to the second ball entry possible state in which the game ball is entered into the second winning hole 52.例文帳に追加Each of the bridge driving units 514 and 524 switches the ball-entering disabled state by causing the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 to sink into the game board 31 .
In other words, each of the bridge drive units 514 and 524 switches the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 between enabled and disabled to set the first ball-enterable state, the second ball-enterable state, and the In the first ball-enterable state and the second ball-enterable state, both the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 cannot be set to be valid.

In the present embodiment, when the main controller 60 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the ball-entering state switching means switches to the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state, and the opening/closing is executed. If the mode has not been changed, the ball-entering state is switched to the ball-entering disabled state by the ball-entering state switching means.
Specifically, main controller 60 performs prize ball determination processing (ball enterable state) for selecting either a small number of prize balls (first ball enterable state) or multiple prize balls (second ball enterable state). state selection section), and when a small number of prize balls is selected in the prize ball determination process, the ball state switching means switches to the first ball enterable state, and multiple prize balls are selected in the prize ball determination process. In the case where it is, a big winning opening opening process (enterable state switching unit) for switching to the second enterable state by the enterable state switching means.

Here, the prize ball determination process executes a lottery to select either a small prize ball or a large prize ball based on a predetermined probability (50% in this embodiment).
It should be noted that in the present embodiment, the ball-enterable state selection unit executes a lottery to select either the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state based on a predetermined probability. , the first ball-enterable state and the second ball-enterable state, any method may be adopted. For example, the ball-enterable state selection unit selects the first ball-enterable state and the second ball-enterable state according to the type and expectation of the reach display leading to the jackpot winning that triggered the transition to the open/close execution mode. You can choose either one.

<Electrical Configuration of Audio Light Emission Control Device 90 and Display Control Device 100>
FIG. 30 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device.
As shown in FIG. 30, the sound emission control device 90 includes a sound emission control board 91, an MPU 92 mounted on the sound emission control board 91, and a ROM 93 and a RAM 94 that constitute the MPU 92. Here, the MPU 92 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc., as well as the ROM 93 and the RAM 94, are integrated into a chip.

The ROM 93 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside to hold stored information.
The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. is. This RAM 94 has various areas such as a command list storage area 94a.

The MPU 92 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the main controller 60 as described above. The output port of the MPU 92 is connected to various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c, the speaker unit 24, and the display control device 100. FIG.
The MPU 92 executes driving control of various lamp units 23 , 49 a to 49 c and the speaker unit 24 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 60 .
Also, the MPU 92 transmits commands resulting from analysis of these commands to the display control device 100 . The sound emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of a signal line.

The display control device 100 includes a display control board 101 , an MPU 102 , a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 that constitute the MPU 102 , a video display processor (VDP) 105 , a character ROM 106 and a video RAM 107 . Here, the MPU 102 is an element in which, in addition to the program ROM 103 and work RAM 104, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip. MPU 102 , VDP 105 , character ROM 106 and video RAM 107 are mounted on display control board 101 .

The MPU 102 analyzes the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 and performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on this command to control the VDP 105 . Specifically, MPU 102 controls VDP 105 by generating commands for VDP 105 .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside for holding stored information.
The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the program ROM 103. The work RAM 104 is a volatile memory that requires power supply from the outside to hold the stored information. It is a memory means.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 47 . Since the VDP 105 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 reads image data from the character ROM 106 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 102 and stores the image data in the video RAM 107 .

The character ROM 106 functions as an image data library for storing character data such as designs displayed on the design display device 47 . The character ROM 106 holds bitmap format image data of various patterns, a color palette table and the like that are referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image.
The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 47 , and the display contents of the pattern display device 47 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107 .

<Regarding Timer Interrupt Processing Executed by Sound Emission Control Device 90>
FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the sound emission control device.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes timer interrupt processing for advancing the game. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) executes steps S2001 to S2005 as shown in FIG.

In step S2001, the MPU 92 executes command storage processing. In this command storage process, when the MPU 92 receives a command from the MPU 62 , it stores the command in the RAM 94 . Specifically, the RAM 94 has a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the MPU 62 , and the MPU 92 stores the commands in the ring buffer according to the order received from the MPU 62 . The MPU 92 reads commands from the ring buffer in the order in which they are stored in the ring buffer.

In step S2002, the MPU 92 executes effect determination processing based on the command received from the MPU 62. FIG. In the effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines the effect for the game cycle, the effect for the open/close execution mode, and the like.
In step S2003, the MPU 92 executes an effect execution process based on the content of the effect determination process in step S2002. Specifically, in the effect execution process, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of various lamp units 23 and 49a to 49c, and executes sound control of the speaker unit 24. FIG.

In step S<b>2004 , the MPU 92 executes demonstration display execution processing based on the demonstration command received from the MPU 62 . In the demonstration display execution process, the MPU 92 executes the demonstration display when a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 30 sec) for the start of the demonstration elapses without a new game cycle being started after the game cycle ends. . Specifically, in the demonstration display execution process, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of various lamp units 23 and audio control of the speaker unit 24 .

In step S2005, command transmission processing for transmitting the command set in the effect determination processing in step S2002 to the display control device 100 is executed. In this command transmission process, the MPU 92 determines whether it is time to transmit various commands stored as a command list in the command list storage area 94 a of the RAM 94 to the display control device 100 , and transmits various commands to the display control device 100 . , the command is transmitted to the display control device 100 .
After that, the MPU 92 terminates the timer interrupt processing.

<Regarding effect determination processing executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect determination processing.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process in order to execute an effect for the game cycle, an effect for the open/close execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2101 to S2116 as shown in FIG.

In step S2101, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62 have been received.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2101 that each command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S2109 onward.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2101 that each command has been received, in step S2102, based on the content of the type command, the game result is "best result" or "low probability". result”.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2102 that the game result is the "best result" or "low probability result", in step S2103, it executes symbol determination processing corresponding to the type of game result. In this symbol determination process, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result", the MPU 92 finally stops and displays the same odd number or the same even number as the stop result to be displayed on the activated line L. When information relating to a combination of symbols having numbers is determined and the game result is determined to be a "low-probability result", the same even-numbered number is displayed as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Information relating to the combination of symbols possessed is determined. The odd and even numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2102 that the game result is not the "best result" or "low probability result", in step S2104, based on the content of the type command, the game result is " It is determined whether or not the result is “out of normal result”.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2104 that the game result is not the "normal failure result", that is, the game result is "special failure result", "non-explicit few round high probability result", and "explicit few round high probability result". If it is either, in step S2105, common symbol determination processing is executed. In this common symbol determination process, the MPU 92 determines information relating to a combination of special symbols as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. FIG. Specifically, the MPU 92 selects not a combination of symbols having the same number, but a special combination of symbols having different numbers (for example, "3-4-1"). It should be noted that this special symbol combination is the same regardless of the type of game result.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2104 that the game result is the "normal failure result", in step S2106, the MPU 92 executes symbol determination processing for normal failure. In this normal out-of-symbol determination process, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur based on the content of the variation command.

When the MPU 92 determines that the ready-to-win display will occur, the MPU 92 determines information relating to the combination of the symbols for the ready-to-win display as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. FIG. It should be noted that the combination of symbols for the ready-to-win display is randomly determined by a lottery or the like.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the ready-to-win display does not occur, the MPU 92 provides information relating to a combination of symbols different from the above-described combination of symbols as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. decide. Specifically, the MPU 92 randomly determines a combination of symbols different from any of the combination of symbols having the same number, the special combination of symbols, and the combination of symbols in the ready-to-win display by lottery or the like.

After executing any one of steps S2103, S2105, and S2106, the MPU 92 executes a production pattern determination process in step S2107. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93 . Specifically, the MPU 92 selects an effect continuation time (effect continuation period) and the content of the effect as the effect pattern. In step S2107, the MPU 92 also executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate an advance notice display.

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the selected effect pattern.

In step S2108, the MPU 92 sets a change start command and a stop result command including information related to the stop result determined in any one of steps S2103, S2105 and S2106. Then, the MPU 92 stores the variation start command and the stop result command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. FIG. These fluctuation start command and stop result command are transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 retrieves from the program ROM 103 a data table for starting the variable display and displaying the stop result on the pattern display device 47 based on the variable start command and the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 92 . read out. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the symbol display device 47 finally stops and displays the stop result determined by the MPU 92 on the effective line L after starting the variable display.

After executing the process of step S2108, or when determining in step S2101 that the variation command and the type command have not been received, the MPU 92 executes the process of step S2109 and subsequent steps.
In step S2109, the MPU 92 determines whether an opening command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2109 that the opening command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S2116.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2109 that the opening command has been received, in step S2110, based on the content of the opening command, multiple prize balls are selected in the prize ball lottery process of step S901. determine whether or not you have won the

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2110 that the multi-prize ball has not been won, the process from step S2113 onwards is executed.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2110 that the multi-prize ball has been won, in step S2111, the MPU 92 executes a multi-prize notification effect determination process. In this process of determining the multiple prize ball notification effect, the MPU 92 determines execution of the multiple prize ball notification effect for informing the player that the number of prize balls of the variable winning device 5 will be the multiple prize balls.
Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the display lamp section 23 and the sound control of the speaker section 24 in the effect execution processing of step S2003 described above.

In step S2112, the MPU 92 sets a multiple prize ball notification command including information related to the multiple prize ball notification effect determined in step S2111. Then, the MPU 92 stores the multiple prize ball notification command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94 a of the RAM 94 . This multi-prize notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the multiple prize ball notification effect in the symbol display device 47 based on the multiple prize ball notification command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes a multi-ball notification effect.

Specifically, the MPU 92 and MPU 102 execute the multi-prize informing effect during the waiting time (waiting period) for the opening.
In the present embodiment, the MPU 92 and MPU 102 execute the multi-prize ball notification effect during the waiting time (waiting period) for the opening. A notification effect may be executed.

After executing the process of step S2112, or when it is determined that the multi-prize ball is not won in step S2110, the MPU 92 determines the type of game result based on the contents of the opening command in step S2113. do.

In step S2114, the MPU 92 executes determination processing of the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type of game result determined in step S2113. In the processing for determining the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2113 that the game result is the "special loss result" or the "non-explicit small round high probability result", the opening/closing execution mode effect is determined. Effect A is selected as the effect. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the “explicit small round high probability result”, the MPU 92 selects the effect B as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result", the MPU 92 selects the effect C or the effect D as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "low probability result", the MPU 92 selects the effect D as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.
The duration of the effects A and B corresponds to the time when the opening and closing of the big winning opening 50 is executed twice in a short period of time in the open/close execution mode. Further, the duration of the effect C and the effect D corresponds to the time when the opening and closing of the big winning opening 50 is executed 15 times in the long time mode in the open/close execution mode.

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the selection result of the effects A to D.

In step S2115, the MPU 92 sets an opening/closing execution mode command including information relating to the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected in step S2114. Then, the MPU 92 stores the open/close execution mode command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94 a of the RAM 94 . This opening/closing execution mode command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the opening/closing execution mode effect on the pattern display device 47 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 47 executes an effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 .

After executing the processing of step S2115, or when determining that the opening command has not been received in step S2109, the MPU 92 executes the processing of step S2116 and subsequent steps.
In step S2116, the MPU 92 executes other processing. In other processes, the MPU 92 executes processes for advancing the effects for the opening/closing execution mode based on the opening command, closing command, and ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, for example. After that, the MPU 92 terminates the effect determination process.

<Regarding the relationship between game results and game status>
The relationship between game results and game states based on the execution of various processes will be described below.
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the relationship between game results and game states. Specifically, FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game results excluding the "normal failure result" and the game states, etc., in which the game results are arranged in the column direction and the game states, etc. are arranged in the row direction.
The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. It has distribution results of "few rounds high probability result", "best result", and "low probability result".

As shown in the second column of the table in FIG. 33, the "special loss result" is the game result selected when the "big win" is not won in the win/loss lottery (symbol x in the drawing). Also, the sorting result is the game result selected when "big hit" is won in the winning lottery (symbol ◯ in the figure).
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game results other than the "normal result" and the game state will be described. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state as follows. The contents of the game state and the like are arbitrary.

In the "special failure result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the opening/closing number regulation mode instead of the round number regulation mode, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 50 is executed twice in a short period of time. Also, in the "special losing result", the lottery mode does not shift.
In the "unspecified small round high probability result", the opening and closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with two times as the upper limit, and the opening and closing of the big winning port 50 is executed twice in a short time mode. be done. In addition, in the "non-explicit small round high probability result", the winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode.
In this way, the "special loss result" and the "non-explicit small round high probability result" are different in the type of opening and closing execution mode, but are common in that the opening and closing of the big winning opening 50 is performed twice in a short time mode. is doing.

In addition, in the "special failure result" and "non-explicit small round high probability result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect A. In addition, "special outlier results" and "implicit few-round high-probability results" do not transition to support mode. In addition, the symbol display device 47 does not display, on the display screen G, an image indicating that the high-probability mode is set in the game round after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Therefore, the player cannot grasp whether the game result is the "special failure result" or the "non-explicit small round high probability result" by checking the stop result or the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Can not. In other words, even if the distribution lottery results in the "non-explicit small round high probability result" and shifts to the high probability mode, the symbol display device 47 does not perform the winning lottery in the game round after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Disguise as if the mode has not changed.
Therefore, the player can play the game while enjoying the prediction of whether or not the winning lottery mode has shifted to the high-probability mode.

In the "explicit small round high probability result", the opening and closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with two times as the upper limit number, and the opening and closing of the big winning port 50 is executed twice in a short time mode. be. In addition, in the "explicit small round high probability result", the winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. In addition, in the "clearly limited round high probability result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect B. In addition, in the "explicit small number of rounds high probability result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the game cycle after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 47 displays an image on the display screen G clearly indicating the high probability mode.
Therefore, the player can understand that the game result is the "explicit small round high probability result" by confirming the stop result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result" and "low probability result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with the upper limit of 15 times, and the opening/closing of the big winning port 50 is performed 15 times in a long time mode. times.
Here, in the "most advantageous result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number or the same even number, and the winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the open/close execution mode is the effect C or the effect D. Specifically, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect C, and the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number. If so, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect D.
In addition, in the "low-probability result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, and the win-or-fail lottery mode shifts to the low-probability mode. Become. Additionally, for "Most Favorable Outcome" and "Less Probable Outcome", the support mode transitions to a high frequency support mode.

Therefore, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect C, the game result is the "best result". can be grasped. However, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, the player confirms the stop result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, so that the game result is the "best result". and "low-probability results" cannot be grasped.

Then, in the game cycle after the opening/closing execution mode ends, if the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is finally the effect D, the pattern display device 47 displays an image clearly indicating the high probability mode on the display screen G. do not do.

Specifically, the symbol display device 47 does not display on the display screen G an image that clearly indicates that the high probability mode is selected, and the high frequency support mode is set such that the number of game rounds is the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times) is reached, an image is displayed on the display screen G to notify that the mode will be shifted to the low-frequency support mode. In other words, even if the distribution lottery results in the "most advantageous result", the pattern display device 47 will cause the opening/closing execution mode effect to be the final effect D in the game cycle after the opening/closing execution mode ends. If so, the game result is camouflaged as if it were a "low-probability result".

Then, when the sorting result is the "most advantageous result", the pattern display device 47 does not become a "jackpot winning" in the winning lottery, and is in the high probability mode after 100 game rounds are completed. An image clearly indicating that is displayed on the display screen G. In other words, the symbol display device 47 cancels the camouflage that has been applied as if the game result was a "low-probability result".

<About the flow when switching to open/close execution mode>
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device and the variable winning device when the opening/closing execution mode is entered. It should be noted that FIG. 34 shows the variable prize winning device 5 under the display screen G in a simplified manner.
Specifically, FIG. 34A is a diagram showing the display screen G when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode. FIGS. 34B and 34C are diagrams showing the flow when the prize ball lottery process in step S901 does not win the multiple prize balls (when the small prize balls are won). 34(D) and (E) are diagrams showing the flow when multiple prize balls are won in the prize ball lottery process of step S901.

When shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 stops the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 as shown in FIG. 34(A). In the example of FIG. 34, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result. The result indicates the "best result".

When the MPU 102 receives the open/close execution mode command without receiving the multi-prize notification command, it means that the multi-prize ball lottery process in step S901 did not win the multi-prize ball, so the sound is emitted. The pattern display device 47 is caused to perform the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the control device 90 .
Specifically, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. The characters "BONUS!" are displayed in the center of the screen G. Thereby, the MPU 102 suggests to the player that the multiple prize balls have not been won in the prize ball lottery process of step S901.

After that, as shown in FIG. 34(C), the MPU 102 displays a character (for example, "ROUND1") indicating the number of times the round game is executed at the upper left position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, and starts the round game. .
Further, the MPU 62 causes the first bridge 512 to protrude and sets the first prize winning opening 51 to the open state by executing the driving control of the first bridge driving section 514 . Thereby, the MPU 62 can guide the game ball flowing down the game area between the cover 511 and the cover 521 to the opening of the cover 511 .

On the other hand, when the MPU 102 receives the multi-prize ball notification command, it means that the multi-prize ball has been won in the prize ball lottery process of step S901. to execute.
Specifically, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. The characters "Extra BONUS!!" are displayed in the center of the screen G. Thereby, the MPU 102 suggests to the player that the multiple prize balls have been won in the prize ball lottery process of step S901.

After that, as shown in FIG. 34(E), the MPU 102 displays a character (for example, "ROUND1") indicating the number of times the round game is executed at the upper left position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, and starts the round game. .
In addition, the MPU 62 causes the second bridge 522 to protrude and sets the second winning opening 52 to the open state by executing the drive control of the second bridge driving section 524 . Thereby, the MPU 62 can guide the game ball flowing down the game area between the cover 511 and the cover 521 to the opening of the cover 521 .

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) Since the variable prize winning device 5 is provided with a ball entry state switching means, when it shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the ball entry state switching means switches to the first ball entry possible state, whereby a predetermined A game ball can be entered into a first winning hole 51 for executing the payout of the number of winning balls, and the first winning hole can be opened by switching to a second ball-enterable state by a ball-entering state switching means. A game ball can enter a second winning hole 52 that pays out more prize balls than 51.例文帳に追加In addition, when the variable winning device 5 is not in the opening/closing execution mode, the variable winning device 5 switches to the state in which the ball cannot be entered by the ball entering state switching means, so that the first winning port 51 and the second winning port 52 are opened. It is possible to prevent game balls from entering. Therefore, when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, the variable prize winning device 5 can change the number of prize balls by switching the ball entry possible state with the ball entry state switching means. can improve the attention of

(2) When a small prize ball is selected in the prize ball determination process, the main controller 60 switches to the first ball-enterable state by the ball-entering state switching means, When a ball is selected, a large winning opening opening process for switching to the second ball enterable state by the ball entering state switching means is provided, so the player pays attention to the selection result of the prize ball determination process. , and it is expected that the second ball-enterable state will occur. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
(3) In the prize ball determination process, a lottery is executed to select either the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state based on a predetermined probability. Attention will be paid to the lottery result of the process, and the second ball-enterable state will be expected. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(4) Since the first bridge 512 is inclined so as to descend toward the first prize winning port 51 side, the first bridge driving section 514 moves the first bridge 512 to the game board 31. By projecting, it is possible to switch to the first ball-enterable state in which the game ball is entered into the first winning hole 51 via the first bridge 512 . Since the second bridge 522 is inclined so as to descend toward the second prize winning port 52 side, the second bridge driving section 524 causes the second bridge 522 to protrude with respect to the game board 31. , it is possible to switch to the second ball entry possible state in which the game ball is allowed to enter the second winning hole 52 via the second bridge 522 . Also, since the first prize winning port 51 and the second prize winning port 52 are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the respective bridge drive units 514 and 524 are arranged to be connected to the first bridge 512 and the second bridge. By immersing the player 522 into the game board 31, it is possible to switch to a state in which it is impossible to enter a ball. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can simplify the configuration of the ball entry state switching means. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 can diversify the movement of the game balls flowing down the game area, and can improve the attention of the players to the game.

(5) The first prize winning port 51 is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction, and the second prize winning port 52 is provided so as to open to the other side in the horizontal direction. The state switching means causes the ball to enter the first winning hole 51 or the second winning hole 52 by distributing the game balls in the horizontal left and right direction. Therefore, in order to switch between the first ball-enterable state, the second ball-enterable state, and the ball-enterable state, for example, compared to the case of adopting a mechanism such as an opening and closing door, the ball-entering state switching means is , the space of the game area can be effectively used for installation.

(6) Since the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 are provided so as to intersect, if they are provided so as not to intersect (for example, they are offset in the vertical direction) case), the ball entry state switching means can be installed by effectively utilizing the space of the game area.
(7) The first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 project and sink the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 through the slit 5124 of the first bridge 512 and the slit 5224 of the second bridge 522 . By interlocking along the direction, the configuration of the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 can be simplified because they are provided so as to intersect.

(8) The protrusion width D1 of the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 from the game board 31 is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball, so it is set to the same width as the diameter of the game ball. The first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 can be quickly immersed in the game board 31 as compared with the case of being set. Therefore, immediately after the first bridge 512 or the second bridge 522 is immersed in the game board 31, each of the bridge drive units 514 and 524 moves the first bridge 512 or the second bridge 522 to the first bridge 512 or the second bridge 522. It is possible to suppress over-winning in which the game balls guided to the winning opening 51 or the second winning opening 52 are made to win the first winning opening 51 or the second winning opening 52.例文帳に追加
(9) The upper surfaces of the covers 511 and 521 protrude further toward the opening than the lower surfaces of the covers 511 and 521. A game ball is less likely to enter the first prize winning port 51 or the second prize winning port 52 by mistake as compared with the case where the shape does not protrude toward the opening direction side.

Note that, in the present embodiment, the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 are formed by connecting the slit 5124 of the first bridge 512 and the slit 5224 of the second bridge 522 to the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 . 522 are provided so as to intersect by meshing along the projecting/retracting direction, but they may be provided so as to intersect by other structures.

FIG. 35 is a perspective view showing a detailed configuration of a modified example of the first bridge and the second bridge with the first bridge projected.
The first bridge 512 has a flat plate portion 5121K as shown in FIG.
The second bridge 522 has a one-side bridge piece 5221K located on the cover 521 side (+X-axis direction side) and the other-side bridge piece 5222K located on the cover 511 side (+X-axis direction side).

Thus, in this modification, the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 are composed of one bridge piece 5221K located on one side of the second bridge 522 in the horizontal direction and the other bridge piece 5221K located on the other side in the horizontal direction. It is provided so as to intersect by dividing it into the side bridge piece 5222K.
According to this, the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 are provided so as to intersect by dividing the second bridge 522, so that the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 522 can be simplified.

In this modified example, the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 are provided so as to intersect by dividing the second bridge 522, but the first bridge 512 is divided. By dividing both the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522, they may be provided so as to cross each other. In short, the first bridge and the second bridge need only be provided so as to intersect by dividing one of the first bridge and the second bridge.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first bridge 512 has a flat plate portion 5121, a flat plate portion 5122, and a connection portion 5123 that connects the flat plate portions 5121 and 5122, and is generally formed in a flat plate shape as a whole. rice field. The second bridge 522 has a flat plate portion 5221, a flat plate portion 5222, and a connecting portion 5223 that connects the flat plate portions 5221 and 5222, and is generally formed in a flat plate shape as a whole. In other words, the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 allow the game ball to fall in the projection direction side of the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 .
On the other hand, the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 may prevent the game ball from falling in the projection direction side of the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 .

FIG. 36 is a perspective view showing a detailed configuration of a modified example of the first bridge and the second bridge with the first bridge projected.
The first bridge 512, as shown in FIG. It has a fall prevention part 5125 that prevents the game ball from falling.
The fall prevention portion 5125 is formed to stand up from the +Y-axis direction side edge of the flat plate portion 5121 and the flat plate portion 5122 toward the +Z-axis direction side.

The second bridge 522 includes a flat plate portion 5221, a flat plate portion 5222, a connection portion 5223 that connects the flat plate portion 5221 and the flat plate portion 5222, and prevents the game ball from falling toward the projection direction side of the second bridge 522. and a fall prevention portion 5225 .
The fall prevention portion 5225 is formed to stand up from the +Y-axis direction side edge of the flat plate portion 5221 and the flat plate portion 5222 toward the +Z-axis direction side.

According to this, the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 are provided with drop prevention portions 5125 and 5225 that prevent game balls from falling in the projecting direction side of the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522. Therefore, the game ball can be reliably entered into the first winning hole 51 and the second winning hole 52.例文帳に追加

In addition, in this modification, both the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 have a fall prevention portion 5125 that prevents the game ball from falling in the projecting direction side of the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522. , 5225. On the other hand, the first bridge 512 may not include the drop prevention portion 5125 and the second bridge 522 may not include the drop prevention portion 5225 . In short, at least one of the first bridge and the second bridge should be provided with a fall prevention portion that prevents the game ball from falling in the protruding direction side of the first bridge and the second bridge.

[Second embodiment]
A second embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 37 is a front view of a variable winning device according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
In the first embodiment, the variable prize winning device 5 includes the first prize winning port 51 provided on the left side of the game area and the second prize winning port 52 provided on the right side of the game area.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 37, the variable winning device 5A has a first winning port 51 provided on the left side of the game area and a second winning port 51 provided on the right side of the game area. It differs from the first embodiment in that it has a winning opening 52A.

The first winning hole 51 functions as a normal winning hole.
The second prize winning port 52A is the same as the first embodiment except that the prize balls are not paid out when the game ball is entered, and the letter "V" is displayed on the front of the cover 521. It has the same configuration as the winning opening of No. 2. The second winning hole 52A may be configured to pay out prize balls when a game ball enters.

Also, the second prize winning port 52A has a function different from that of the second prize winning port 52 in the first embodiment. Specifically, the second winning opening 52A functions as a V winning opening (specific winning opening). The function of this V winning slot will be described later in detail.
In the following description, the first winning opening 51 and the second winning opening 52A are also simply referred to as the big winning opening 50. FIG.

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a distribution table storing values of random numbers relating to distribution destinations of types of jackpots.
As shown in FIG. 38, the values of the random numbers related to the allocation destination of the jackpot type are stored in the allocation table storage area 63b (see FIG. 14) of the ROM 63 provided as the allocation information group storage means. minute information group). The distribution table includes a first distribution table (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 38(a) and a second distribution table (second distribution information group) shown in FIG. 38(b). ing.
The MPU 62 executes a jackpot type lottery by comparing these distribution tables with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

In the first distribution table, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the reservation area Ra for the first result display unit to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning to the upper operation port 36 It is a table referred to when performing a lottery for the type of jackpot.
As shown in FIG. 38(a), the first distribution table contains a plurality of "low-probability results (special distribution results corresponding to low probabilities)" and "most advantageous results (special distribution results corresponding to high-probability)". The distribution result of is set as the distribution destination. Specifically, in the first distribution table, among the values “0 to 29” of the jackpot type counter C2, “0 to 14” are distributed to “low probability results”, and “15 to 29” are the “best results” ”.

In the second distribution table, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the second result display portion reservation area Rb to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning to the lower operation port 37 It is a table referred to when performing a lottery for the type of jackpot.
In the second distribution table, as shown in FIG. 38B, only the distribution result of "best result" is the distribution destination. Specifically, in the second allocation table, among the values "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, all "0 to 29" are allocated to "best result".

Thus, in the present embodiment, the first sorting table and the second sorting table are "non-explicit small round high probability result (latency high probability result corresponding to small round)" and "explicit small round high probability result ( It is different from the first embodiment in that the allocation result of "high probability result corresponding to a small number of rounds" is not used as the allocation destination.

Further, in this embodiment, the main controller 60 executes processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the game state transition process and the big winning opening opening/closing process are different from those in the first embodiment. The contents of the game state transition process and the big winning opening opening/closing process in this embodiment will be described below.

FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes steps S801 to S815. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39, when the MPU 62 determines that the success result is not the "special loss result" in step S804, that is, when it determines that the success result is a "big hit" is different from the first embodiment in that step S808 is executed, and after step S808 is executed, the processing after step S810 is executed.

FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing process.
In the big winning opening opening/closing process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1024. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40, the MPU 62 differs from the first embodiment in that it executes the V winning detection process in step S1025A after executing step S1006.

In step S1001, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the big winning opening 50 is open.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the large winning opening 50 is not open, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1002.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the big winning opening 50 is open, it executes the processing from step S1006.

First, in step S1001, the processing (processing after step S1002) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the big winning opening 50 is not open will be described.
In step S1002, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the open/close counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1002 that both the value of the opening/closing counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1002 that at least one of the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, in step S1003, the timer counter T Determines whether the value is less than or equal to "0".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1003 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", it ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1003 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", in step S1004, it executes a special winning opening opening process.
The special winning opening opening process of step S1004 will be described in detail below.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process.
In the big winning opening opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1112A. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41, the MPU 62 is different from the first embodiment in that after executing the processing of step S1103 or the processing of step S1106, the processing after step S1109A is executed.
In step S1109A, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is the "best result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1109A that the sorting result is not the "most advantageous result" (when it determines that it is a "low-probability result"), in step S1110A, the MPU 62 executes normal winning opening execution processing. do. In this normal winning hole opening execution process, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the first bridge drive unit 514 to project the first bridge 512 and set the first winning hole 51 to the open state. . After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1109A that the distribution result is the "best result", in step S1111A it checks whether the value of the round counter RC is "15" or more. judge.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1111A that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or greater than "15", it executes the processes after step S1110A described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1111A that the value of the round counter RC is "15" or more, in step S1112A, the MPU 62 executes opening execution processing of the V winning opening. In this V winning hole opening execution process, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the second bridge drive unit 524 to project the second bridge 522 and set the second winning hole 52A to the open state. . After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening process.

Returning to the explanation of the big winning opening opening/closing process, the processes after step S1005 will be explained with reference to FIG.
MPU62 sets an opening command in step S1005, after performing the big winning a prize opening opening process of step S1004. In addition, the MPU 62 transmits the open command set in step S1005 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the big winning opening 50 has been set to the open state based on the open command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, the processing (processing after step S1006) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the big winning opening 50 is being opened in step S1001 will be described.
In step S1006, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less. That is, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the upper limit continuation time set in the timer counter T in step S1103 or step S1106 of the special winning opening opening process has elapsed.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", it executes the processing from step S1025A.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processing from step S1018.

First, processing (processing after step S1025A) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0" will be described.
In step S1025A, the MPU 62 executes V winning detection processing.
The V winning detection process will be described in detail below.

<V Winning Detection Processing>
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the V winning detection process.
In the V winning detection process, as shown in FIG. 42, steps S1301A to S1305A are executed.
In step S1301A, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a prize has been awarded to the second prize winning port 52A. It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not a prize has been awarded to the second prize winning port 52A is executed based on the detection result of the detection sensor 40d corresponding to the second prize winning port 52A.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1301A that no prize has been awarded to the second prize winning opening 52A, the MPU 62 ends the V prize detection process without executing the processes after step S1302A.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1301A that the second winning opening 52A has won, in step S1302A, the MPU 62 executes closing execution processing of the V winning opening. In the V winning opening closing execution process, the MPU 62 causes the second bridge 522 to be immersed and sets the second winning opening 52A in a closed state by executing the drive control of the second bridge driving section 524 .

In step S1303A, the MPU 62 executes normal winning opening execution processing. In the normal winning opening execution process, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the first bridge driving section 514 to project the first bridge 512 and set the first winning opening 51 to the open state.
In step S1304A, the MPU 62 sets the V winning flag in the RAM 64. FIG. This V winning flag is a flag for specifying that a winning to the second winning opening 52A has occurred.

At step S1305A, the MPU 62 sets a V winning command. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the V winning detection process. The MPU 62 transmits the V winning command set in step S1305A to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal processing.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that a prize has been awarded to the second prize winning port 52A based on the V winning command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process. This processing will be described later in detail.

Returning to the explanation of the big winning opening opening/closing process, the processes after step S1007 will be explained with reference to FIG.
In step S<b>1007 , the MPU 62 determines whether or not a prize has been awarded to the first prize winning port 51 . It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not a prize has been awarded to the first prize winning port 51 is executed based on the detection result of the detection sensor 40c corresponding to the first prize winning port 51 .

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1007 that no prize has been awarded to the first prize winning opening 51, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1007 that a prize has been awarded to the first prize winning port 51, in step S1008 the value of the prize counter PC is updated by subtracting 1 from it.

In step S1009, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1009 that the value of the winning counter PC is not equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1009 that the value of the winning counter PC is equal to or less than "0", in step S1010 the closing execution process is executed. In this closing execution process, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the first bridge driving section 514 when the first bridge 512 is protruding and the first winning opening 51 is set in the open state. immerses the first bridge 512 and sets the first winning port 51 to the closed state. In addition, in the closing execution process, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the second bridge driving section 524 when the second bridge 522 is protruded and the second winning opening 52A is set in the open state. By doing so, the second bridge 522 is immersed and the second winning opening 52A is set to the closed state.

In step S1011, the MPU 62 sets a closing command. The MPU 62 transmits the closing command set in step S1011 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the big winning opening 50 has been set to the closed state based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S1012, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special losing result".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1012 that the win/fail result is the "special loss result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1023, which will be described later.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1012 that the win/loss result is not the "special loss result", it executes the processing from step S1013 onward.
In step S1013, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter RC to update it.

In step S1014, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1014 that the value of the round counter RC is not less than "0", it sets the value of the timer counter T to "500" in step S1015. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1015 is set to the open state of the big prize winning port 50, then set to the closed state again, and set the big winning port 50 to the open state again. Defines the open standby time. In addition, in this embodiment, the release waiting time is 1 sec. This opening standby time is the same regardless of the type and progress of the opening/closing execution mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1014 that the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processing from step S1016.
In step S1016, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T to "2000" as a waiting time (waiting period) for ending. As described above, the value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the ending is 4 seconds. Note that the waiting time for the ending is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

The waiting time for the ending is the same regardless of the type of game result, like the waiting time for the opening. That is, the waiting time for this ending is the same regardless of the type of opening/closing execution mode.
The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be slightly different according to the type of game result to the extent that the player recognizes the same. In addition, for example, the waiting time for the ending is greatly different between the game result of "low probability result" or "best result" and the game result other than these. It is good also as a structure which makes it differ greatly according to the kind.

In step S1017, the MPU 62 sets an ending command. The MPU 62 transmits the ending command set in step S1017 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 recognizes the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, the processing (processing after step S1018) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less will be described.
In step S1018, the MPU 62 executes closing execution processing in the same manner as in step S1010 described above.
In step S1019, the MPU 62 sets a closing command as in step S1011 described above.

In step S1020, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special loss result".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1020 that the win/loss result is not the "special loss result", that is, when it determines that the win/loss result is "big win", it executes the processing from step S1021 onwards.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1020 that the win/fail result is the "special loss result", it executes the processing from step S1023 onwards.

First, the process (process after step S1021) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the win/fail result is not the "special loss result" in step S1020 will be described.
In step S1021, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter RC to update it.

In step S1022, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1022 that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes after step S1015 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1022 that the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes after step S1016 described above.

Next, processing (processing after step S1023) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1012 or step S1020 that the win/fail result is the "special losing result" will be described.
In step S1023, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the open/close counter SOC to update it.

In step S1024, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the open/close counter SOC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1024 that the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is not equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1015 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1024 that the value of the open/close counter SOC is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes after step S1016 described above.

FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a flowchart of transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.
In the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1401A to S1408A as shown in FIG.
In step S1401A, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is the "best result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1401A that the sorting result is the "best result", the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1402A.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1401A that the distribution result is not the "best result", it executes the processing from step S1407A.

First, the processing (processing after step S1402A) when the MPU 62 determines that the distribution result is the "best result" in step S1401A will be described.
In step S1402A, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the V winning flag is set in the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1402A that the V winning flag is not set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1407A.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the V winning flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S1402A, it sets the high probability mode flag in the RAM 64 in step S1403A. The MPU 62 maintains the high-probability mode flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64 . As a result, the MPU 62 sets the win/fail lottery mode to the high probability mode. This high-probability mode continues until 50 game rounds are completed. The MPU 62 clears the high probability mode flag when 50 games have been played. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the win/fail lottery mode to the low probability mode.
In addition, the MPU 62 executes these processes as the game round control process in step S303 of the normal process, but detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In step S1404A, "50" is set to the value of the number-of-games counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM64.
At step S1405A, the MPU 62 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. FIG. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64 . Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
At step S1406A, the MPU 62 sets a count limit flag in the RAM 64. FIG. The MPU 62 maintains the number limit flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64 . After that, the MPU 62 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

In addition, when ending the transition process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode, the MPU 62 sets the flags (the low probability result flag and the most favorable result flag) set in the RAM 64 according to the sorting result, the special out flag, the V Clear the prize flag. Further, in step S701 of the fluctuation start process described above, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 64, thereby determining whether or not the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode. there is

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number-of-times limit flag is set, 50 games, which is the end reference number of times set in the game number counter, are played. Continue until times are digested. The MPU 62 clears the high-frequency support flag and the number-of-times limit flag when 50 games have been played. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low-frequency support mode.
Note that the MPU 62 executes these processes as electrical support processes in step S306 of the normal process, but detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Next, in step S1401A, if the MPU 62 determines that the distribution result is not the "best result", or if the MPU 62 determines that the V prize flag is not set in the RAM 64 in step S1402A, processing is performed. (Processing after step S1407A) will be described.
At step S1407A, the MPU 62 clears the high probability mode flag. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the win/fail lottery mode to the low probability mode. This low-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is obtained in the winning lottery and the distribution result is other than a "low-probability result".

In step S1408A, the MPU 62 sets "100" to the value of the number-of-games counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. FIG.
After that, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1405A described above.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number-of-times limit flag is set, 100 games, which is the end reference number of times set in the game number counter, are played. Continue until times are digested. The MPU 62 clears the high-frequency support flag and the number-of-times limit flag when 100 games have been played. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low-frequency support mode.
Note that the MPU 62 executes these processes as electrical support processes in step S306 of the normal process, but detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

In this way, after the winning lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the distribution result in the distribution lottery results in a "best result", when a prize is awarded to the second winning port 52A, the game Regardless of the current game state, the state shifts to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode shift to the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode when 50 game rounds are completed without becoming "big hit" in the lottery.

In addition, if the winning lottery results in a "big win" and the distribution result in the distribution lottery becomes a "best result", no prize is won in the second winning opening 52A, or the winning lottery. , and the distribution result is "low probability result" in the distribution lottery, the game state is the opening and closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) regardless of the current game state. ), the mode shifts to the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode. The low-probability mode continues at least until a "jackpot win" is achieved in the lottery, and the high-frequency support mode continues until the "jackpot win" is achieved in the lottery. Transition to frequency support mode.

Further, when the winning lottery does not result in a "big hit", that is, when the winning result in the winning lottery is a "special losing result" or a "normal losing result", the game state does not shift.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60, based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37, the It functions as game state transition means for shifting the game state to the opening/closing execution mode.
Also, the variable winning device 5A has shifted to a state in which a game ball can enter when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the bridges 512, 522 and the bridge drive units 514, 524 allow game balls to enter the first winning hole 51 and prevent game balls from entering the second winning hole 52A. A first ball-enterable state, a second ball-enterable state in which a game ball is allowed to enter the second prize-winning port 52A and a game ball is not allowed to enter the first prize-winning port 51, and a first prize-winning. A ball entry state switching provided between the first prize winning port 51 and the second prize winning port 52A is switched to a state in which a game ball is not allowed to enter either the port 51 or the second prize winning port 52A. functioning as a tool.

Specifically, each of the bridge drive units 514 and 524 protrudes the first bridge 512 with respect to the game board 31 and retracts the second bridge 522 with respect to the game board 31, thereby It is switched to the first ball entering possible state in which the game ball is entered into the first winning hole 51 via the bridge 512 . Each bridge driving unit 514, 524 protrudes the second bridge 522 with respect to the game board 31 and retracts the first bridge 512 with respect to the game board 31, thereby It is switched to the second ball entering possible state in which the game ball is entered into the second winning hole 52A. Each of the bridge driving units 514 and 524 switches the ball-entering disabled state by causing the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 to sink into the game board 31 .
In other words, each of the bridge drive units 514 and 524 switches the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 between enabled and disabled to set the first ball-enterable state, the second ball-enterable state, and the In the first ball-enterable state and the second ball-enterable state, both the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 cannot be set to be valid.

In the present embodiment, when the main controller 60 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the ball-entering state switching means switches to the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state, and the opening/closing is executed. If the mode has not been changed, the ball-entering state is switched to the ball-entering disabled state by the ball-entering state switching means.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the effect determination process is different from that in the first embodiment. The contents of the effect determination process in this embodiment will be described below.

<Regarding effect determination processing executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect determination processing.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process in order to execute an effect for the game cycle, an effect for the opening/closing execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2101 to S2116. Note that, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2109 that an opening command has been received, it executes the processing from step S2113 onwards, and executes the processing in step S2116. It is different from the first embodiment in that the processing of steps S2117A to S2119A is executed before the processing.

In step S2117A, the MPU 92 determines whether or not it has received a V winning command.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2117A that the V winning command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S2116.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2117A that the V winning command has been received, in step S2118A, the MPU 92 executes V winning notification effect determination processing. In this process of determining the V winning notification effect, the MPU 92 determines execution of the V winning notification effect for notifying the player of the occurrence of the winning to the second winning hole 52A.
Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and the sound control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution processing of step S2003 described above.

At step S2119A, the MPU 92 sets a V winning notification command including information related to the V winning notification effect determined at step S2118A. Then, the MPU 92 stores the V winning notification command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94 a of the RAM 94 . This V winning notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the V winning notification effect on the symbol display device 47 based on the V winning notification command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the V winning notification effect.

After executing the processing of step S2119A, or when determining that the V winning command has not been received in step S2117A, the MPU 92 executes the processing of step S2116 and subsequent steps, as in the first embodiment.

<About the flow when switching to open/close execution mode>
FIG. 45 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device and the variable winning device when the opening/closing execution mode is entered. It should be noted that FIG. 45 shows the variable winning device 5A under the display screen G in a simplified manner.
Specifically, FIG. 45(A) is a diagram showing the display screen G when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode. FIGS. 45(B) and (C) are diagrams showing the flow before generating the winning to the second winning opening 52A. FIGS. 45(D) and (E) are diagrams showing the flow after the winning to the second winning hole 52A is generated.

When shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 stops the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 as shown in FIG. 45(A). In the example of FIG. 45, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as a stop result. The result indicates the "best result".

When the MPU 102 receives the opening/closing execution mode command, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 .
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45(B), the MPU 102 reduces each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and arranges them at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. The characters "BONUS!" are displayed in the center of the screen G.

After that, as shown in FIG. 45(C), the MPU 102 displays a character (for example, "ROUND 1") indicating the number of executions of the round game at the upper left position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, and starts the round game. . Then, the MPU 102 displays the characters "Aim for V!"
Further, in the first round game, the MPU 62 determines that the value of the round counter RC is "15" or more at step S1111A, so at step S1112A, the V winning opening execution processing is executed. In this V winning hole opening execution process, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the second bridge drive unit 524 to project the second bridge 522 and set the second winning hole 52A to the open state. . Thereby, the MPU 62 can guide the game ball flowing down the game area between the cover 511 and the cover 521 to the opening of the cover 521 .

When the winning to the second winning opening 52A occurs, the MPU 102 displays the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. A large letter "V" indicating that a prize has been won in the second prize winning port 52A is displayed at the center position of .
Also, the MPU 62 executes closing execution processing of the V winning opening in step S1302A. In this V winning opening closing execution process, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the second bridge driving section 524 to immerse the second bridge 522 and set the second winning opening 52A to the closed state. .

After that, the MPU 62 executes normal winning opening execution processing in step S1303A. In this normal winning hole opening execution process, the MPU 62, as shown in FIG. The winning opening 51 of is set to an open state. Thereby, the MPU 62 can guide the game ball flowing down the game area between the cover 511 and the cover 521 to the opening of the cover 511 .

In addition, when the winning to the second winning opening 52A does not occur, the MPU 62 waits until 30 sec, which is the upper limit continuous time set in the timer counter T in step S1106 of the big winning opening opening process, elapses. , in step S1018, a closing execution process is executed. In this closing execution process, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the second bridge driving section 524 to immerse the second bridge 522 and set the second winning opening 52A to the closed state, and the next round is executed. Start playing. In this case, as described above, regardless of the current game state, the game state shifts to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends. do.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60, based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37, the It functions as game state transition means for shifting the game state from the normal control state to the opening/closing execution mode.
In addition, in this embodiment, the normal control state includes a low probability mode (first game state) and a high probability mode (second game state) different from the low probability mode.

In this embodiment, the variable winning device 5A includes a first winning port 51 (normal winning port) for executing payout of a predetermined number of winning balls when a game ball enters, and a normal control when a game ball enters. A second winning opening 52A (specific winning opening) for setting the state to the high probability mode is provided.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the normal control state has a low probability mode (first game state) and a high probability mode (second game state) different from the low probability mode, but games other than these The state may be the normal control state. For example, in the normal control state, the low-frequency support mode may be the first game state, and the high-frequency support mode may be the second game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main controller 60 uses the ball entry state switching means based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37 as a trigger. Large winning hole opening process (ball entering state determination unit) for determining whether to switch to the second ball entering possible state, and when the game ball does not enter the second winning hole 52A in the open/close execution mode Then, the normal control state is set to the low probability mode, and when the game ball enters the second winning hole 52A, the normal control state is set to the high probability mode Transition processing at the end of the opening and closing execution mode (game state setting unit ) and
In the present embodiment, the ball-entering state switching means switches the second ball-enterable state to the first ball-enterable state when the game ball enters the second winning hole 52A.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) Since the variable winning device 5A is provided with a ball entering state switching means, when the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, a predetermined A game ball can enter the first prize winning port 51 for executing payout of the number of prize balls, and the normal control state is changed to a high state by switching to the second ball enterable state by the ball entering state switching means. A game ball can be entered into the second winning hole 52A set to the probability mode. Further, when the variable winning device 5A is not in the opening/closing execution mode, the variable winning device 5A switches to the state in which the ball cannot be entered by the ball-entering state switching means, thereby opening the first winning port 51 and the second winning port 52A. It is possible to prevent game balls from entering. Therefore, when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, the variable winning device 5A can set the normal control state to the high-probability mode by switching the ball-enterable state with the ball-entering state switching means. It is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

(2) The main control device 60 selects the second input by the ball entry state switching means based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37. Since the large winning opening opening process for determining whether or not to switch to the ball possible state is provided, the player pays attention to the decision result of the large winning opening opening process, resulting in the second ball entering possible state. I would expect so. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.
(3) The ball-entering state switching means switches the second ball-enterable state to the first ball-enterable state when the game ball enters the second winning hole 52A. After entering the game ball into the second winning hole 52A, the game ball can enter into the first winning hole 51.例文帳に追加Then, the first prize winning port 51 can execute the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls when a game ball enters. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play comfortably.

(4) Since the first bridge 512 is inclined so as to descend toward the first prize winning port 51 side, the first bridge driving section 514 moves the first bridge 512 to the game board 31. By projecting, it is possible to switch to the first ball-enterable state in which the game ball is entered into the first winning hole 51 via the first bridge 512 . Since the second bridge 522 is inclined so as to descend toward the second winning opening 52A side, the second bridge driving section 524 causes the second bridge 522 to protrude with respect to the game board 31. , it is possible to switch to the second enterable state in which the game ball is entered into the second winning hole 52A via the second bridge 522. Also, since the first prize winning port 51 and the second prize winning port 52A are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the respective bridge driving units 514 and 524 are arranged to be connected to the first bridge 512 and the second bridge. By immersing the player 522 into the game board 31, it is possible to switch to a state in which it is impossible to enter a ball. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can simplify the configuration of the ball entry state switching means. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 can diversify the movement of the game balls flowing down the game area, and can improve the attention of the players to the game.

(5) The first prize winning port 51 is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction, and the second prize winning port 52A is provided so as to open to the other side in the horizontal direction. The state switching means causes the game balls to enter the first winning hole 51 or the second winning hole 52A by allocating the game balls horizontally. Therefore, in order to switch between the first ball-enterable state, the second ball-enterable state, and the ball-enterable state, for example, compared to the case of adopting a mechanism such as an opening and closing door, the ball-entering state switching means is , the space of the game area can be effectively used for installation.

(6) Since the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 are provided so as to intersect, if they are provided so as not to intersect (for example, they are provided offset in the vertical direction) case), the ball entry state switching means can be installed by effectively utilizing the space of the game area.
(7) The first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 project and sink the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 through the slit 5124 of the first bridge 512 and the slit 5224 of the second bridge 522 . By interlocking along the direction, the configuration of the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 can be simplified because they are provided so as to intersect.

(8) The protrusion width D1 of the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 from the game board 31 is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball, so it is set to the same width as the diameter of the game ball. The first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 can be quickly immersed in the game board 31 as compared with the case of being set. Therefore, immediately after the first bridge 512 or the second bridge 522 is immersed in the game board 31, each of the bridge drive units 514 and 524 moves the first bridge 512 or the second bridge 522 to the first bridge 512 or the second bridge 522. It is possible to suppress over-winning in which the game ball guided to the winning opening 51 or the second winning opening 52A is made to win the first winning opening 51 or the second winning opening 52A.
(9) The upper surfaces of the covers 511 and 521 protrude further toward the opening than the lower surfaces of the covers 511 and 521. As compared with the case where the shape does not protrude toward the opening direction, the game ball is less likely to enter the first winning opening 51 or the second winning opening 52A by mistake.

[Third Embodiment]
A third embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 46 is a front view of a game board according to the third embodiment of the invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 includes the first winning port 51 and the second winning port 52 provided below the game area, and the first winning port 51 and the second winning port 52 are , functioned as the large winning opening 50.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game board 31B includes a first prize winning port 51B and a second prize winning port 52B provided at the lower right of the game area, as shown in FIG. The winning opening 51B has the same function as the lower operating opening 37 in the first embodiment, and the second winning opening 52B is a variable winning device that pays out a predetermined number of winning balls when a game ball enters. It differs from the first embodiment in that it functions as the big winning opening 50 of 5B.

It should be noted that the player maximizes the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 27, and moves the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side, the game ball can be guided to the first winning opening 51B and the second winning opening 52B while avoiding the variable display unit 43 and the like.

In the following description of the game board 31B, components having the same functions as those of the first embodiment, but having different shapes and arrangements are given the same reference numerals.

The game board 31B has, in the game area, a plurality of large and small openings which are formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. In addition, the game board 31B includes a general winning port 30 provided at each opening, an upper working port (first starting ball entering portion) 36, a first winning port (second starting ball entering portion) 51B, a second It has a prize winning port 52B and an out port 39 . The game board 31B includes through gates 41 provided on the left and right sides of the central portion, a main display device 42 provided on the upper right side, a variable display unit 43 provided on the central portion, and the like. have. In addition, the game board 31B has a large number of nails 44 planted in order to appropriately disperse or adjust the falling direction of game balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills in the game area. ing.

Each of the general winning opening 30, the upper operating opening 36, the first winning opening 51B, and the first winning opening 52B has detection sensors 40a to 40d (see FIG. 50) for detecting the entry of game balls. These detection sensors 40a to 40d are arranged on the back side of the game board 31B. Specifically, the upper working port 36 has a detection sensor 40a, the first winning port 51B has a detecting sensor 40b, the second winning port 52B has a detecting sensor 40c, and the general winning port 30 has , and a detection sensor 40d. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40a to 40d. The detection sensors 40a to 40d may be of any kind as long as they can individually detect winning of game balls, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor can be employed.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 pays out 10 prize balls when a ball enters the general winning hole 30 . The pachinko machine 10 pays out three prize balls when a ball enters the upper working hole 36 and when a ball enters the first prize winning hole 51B. The pachinko machine 10 pays out 15 prize balls when a ball enters the second prize winning hole 52B. In addition, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls of the upper operation port 36 and the first prize winning port 51B may be different.

FIG. 47 is a front view of the game board in which the vicinity of the first prize winning port and the second prize winning port is enlarged.
As shown in FIG. 47, the first prize winning opening 51B is provided in an opening 315 formed in the game area so as to pass through in the front-rear direction by applying router processing. This first prize winning opening 51B is provided so as to open to the right, and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped cover 511B that guides the game ball entered through this opening to the opening 315, and inside the cover 511B It is provided with the aforementioned detection sensor 40b for detecting the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number (three in the present embodiment) of prize balls based on the detection result.
In addition, the game ball guided by the cover 511B and entering the opening 315 is discharged from the game area through the discharge passage 315a. The game balls passing through the discharge passage 315a join the game balls discharged from the game area through the discharge passage 39a (see FIG. 5) of the out port 39.

The second prize winning opening 52B is formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by applying router processing, and is provided in an opening 316 located above the opening 315 . The second winning opening 52B is provided so as to open to the left, and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped cover 521B that guides the game ball entered through this opening to the opening 316, and inside the cover 521B It is provided with the aforementioned detection sensor 40c for detecting the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number (15 in this embodiment) of prize balls based on the detection result.
In addition, the game ball guided by the cover 521B and entering the opening 316 is discharged from the game area through the discharge passage 316a provided so as to merge with the discharge passage 315a. The game balls passing through the discharge passage 316a join the game balls discharged from the game area through the discharge passage 39a (see FIG. 5) of the out port 39 in the same way as the game balls passing through the discharge passage 315a. become.

Thus, in this embodiment, the first prize winning opening 51B is provided so as to open to one side in the horizontal direction (+X axis direction side). The second prize winning opening 52B is provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction (−X axis direction side).
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first winning hole 51B and the second winning hole 52B function as ball entry means for entering game balls flowing down the game area.

The first winning port 51B includes a first bridge 512B in the shape of a substantially rectangular plate provided on the right side of the cover 511B, and a first bridge driving section 514B for driving the first bridge 512B. .
The first bridge 512B is provided so as to be able to protrude through a hole 313B having a rectangular cross section formed in the game board 31B, and is provided so as to be inclined from the lower end of the cover 511B to the upper end of the cover 521B. It is

The second winning port 52B includes a substantially rectangular plate-shaped second bridge 522B provided on the left side of the cover 521B, and a second bridge driving section 524B for driving the second bridge 522B. .
The second bridge 522B is provided so as to be able to protrude through a hole 314B having a rectangular cross section formed in the game board 31B, and is provided so as to be inclined from the lower end of the cover 521B to the upper portion of the cover 511B. ing.

The first bridge 512B is provided so as to be steeper than the second bridge 522B. The first bridge 512B spans between the opening of the cover 511B and the opening of the cover 521B, while the second bridge 522B spans between the opening of the cover 521B and the upper surface of the cover 511B. and the left end of the In other words, the horizontal length of the first bridge 512B is less than the horizontal length of the second bridge 522B.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first bridge 512B is provided so as to be able to protrude from the game board 31B. The bridge 522 is provided so as to be projectable and retractable with respect to the game board 31, and is inclined so as to descend toward the second prize winning opening 52 side.
Further, in the present embodiment, the first bridge driving section 514B and the second bridge driving section 524B function as bridge driving sections that cause the first bridge 512B and the second bridge 522B to protrude from the game board 31B. is doing. In other words, the first bridge driver 514B and the second bridge driver 524B function as dielectric drivers that independently drive the first bridge 512B and the second bridge 522B.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, the first bridge 512B and the second bridge 522B are provided so as to cross each other.

The first bridge 512B, like the first bridge 512 in the first embodiment, has a slit (not shown) formed in its central portion and extending from the back side to the front side. .
The second bridge 522B, like the second bridge 522 in the first embodiment, has a slit (not shown) formed in its central portion and extending from the front side to the back side. .

The slits of the first bridge 512B and the slits of the second bridge 522B are meshed along the projecting direction (Y-axis direction) of the first bridge 512B and the second bridge 522B.
Thus, in this embodiment, the first bridge 512B and the second bridge 522B connect the slits of the first bridge 512B and the slits of the second bridge 522B to the first bridge 512B and the second bridge 522B. 522B are provided so as to intersect by meshing along the projecting/retracting direction.

Here, the game board 31B is provided with a panel 53B provided so as to cover the front side of the first prize winning port 51B and the second prize winning port 52B. The panel 53B includes a transparent (or translucent) panel 53B1 formed so that the first prize winning port 51B and the second prize winning port 52B can be visually recognized from the front side, and a transparent panel 53B1 provided around the transparent panel 53B1. and an opaque panel 53B2 formed to be opaque.
Therefore, the player can visually recognize the first prize winning port 51B and the second prize winning port 52B from the front through the transparent panel 53B1 and the window portion 21 .

FIG. 48 is a schematic diagram showing the front of the first prize winning port and the second prize winning port in a state in which the first bridge is projected and recessed. Specifically, FIG. 48(A) is a diagram showing the flow path of the game ball dropped above the cover 521B when the first bridge 512B is projected, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the flow path of the game ball which fell above the cover 521B when the bridge 512B of is immersed.
The first bridge driving section 514B (see FIG. 47) causes the first bridge 512B to protrude from the game board 31B through a hole 313B formed in the game board 31B, as shown in FIG. 48(A). Since the first bridge 512B is provided so as to incline from the lower end of the cover 511B to the upper end of the cover 521B, by protruding from the game board 31B, it flows down the game area between the covers 511B and 521B. A game ball to be played can be guided to the opening of the cover 511B (see the arrow in the figure).

The game ball dropped above the cover 521B moves leftward along the slope of the upper surface of the cover 521B, then moves leftward along the slope of the upper surface of the first bridge 512B, and reaches the opening of the cover 511B. be guided.
The game ball dropped on the top surface of the first bridge 512B moves leftward along the slope of the top surface of the first bridge 512B and is guided to the opening of the cover 511B. In addition, since the game board 31B has the nail 44 arranged to prevent the game ball from falling above the cover 511B, the game ball does not fall above the cover 511B.

Here, the width of protrusion of the first bridge 512B from the game board 31B is set to be narrower than the interval between the game board 31B and the panel 53B. In other words, the projection width of the first bridge 512B from the game board 31B is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball (not shown).
In this embodiment, the width of the first bridge 512B protruding from the game board 31B is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball, but is set to the same width as the diameter of the game ball. Alternatively, it may be set to be wider than the diameter of the game ball.

The width of the opening of the cover 511B is set so as to narrow from the entrance side (right side) toward the back side (left side). According to this, the cover 511B can smoothly enter the game ball guided along the slope of the first bridge 512B to the first winning hole 51B.
The upper surface of the cover 511B has a shape that protrudes further toward the cover 521B (opening direction side) than the lower surface of the cover 511B.

Also, as shown in FIG. 48B, the first bridge driving section 514B causes the first bridge 512B to enter the game board 31B through the hole 313B formed in the game board 31B. By immersing the first bridge 512B into the game board 31B, it is possible to guide the game balls flowing down the game area between the cover 511B and the cover 521B to the out port 39.

The game ball dropped above the cover 521B moves leftward along the slope of the upper surface of the cover 521B and then falls between the covers 511B and 521B and is led to the out port 39.例文帳に追加
In addition, the game ball dropped between the cover 511B and the cover 521B is guided to the out port 39 as it is. In addition, since the game board 31B has the nail 44 arranged to prevent the game ball from falling above the cover 511B, the game ball does not fall above the cover 511B.

Thus, the first winning port 51B is in an open state (support state or guide state) in which the first bridge 512B as a guide piece (support piece) protrudes from the game board 31B and guides the game ball to the opening of the cover 511B. ) and a closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) in which the first bridge 512B is immersed in the game board 31B and the game ball is guided to the out port 39.
The first bridge driving section 514B drives the first bridge 512B to set the first prize winning opening 51B to either the open state or the closed state.

In other words, the first bridge 512B functions as a first derivative that guides game balls to the first winning opening 51B.
Then, the first bridge driving unit 514B sets the first bridge 512B to be effective (open state) by projecting the first bridge 512B with respect to the game board 31B, and the first bridge 512B is set to the game. The first bridge 512B is disabled (closed state) by retracting it into the board 31B.

As described above, the width of the projection of the first bridge 512B from the game board 31B is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball. The first bridge 512B can be quickly immersed in the game board 31B as compared with the case where the first bridge 512B is held.
According to this, the first bridge driving section 514B, immediately after setting the first winning opening 51B to the closed state, immediately before setting the first winning opening 51B to the closed state, in the first bridge 512B It is possible to suppress over-winning in which the game ball guided to the opening of the cover 511B is made to enter the first winning port 51B.

Further, as described above, the upper surface of the cover 511B has a shape that protrudes toward the cover 521B side (opening direction side) from the lower surface of the cover 511B, so that the first prize winning opening 51B is closed. In this case, compared to the case where the upper surface portion of the cover 511B does not protrude toward the cover 521B side (opening direction side) from the lower surface portion of the cover 511B, the game ball is erroneously inserted into the first winning hole 51B. It becomes difficult to win prizes.
In this embodiment, the upper surface of the cover 511B protrudes toward the cover 521B (opening direction side) from the lower surface of the cover 511B, but may have a non-protruding shape.

FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram showing the front of the first prize winning port and the second prize winning port in a state in which the second bridge is projected and recessed. Specifically, FIG. 49(A) is a diagram showing the flow path of the game ball dropped above the cover 521B when the second bridge 522B is projected, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the flow path of the game ball which fell above the cover 521B when the bridge 522B of is immersed.
The second bridge driving section 524B (see FIG. 47) causes the first bridge 522B to protrude from the game board 31B through a hole 314B formed in the game board 31B, as shown in FIG. 49(A). Since the second bridge 522B is provided so as to incline from the lower end of the cover 521B to the upper part of the cover 511B, by protruding from the game board 31B, it flows down the game area between the covers 511B and 521B. A game ball can be guided to the opening of the cover 521B (see the arrow in the figure).

The game ball dropped above the cover 521B moves leftward along the slope of the upper surface of the cover 521B, then moves rightward along the slope of the upper surface of the second bridge 522B, and reaches the opening of the cover 521B. be guided.
The game ball dropped on the upper surface of the second bridge 522B moves rightward along the slope of the upper surface of the second bridge 522B and is guided to the opening of the cover 521B. In addition, since the game board 31B has the nail 44 arranged to prevent the game ball from falling above the cover 511B, the game ball does not fall above the cover 511B.

Here, the protrusion width of the second bridge 522B from the game board 31B is set to be narrower than the interval between the game board 31B and the panel 53B. In other words, the projection width of the second bridge 522B from the game board 31B is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball (not shown).
In this embodiment, the width of the second bridge 522B protruding from the game board 31B is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball, but is set to the same width as the diameter of the game ball. Alternatively, it may be set to be wider than the diameter of the game ball.

The opening width of the cover 521B is set so as to narrow from the entrance side (right side) toward the back side (left side). According to this, the cover 521B can smoothly enter the game ball guided along the slope of the second bridge 522B to the second winning hole 52B.
The upper surface of the cover 521B has a shape that protrudes toward the cover 511B (opening direction side) from the lower surface of the cover 521B.

Further, the second bridge driving section 524B, as shown in FIG. 49B, causes the second bridge 522B to enter the game board 31B through the hole 314B formed in the game board 31B. By immersing the second bridge 522B into the game board 31B, it is possible to guide the game balls flowing down the game area between the cover 511B and the cover 521B to the out port 39.

The game ball dropped above the cover 521B moves leftward along the slope of the upper surface of the cover 521B and then falls between the covers 511B and 521B and is led to the out port 39.例文帳に追加
In addition, the game ball dropped between the covers 511B and 521B falls between the covers 511B and 521B and is guided to the out port 39 . In addition, since the game board 31B has the nail 44 arranged to prevent the game ball from falling above the cover 511B, the game ball does not fall above the cover 511B.

In this way, the second winning port 52B has an open state in which the second bridge 522B protrudes from the game board 31B and guides the game ball to the opening of the cover 521B, and a state in which the second bridge 522B is immersed in the game board 31B. and a closed state in which the game ball is led to the out port 39.
The second bridge driving section 524B drives the second bridge 522B to set the second winning opening 52B to either an open state or a closed state.

In other words, the second bridge 522B functions as a second derivative that guides game balls to the second winning opening 52B.
Then, the second bridge drive unit 524B sets the second bridge 522B to be valid (open state) by causing the second bridge 522B to protrude with respect to the game board 31B, and the second bridge 522B is set to the game. The second bridge 522B is disabled (closed state) by retracting it into the board 31B.

As described above, the width of the protrusion of the second bridge 522B from the game board 31B is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball. The second bridge 522B can be quickly immersed in the game board 31B as compared with the case where the second bridge 522B is held.
According to this, the second bridge driving section 524B, immediately after setting the second winning opening 52B to the closed state, immediately before setting the second winning opening 52B to the closed state, in the second bridge 522B It is possible to suppress over-winning in which the game ball guided to the opening of the cover 521B is made to enter the second winning port 52B.

Further, as described above, the upper surface of the cover 521B has a shape that protrudes toward the cover 511B side (opening direction side) from the lower surface of the cover 521B, so that the second winning opening 52B is closed. In this case, compared to the case where the upper surface portion of the cover 521B does not protrude toward the cover 511B side (opening direction side) from the lower surface portion of the cover 521B, the game ball is erroneously inserted into the second winning hole 52B. It becomes difficult to win prizes.
In this embodiment, the upper surface of the cover 521B protrudes toward the cover 511B (opening direction side) from the lower surface of the cover 521B, but may have a non-protruding shape.

Specifically, the second winning hole 52B is normally set to a closed state in which game balls cannot win. Then, in the internal lottery, when the switch to the opening/closing execution mode is won and the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the second winning hole 52B is set to an open state in which game balls can win.
The open/close execution mode (specific control state) refers to a mode in which the second winning opening 52B is set to an open state and a game ball can enter the second winning opening 52B. Further, in the open/close execution mode, after setting the second winning opening 52B to the open state, until it is set to the closed state again is called one round game.

As shown in FIG. 46, the main display device 42 has a main display portion 45 and a character object display portion 46, and includes a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner, a dot display device, and a dot display device. It is configured by arranging a plurality of display devices such as.
The main display device 42 is provided on the game board 31B so as to protrude toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. That is, the main display device 42 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 22 . Also, the distance between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22 is narrower than one game ball. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 prevents game balls from falling between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22.例文帳に追加In other words, the pachinko machine 10 prevents game balls from falling in front of the main display device 42 .

The main display section 45 includes a first result display section 45a for displaying the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the upper working opening 36, and the first result displaying section 45a for displaying the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the first winning opening 51B. and a second result display portion 45b for displaying the result of the internal lottery (see FIG. 50). The main display unit 45 may further include a round display unit for clearly indicating the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode when the opening/closing execution mode is entered (or when the opening/closing execution mode is entered). .

The first result display unit 45a executes the variable display of the pattern with the winning to the upper working port 36 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the upper working port 36. to display the results of When the result of this internal lottery is the result corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the first result display section 45a displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.
The second result display unit 45b executes the variable display of the pattern with the winning to the first winning port 51B as a trigger, and performs the variable display based on the winning to the first winning port 51B as the stop result of the variable display. display the results of the internal lottery that was held. When the result of this internal lottery is the result corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the second result display section 45b displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the upper operation port 36 and the first prize winning port 51B enter the game ball flowing down the game area, and start ball entry means for executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters. function as

The character object display unit 46 performs variable display of the pattern with the winning of each through gate 41 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41. to display the results of The accessory display unit 46 displays a predetermined stop result when the result of the internal lottery is the result corresponding to the shift to the electric role open state. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the electric role open state. In this electric open state, the first prize winning opening 51B is opened in a predetermined manner.

In the present embodiment, the main display unit 45 and character object display unit 46 are configured by segment displays, but are not limited to this, and may be liquid crystal display devices, organic EL display devices, CRTs, It may also consist of other types of display devices such as dot matrix. The patterns to be variably displayed on the main display unit 45 and the accessory display unit 46 include a configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of characters, a configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, and a configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of characters. , or a configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed can be adopted.

The variable display unit 43 includes a pattern display device 47 that variably displays (variable display or switching display) a pattern, which is one type of pattern. Also, the variable display unit 43 has a center frame 48 arranged so as to surround the pattern display device 47 . The upper portion of the center frame 48 is provided so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game balls from falling in front of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, and does not cause the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G is lowered due to the falling of the game balls. It is configured.

The pattern display device 47 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display. This symbol display device 47 starts the variable display of symbols based on the winning to the upper operation port 36 or the first winning port 51B. That is, when the symbol display device 47 performs the variable display in the first result display section 45a of the main display section 45 and when the second result display section 45b of the main display section 45 performs the variable display, The variable display is executed accordingly.
The pattern display device 47 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or another display device such as a CRT.

The center frame 48 includes a first holding lamp portion 49a provided in the lower left region of the pattern display device 47, a second holding lamp portion 49b provided in the lower right region of the pattern display device 47, and a pattern display. a third holding lamp portion 49c provided in the upper region of the device 47;

The first reservation lamp part 49a is a part that displays the number of reserved game balls that have won the upper operation opening 36, and is lit according to the number of reserved balls. The first holding lamp portion 49a can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the first result display portion 45a and the symbol display device 47. FIG.
The second reservation lamp part 49b is a part that displays the number of reserved game balls that have won the first prize winning opening 51B, and lights up according to the number of reserved games. The second holding lamp portion 49b can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the second result display portion 45b and the symbol display device 47. FIG.
The third reservation lamp portion 49c is a portion that displays the number of reserved game balls that have won each through gate 41, and lights up according to the number of reserved games. The third holding lamp portion 49 c can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the accessory display portion 46 .
Note that each of the holding lamp portions 49a to 49c may have other configurations such as being displayed as an image on a portion of the pattern display device 47, which will be described later.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 50 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 50, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a sound emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 includes a payout control device 70 for executing payout control for causing the payout device 71 to pay out game balls, and a power source/power source for executing shooting control for causing the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot game balls. and a launch control device 80, which are mounted on the back pack unit.

The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control (main control) of the game, and a power outage monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. Note that the main controller 60 includes a board box that houses the main control board 61 and the like. The substrate box may comprise marking means for marking upon its opening and may comprise marking structures for marking upon its opening. Specifically, as trace means, a circuit board box is formed by connecting a plurality of case bodies, and a connecting part (crimped part) that requires breaking of a predetermined part when separating each case body is provided, or a structure that peels off At this time, it is possible to adopt a structure in which a sealing seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off because the adhesive layer remains on the object to be adhered is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the plurality of case bodies. Also, as the trace structure, it is possible to employ a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between these case bodies.

The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61 and a ROM 63 and a RAM 64 that constitute the MPU 62 . Here, the MPU 62 is an element in which, in addition to the ROM 63 and RAM 64, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, and the like are combined into a chip.
In this embodiment, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 62, but they may be integrated into individual chips. This also applies to the MPUs of other controllers other than the main controller 60 .

The ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside to hold stored information. The ROM 63 has various areas such as a win/fail table storage area 63a, a distribution table storage area 63b, and a reach table storage area 63c. These areas are described in detail later.
The RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 63, and is a volatile storage means that requires external power supply to hold the stored information. is. This RAM 64 has various areas such as a various counter area 64a, a reserved ball storage area 64b, and an electrical work reservation area 64c. These areas are described in detail later.

The MPU 62 has an input port and an output port. An input port of the MPU 62 is connected to a power failure monitor board 65 provided in the main controller 60 and a plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40f. The output port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, the payout control device 70, and the sound emission control device 90. In addition, the output port of the MPU 62 includes a first bridge driving section 514B that causes the first bridge 512B of the first winning opening 51B to project and retract, and a second bridge 522B of the second winning opening 52B that projects and retracts. It is connected to the second bridge drive unit 524B that allows the display to be performed, the main display unit 45, and the character object display unit 46. As shown in FIG.

The main control board 61 has a driver circuit. The MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric power release state, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the first bridge driving section 514B to cause the first bridge 512B to protrude. Further, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the second bridge driving section 524B to cause the second bridge 522B to protrude. Also, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the main display section 45 to display the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning in the upper working opening 36 and the first winning opening 51B. Further, the MPU 62 executes display control of the accessory display section 46 to display the results of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41 .

The blackout monitoring board 65 relays the main control board 61 and the power supply/launch control device 80 having a function of supplying operating power, and monitors the stable DC voltage of 24 volts output from the power supply/launch control device 80. . Therefore, the MPU 62 receives power through the blackout monitoring board 65 .
The detection sensors 40a to 40f are connected to various winning ports such as the general winning port 30, the upper working port 36, the first winning port 51B, and the second winning port 52B, the out port 39, and the through gates 41 one-to-one. are provided accordingly. The MPU 62 performs prize winning determination (ball entry determination) for various prize winning ports, the out port 39, and each through gate 41 based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40a to 40f. Note that the MPU 62 executes an internal lottery based on the winning determination to the upper operation port 36 or the first winning port 51B.

The payout control device 70 executes payout control to cause the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls and rental balls (game balls to be lent to players during games) based on commands (control instructions) transmitted from the main control device 60. do.

The power supply/launch control device 80 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, the power supply/launch control device 80 generates the operating power required for each of the main control board 61 and the payout control device 70 based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, and the generated operation supply power. The power/launch control device 80 includes a power failure power supply unit such as a backup capacitor. This power-off power supply unit supplies power for memory retention to the RAM 64 of the main control unit 60 even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted.

In addition, the power supply/shooting control device 80 executes shooting control for causing the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot game balls. Here, the game ball shooting mechanism 81 includes a shooting rail extending toward the guide rail 34 of the game board 31, a ball feeding device for supplying game balls stored in the upper tray 25a onto the shooting rail, and a and a solenoid that is an electric actuator that shoots the game ball supplied to the guide rail 34 toward the guide rail 34 . The power supply/launch control device 80 supplies a drive signal (launch permission signal) to the solenoid to launch the game ball when a predetermined launch condition is met.

Further, in this embodiment, the main controller 60 executes processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the winning process for the operating hole, the normal process, the game state transition process, and the big winning hole opening process are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the winning process for the operating hole, the normal process, the game state transition process, and the big winning hole opening process in this embodiment will be described.

<Winning process for operating port>
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the winning process for the working opening.
In the winning process for the working opening, the MPU 62 executes steps S201 to S207. In this embodiment, the MPU 62 differs from the first embodiment in that, as shown in FIG. 51, the process of step S203B is executed instead of the process of step S203.

In step S201, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the detection sensor 40a corresponding to the upper operation port 36 has detected the winning of the game ball, thereby determining whether the game ball has won the upper operation port 36 (start winning). determine whether When the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has won in the upper working port 36, in step S202, the number of reserved balls stored in the first result display section reserved area Ra is grasped, and the reserved number is determined. The number is set in a predetermined storage area in the first result display section reservation area Ra as the first start-up reservation storage number RaN. After that, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S205 in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has not entered the upper working hole 36, in step S203B, the detection sensor 40b corresponding to the first winning hole 51B detects the game ball It is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first winning port 51B (start winning) by determining whether or not the winning of the game has been detected.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S203B that the game ball has not entered the first winning hole 51B, it ends the winning process for the operating hole. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S203B that the game ball has won in the first winning hole 51B, in step S204, the number of reservations stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is grasped. Then, the reserved number is set in a predetermined storage area in the second result display portion reserved area Rb as the second start reserved storage number RbN. After that, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S205 in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing.
The MPU 62 executes a main process, which will be described later, which is activated when the power is turned on, and then executes a normal process, which is the main process for advancing the game. In this normal process, the MPU 62 executes steps S301 to S314. In this embodiment, the MPU 62 differs from the first embodiment in that, as shown in FIG. 52, the electrician support process of step S306B is executed in place of the electrician support process of step S306.

In step S306B, the MPU 62 executes an electric support process for driving and controlling the first bridge 512B of the first winning opening 51B. In this electric role support process, the MPU 62 executes the electric role product opening lottery based on the value of the electric role product opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64c of the RAM 64, and the electric role product opening lottery. When winning, the opening/closing process of the first prize winning opening 51B is executed. Further, the MPU 62 performs display control of the accessory display unit 46 so as to display the result of the electric accessory open lottery.

In the opening/closing process of the first winning hole 51B, the MPU 62 projects the first bridge 512B from the game board 31B to lead the game ball to the opening of the cover 511B. 0.3 sec), the first bridge 512B is immersed in the game board 31B to set a closed state in which the game ball is guided to the out port 39.
Here, as described above, the game ball that has fallen above the cover 521B or the game ball that has fallen on the upper surface of the first bridge 512B reaches the upper surface of the first bridge 512B, and then the first bridge 512B The first bridge 512B moves leftward along the slope of the upper surface of the first bridge 512B over a passage time shorter than the opening/closing time (maximum 0.2 sec in this embodiment) and is led to the opening of the cover 511B (Fig. 48 ( A)). In other words, the opening and closing time of the first bridge 512B is longer than the passing time of the game ball that moves leftward along the slope of the upper surface of the first bridge 512B and is guided to the opening of the cover 511B. One bridge 512B can reliably guide the game ball to the opening of the cover 511B.

The game board 31B has a nail 44 arranged above the cover 511B so as not to drop the game ball. Also consider the case where When the game ball falls above the cover 511B, it moves to the right along the slope of the upper surface of the cover 511B and then moves to the left along the slope of the upper surface of the first bridge 512B. It will be guided to the opening of 511B, will decelerate on the upper surface of the 1st bridge|bridging 512B, and will change the advancing direction.
Therefore, the game ball moves leftward along the slope of the upper surface of the first bridge 512B over a passage time longer than the opening and closing time of the first bridge 512B, and is guided to the opening of the cover 511B. Sometimes. In this case, the MPU 62 sinks the first bridge 512B into the game board 31B before allowing the game ball to enter the opening of the cover 511B. It will drop and be guided to the out port 39 . In other words, the first winning hole 51B is configured to drop the game ball to a position on the upper surface of the first bridge 512B without changing the direction of movement of the game ball.

<Game state transition processing>
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes steps S801 to S815. It should be noted that, in this embodiment, the MPU 62 differs from the first embodiment in that, as shown in FIG. 53, the processing of step S809 is not executed.

In step S801, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S802 onward.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, the processing from step S812 onward is executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

First, the processing (processing after step S802) when it is determined in step S801 that the MPU 62 is not in the opening/closing execution mode will be described.
In step S802, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the variable display on the main display section 45 has ended. When the MPU 62 determines in step S802 that the variable display on the main display section 45 has not ended, it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S802 that the variable display of the main display section 45 has ended, it determines in step S803 whether the success/fail result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. determine whether Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is "big win winning" or "special losing result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 sets an opening/closing execution mode flag in the RAM 64, and then executes the processing from step S804.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the win/fail result does not correspond to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (if it determines that the win/fail result is the "normal deviation result"), the game Terminate state transition processing.

In step S804, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special losing result".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S804 that the win/loss result is the "special loss result", the MPU 62 sets "2" to the open/close counter SOC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S805. This open/close counter SOC is a counter for specifying the total number of times the MPU 62 opens and closes the big winning opening 50 of the variable winning device 5B when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S804 that the win/loss result is not the "special loss result", i.e., if it determines that the win/loss result is the "jackpot winning", in step S806, the distribution result is a small-round high-probability result ("implicit small-round high-probability result" or "explicit small-round high-probability result").

When the MPU 62 determines in step S806 that the result of allocation is a small round high probability result, in step S807 the MPU 62 sets the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "2". In addition, when the MPU 62 determines in step S806 that the distribution result is not the high probability result for a small number of rounds, that is, when it determines that the distribution result is the "low probability result" or the "best result", step In S808, "15" is set in the round counter RC. This round counter RC is a counter for specifying the number of round games by the MPU 62 when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

After executing any of the processes of steps S805, S807, and S808, in step S810, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 as waiting time (waiting period) for opening. Set "1000". The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for opening is 2 seconds. The waiting time for opening is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

In this way, when the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the win/fail result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 sets the waiting time for opening to the timer counter T regardless of the type of the game result. set. In other words, the waiting time for opening is the same regardless of the type of game result.
The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to be subtly different according to the type of game result to such an extent that the player recognizes the same. In addition, for example, the waiting time for the opening is greatly different between the game result of "low probability result" or "best result" and the game result other than these. It is good also as a structure which makes it differ greatly according to the kind.

At step S811, the MPU 62 sets an opening command. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the game state transition process. This opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. The MPU 62 transmits the opening command set in step S811 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 recognizes the transition to the opening/closing execution mode based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes predetermined processing. This processing will be described later in detail.

FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process.
In the big winning opening opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1110B. In this embodiment, the MPU 62 differs from the first embodiment in that, as shown in FIG. 54, the process of step S1110B is executed instead of the processes of steps S1107 to S1109.

In step S1101, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special loss result".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the win/fail result is the "special loss result", in step S1102, the MPU 62 sets "8" to the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64, and At S1103, the timer counter T is set to "85". As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 sec.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the win/fail result is not the "special loss result", in step S1104, it sets "8" to the winning counter PC, and in step S1105, the distribution result is a small-round high-probability result ("implicit small-round high-probability result" or "explicit small-round high-probability result").

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the result of allocation is the small round high probability result, it sets the timer counter T to "85" in step S1103 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the allocation result is not the small round high probability result, it sets the timer counter T to "15000" in step S1106. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 seconds.

After executing the process of step S1103 or step S1106, the MPU 62 executes the opening execution process of the big winning opening in step S1110B. In this large winning opening execution process, the MPU 62 sets the second winning opening 52B to the open state by executing drive control of the second bridge driving section 524B. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening process.

Therefore, in the big winning opening opening/closing process (opening/closing process of the second winning opening 52B), the MPU 62 sets the second bridge 522B to project from the game board 31B and guides the game ball to the opening of the cover 521B. After that, the second bridge 522B is moved to the game board 31B when the upper limit of 8 game balls is entered into the big winning hole 50, or when a predetermined opening and closing time (30 sec in this embodiment) has passed. A closed state is set in which the game ball is immersed and led to the out port 39.例文帳に追加
Here, as described above, the game ball dropped above the cover 521B and the game ball dropped on the upper surface of the second bridge 522B reach the upper surface of the second bridge 522B. 49(A).
Specifically, the game ball dropped above the cover 521B moves rightward along the slope of the upper surface of the second bridge 522B and is guided to the opening of the cover 521B. The game ball that has fallen on the upper surface of the second bridge 522B moves leftward along the slope of the upper surface of the cover 521B, then moves rightward along the slope of the upper surface of the second bridge 522B, and moves to the cover 521B. , decelerates on the upper surface of the second bridge 522B, and changes its traveling direction. However, as described above, the MPU 62 projects the second bridge 522B from the game board 31B and sets the open state to guide the game balls to the opening of the cover 521B. A closed state in which the second bridge 522B is immersed in the game board 31B and the game ball is led to the out port 39, triggered by the winning of the port 50 or the passage of a predetermined opening/closing time (30 sec in this embodiment). , the second bridge 522B can allow the upper limit of 8 game balls to enter the big winning hole 50 before the opening and closing time of the second winning hole 52B elapses, and the game balls are covered. It can surely lead to the opening of 521B.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60, based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper operation opening 36 and the first winning opening 51B as a trigger, It functions as game state shifting means for shifting the game state to an advantageous opening/closing execution mode.
Also, the variable winning device 5B has shifted to a state in which a game ball can enter when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, each bridge 512B, 522B and each bridge driving unit 514B, 524B, the first winning opening 51B to enter the game ball into the first ball possible state, the second winning opening 52B Switching between a second ball-enterable state in which a game ball enters the first and a ball-unenterable state in which a game ball is not allowed to enter either the first winning hole 51B or the second winning hole 52B, It functions as ball entry state switching means provided between the winning opening 51B and the second winning opening 52 .

Specifically, the first bridge drive unit 514B causes the first bridge 512B to protrude with respect to the game board 31B, thereby allowing the game ball to enter the first winning opening 51B through the first bridge 512B. It is switched to the first ball entry possible state to make the ball. The second bridge drive unit 524B projects the second bridge 522B with respect to the game board 31B to enter the game ball into the second winning hole 52B via the second bridge 522B. Switching to a state where it is possible to enter the ball. Each of the bridge drive units 514B and 524B is switched to a non-enterable state by immersing the first bridge 512B and the second bridge 522B into the game board 31B.
In other words, each of the bridge drive units 514B and 524B switches the first bridge 512B and the second bridge 522B between enabled and disabled to enable the first ball-enterable state, the second ball-enterable state, and the The first bridge 512B and the second bridge 522B can both be set to be valid in the first ball-enterable state and the second ball-enterable state by switching the ball-enterable state.

In this embodiment, when setting the first winning port 51B to the open state, the main controller 60 switches to the first ball-enterable state by the ball-entering state switching means, and switches to the opening/closing execution mode. In the case of transition, when switching to the second ball-enterable state by the ball-entering state switching means and setting the first winning hole 51B to the closed state, and when not shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, The state is switched to the state where the ball cannot be entered by the ball-entering state switching means.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the effect determination process is different from that in the first embodiment. The contents of the effect determination process in this embodiment will be described below.

<Regarding effect determination processing executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect determination processing.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process in order to execute an effect for the game cycle, an effect for the opening/closing execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2101 to S2116. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55, when the MPU 92 determines that the opening command is received in step S2109, it executes the processing of steps S2110 to S2112 in the first embodiment. It differs from the first embodiment in that the process of step S2113 is executed without

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) Since the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the ball entry state switching means, when the first prize winning opening 51B is set to the open state, the ball entry state switching means is used to switch to the first ball enterable state. By switching, the game ball can be entered into the first winning hole 51B for executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters. In addition, since the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the ball entry state switching means, when the state is shifted to the specific control state, the game ball is switched to the second ball entry possible state by the ball entry state switching means. A game ball can be entered into the second prize winning opening 52B for executing the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls upon entry. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 has not transitioned to the specific control state and when the first winning hole 51B is set to the closed state, the ball-entering state switching means switches to the ball-entering disabled state. It is possible to prevent game balls from entering the first winning hole 51B and the second winning hole 52B. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can guide a game ball to a different winning hole by switching the ball-enterable state by the ball-enterable state switching means, so that the player's attention to the game can be improved. .

(2) Since the first bridge 512B is inclined downward toward the first winning port 51B, the first bridge driving section 514B moves the first bridge 512B to the game board 31B. By protruding, it is possible to switch to the first ball-enterable state in which the game ball is entered into the first winning hole 51B via the first bridge 512B. Since the second bridge 522B is inclined so as to descend toward the second winning opening 52B side, the second bridge driving section 524B causes the second bridge 522B to protrude with respect to the game board 31B. , it is possible to switch to the second enterable state in which the game ball is entered into the second winning opening 52B via the second bridge 522B. In addition, since the first prize winning port 51B and the second prize winning port 52B are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the respective bridge drive units 514B and 524B are arranged to be connected to the first bridge 512B and the second bridge 512B. By immersing the player 522B into the game board 31B, it is possible to switch to the state in which it is impossible to enter a ball. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can simplify the configuration of the ball entry state switching means. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 can diversify the movement of the game balls flowing down the game area, and can improve the attention of the players to the game.

(3) The first prize winning port 51B is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction, and the second prize winning port 52B is provided so as to open to the other side in the horizontal direction. The state switching means causes the game balls to enter the first winning hole 51B or the second winning hole 52B by allocating the game balls horizontally. Therefore, in order to switch between the first ball-enterable state, the second ball-enterable state, and the ball-enterable state, for example, compared to the case of adopting a mechanism such as an opening and closing door, the ball-entering state switching means is , the space of the game area can be effectively used for installation.

(4) Since the first bridge 512B and the second bridge 522B are provided so as to intersect, if they are provided so as not to intersect (for example, they are offset in the vertical direction) case), the ball entry state switching means can be installed by effectively utilizing the space of the game area.
(5) Since the horizontal length of the first bridge 512B is shorter than the horizontal length of the second bridge 522B, the opening time of the first winning opening 51B is the opening time of the second winning opening 52B Even if it is set shorter than , it is possible to make it easier to enter the game ball into the first winning hole 51B.
(6) The first bridge 512B and the second bridge 522B move the slits of the first bridge 512B and the slits of the second bridge 522B in the protruding direction of the first bridge 512B and the second bridge 522B. By interlocking along and intersecting, the configuration of the first bridge 512B and the second bridge 522B can be simplified.

(7) The projection width of the first bridge 512B and the second bridge 522B from the game board 31B is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball, so it is set to the same width as the diameter of the game ball. The first bridge 512B and the second bridge 522B can be quickly immersed in the game board 31B as compared with the case where the first bridge 512B and the second bridge 522B. Therefore, immediately after the first bridge 512B or the second bridge 522B is immersed in the game board 31B, each of the bridge drive units 514B and 524B moves the first bridge 512B or the second bridge 522B to the first bridge 512B or the second bridge 522B. It is possible to suppress over-winning in which the game balls guided to the winning opening 51B or the second winning opening 52B are made to enter the first winning opening 51B or the second winning opening 52B.
(8) Since the upper surface portions of the covers 511B and 521B protrude further toward the opening direction than the lower surface portions of the covers 511B and 521B, the upper surface portions of the covers 511B and 521B are projected from the lower surface portions of the covers 511B and 521B. Compared to the case where the shape does not protrude toward the opening direction side, the game ball is less likely to enter the first winning opening 51B or the second winning opening 52B by mistake.

[Fourth embodiment]
A fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 56 is a front view of a game board according to the fourth embodiment of the invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 has the variable winning device 5 , and the variable winning device 5 has the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 .
On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, the game board 31C is provided with a variable winning device 5C, and the variable winning device 5C is provided with a rotating bridge 541, which is similar to that of the first embodiment. different from

FIG. 57 is a front view of the variable winning device. Note that in FIG. 57, the vertically upward direction is defined as +Z-axis direction, and the two axes orthogonal to this Z-axis are defined as X and Y-axes. The same applies to the following drawings.
The variable winning device 5C is provided below the lower operation opening 37 as shown in FIG. This variable prize winning device 5C has a first prize winning port 51 provided on the left side of the game area and a second prize winning port 52 provided on the right side of the game area.
In addition, the player can guide the game ball to the variable prize winning device 5C by adjusting the rotational operation amount of the shooting handle 27 and adjusting the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area.
In the following description, the first winning opening 51 and the second winning opening 52 are also simply referred to as the big winning opening 50 .

Here, the game board 31C has a panel 53 provided so as to cover the front side of the variable winning device 5C. This panel 53 is transparent (or translucent) so that the variable winning device 5C can be seen from the front side.
Therefore, the player can visually recognize the variable winning device 5C from the front through the panel 53 .

FIG. 58 is a trihedral view of the variable winning device. Specifically, FIG. 58(A) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 5C seen from the top side, FIG. 58(B) is a front view of the variable winning device 5C, and FIG. , is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 5C seen from the right side.
As shown in FIG. 58, the variable winning device 5C includes a rectangular plate-like rotating bridge 541 provided between the covers 511 and 521, and a rotating bridge 541 extending along the Y-axis direction. A rotating shaft 542 whose one end is fixed at the central position in the X-axis direction, a rotating drive unit 543 connected to the central portion of the rotating shaft 542 and rotating the rotating shaft 542, and a rotating shaft 542. A forward/retreat driving portion 544 is connected to the other end and moves the rotating shaft 542 forward/backward.

The rotating bridge 541 is protrusively and retractably provided through a hole 317 having a rectangular cross section formed in the game board 31C.
The rotating shaft 542 includes a cylindrical shaft-shaped main body portion 542a, a gear 542b provided at the center of the main body portion 542a so as to be concentric with the main body portion 542a, and an end of the main body portion 542a on the -Y-axis direction side. and a disc-shaped enlarged diameter portion 542c provided in the portion.
The rotation driving portion 543 has a gear 543 a attached to the tip of the shaft of the rotation driving portion 543 . The rotary drive unit 543 rotates the shaft around the Y axis, thereby rotating the rotary bridge 541 around the Y axis via the gears 543a and 542b.

Here, the rotation drive unit 543 rotates the cover 521 from the lower end of the cover 511 to the upper end of the cover 521 by rotating the rotation bridge 541 in a horizontal state in which the rotation bridge 541 is not rotated and by rotating the rotation bridge 541 counterclockwise. and a right-handed state in which the cover 521 is tilted from the lower end of the cover 521 to the upper end of the cover 511 by rotating the rotating bridge 541 clockwise (FIG. 57). arrow).
In FIG. 58, the rotation drive unit 543 rotates the rotation bridge 541 clockwise to set the right rotation state in which the lower end of the cover 521 and the upper end of the cover 511 are tilted. .

The advancing/retreating driving portion 544 is provided at the tip of the shaft body of the advancing/retreating driving portion 544, and includes a rotation support portion 544a that supports the enlarged diameter portion 542c of the rotation shaft 542 so as to be rotatable around the Z axis. The advancing/retreating driving portion 544 advances/retreats the shaft along the Y-axis direction, thereby advancing/retreating the rotating bridge 541 along the Y-axis direction via the rotating support portion 544a and the enlarged diameter portion 542c.

Here, the advancing/retreating driving section 544 causes the rotating bridge 541 set in a horizontal state to protrude through a hole 317 formed in the game board 31C, thereby flowing down the game area between the cover 511 and the cover 521. The cover 511 and the cover 521 are formed by inserting the rotating bridge 541 set in a horizontal state through a hole 317 formed in the game board 31C in a projecting state in which a game ball can be placed on the rotating bridge 541. and an immersion state in which a game ball flowing down the game area between is not allowed to be placed on the rotating bridge 541 .
In FIG. 58, the advance/retreat drive unit 544 moves the game ball flowing down the game area between the cover 511 and the cover 521 by projecting the rotating bridge 541 through the hole 317 formed in the game board 31C. It is set in a protruding state in which it can be placed on the rotating bridge 541 .

Here, the projecting width D1 of the rotating bridge 541 from the game board 31C is set to be narrower than the interval D2 between the game board 31C and the panel 53. As shown in FIG. In other words, the projecting width D1 of the rotating bridge 541 from the game board 31C is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball.
In this embodiment, the width D1 of protrusion of the rotating bridge 541 from the game board 31C is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball, but is set to the same width as the diameter of the game ball. Alternatively, it may be set to be wider than the diameter of the game ball.

FIG. 59 is an enlarged front view showing the variable prize winning device when the rotating bridge is in a projecting state. Specifically, FIG. 59(A) is a diagram showing a variable winning device 5C in which the rotating bridge 541 set in a horizontal state is in a projecting state, and FIG. 59(B) shows the rotating bridge 541 projecting FIG. 59(C) is a view showing the variable winning device 5C set to the left rotation state after setting the state, and FIG. 5C is a diagram showing FIG.

59(A), the rotating bridge 541 is projected, and then, as shown in FIG. For example, a game ball flowing down the game area between the cover 511 and the cover 521 can be guided to the opening of the cover 511 .
Rotating drive unit 543 and forward/backward drive unit 544 are set to the right-rotating state as shown in FIG. For example, a game ball flowing down the game area between the cover 511 and the cover 521 can be guided to the opening of the cover 521 .

In addition, if the rotation driving section 543 and the advance/retreat driving section 544 are set to the immersed state after the rotation bridge 541 is placed in the horizontal state, the game ball flowing down the game area between the cover 511 and the cover 521 is moved to the out port. It can lead to 39.

Thus, the variable winning device 5C, after the rotation bridge 541 is in the protruding state, set to the left rotation state or the right rotation state to guide the game ball to the opening of the cover 511 or the opening of the cover 521 open state and a closed state in which the rotating bridge 541 is placed in a horizontal state and then set in an immersed state to guide the game ball to the out port 39 .
Then, the rotation driving section 543 and the forward/backward driving section 544 drive the rotation bridge 541 to set the big winning opening 50 to either the open state or the closed state.
In other words, the rotating bridge 541 functions as a switching guide made up of at least one member that guides the game ball to either the first winning hole 51 or the second winning hole 52 .

As described above, the width D1 of the protrusion of the rotating bridge 541 from the game board 31C is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball. Compared with the case where the swing bridge 541 is held, the swing bridge 541 can be quickly immersed in the game board 31C.
According to this, the rotation drive unit 543 and the advance/retreat drive unit 544 cover the cover 511 with the rotation bridge 541 immediately after setting the large winning opening 50 to the closed state and immediately before setting the large winning opening 50 to the closed state. It is possible to suppress over-winning in which the game ball guided to the opening of the cover 521 or the opening of the cover 521 is made to enter the first winning opening 51 or the second winning opening 52.例文帳に追加

As described above, in this embodiment, the pivot bridge 541 is provided between the first prize winning port 51 and the second prize winning port 52 and is provided so as to freely protrude from the game board 31C. In addition, after protruding from the game board 31C, the rotating bridge 541 is inclined so as to descend toward the first prize winning port 51 side to lead the game ball to the first winning port 51. A rotating state (left rotating state), and after protruding with respect to the game board 31C, the game ball is led to the second winning port 52 by tilting downward toward the second winning port 52 side. A second rotation state (right rotation state) and a horizontal state in which the game ball is held without being guided to the first winning opening 51 and the second winning opening 52 after protruding from the game board 31C. I have.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rotation driving section 543 and the advance/retreat driving section 544 cause the rotation bridge 541 to protrude from the game board 31C, and after projecting the rotation bridge 541 from the game board 31C, , and functions as a bridge driving section for rotating the rotating bridge 541 .
In other words, the rotation drive section 543 and the advance/retreat drive section 544 function as a switching induction drive section that integrally drives the rotation bridge 541 .

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 60 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 60, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a sound emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 includes a payout control device 70 for executing payout control for causing the payout device 71 to pay out game balls, and a power source/power source for executing shooting control for causing the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot game balls. and a launch control device 80, which are mounted on the back pack unit.

The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control (main control) of the game, and a power outage monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. Note that the main controller 60 includes a board box that houses the main control board 61 and the like. The substrate box may comprise marking means for marking upon its opening and may comprise marking structures for marking upon its opening. Specifically, as trace means, a circuit board box is formed by connecting a plurality of case bodies, and a connecting part (crimped part) that requires breaking of a predetermined part when separating each case body is provided, or a structure that peels off At this time, it is possible to adopt a structure in which a sealing seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off because the adhesive layer remains on the object to be adhered is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the plurality of case bodies. Also, as the trace structure, it is possible to employ a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between these case bodies.

The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61 and a ROM 63 and a RAM 64 that constitute the MPU 62 . Here, the MPU 62 is an element in which, in addition to the ROM 63 and RAM 64, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, and the like are combined into a chip.
In this embodiment, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 62, but they may be integrated into individual chips. This also applies to the MPUs of other controllers other than main controller 60 .

The ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside to hold stored information. The ROM 63 has various areas such as a win/fail table storage area 63a, a distribution table storage area 63b, and a reach table storage area 63c. These areas are described in detail later.
The RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 63, and is a volatile storage means that requires external power supply to hold the stored information. is. This RAM 64 has various areas such as a various counter area 64a, a reserved ball storage area 64b, and an electrical work reservation area 64c. These areas are described in detail later.

The MPU 62 has an input port and an output port. An input port of the MPU 62 is connected to a power failure monitor board 65 provided in the main controller 60 and a plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40f. The output port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, the payout control device 70, and the sound emission control device 90. Further, the output ports of the MPU 62 are a rotation driving section 543 for rotating the rotation bridge 541 of the variable winning device 5C, a forward/backward driving section 544 for advancing and retracting the rotation bridge 541 of the variable winning device 5C, and a main display. 45 and the character object display unit 46 .

The main control board 61 has a driver circuit. The MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric role open state, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b to open and close the electric accessory 37a. Further, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the rotation drive section 543 and the advance/retreat drive section 544 to rotate and retract the rotation bridge 541 . Also, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the main display section 45 to display the results of the internal lottery performed based on the winnings to the operation ports 36 and 37 . Further, the MPU 62 executes display control of the accessory display section 46 to display the results of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41 .

The blackout monitoring board 65 relays the main control board 61 and the power supply/launch control device 80 having a function of supplying operating power, and monitors the stable DC voltage of 24 volts output from the power supply/launch control device 80. . Therefore, the MPU 62 receives power through the blackout monitoring board 65 .
The detection sensors 40a to 40f are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the upper operation opening 36, the lower operation opening 37, various winning openings of the variable winning device 5C, the out opening 39, and each through gate 41. The MPU 62 performs prize winning determination (ball entry determination) to various prize winning ports, the out port 39, and each through gate 41 based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40a to 40f. In addition, the MPU 62 executes an internal lottery based on the winning determination for the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37 .

The payout control device 70 executes payout control to cause the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls and rental balls (game balls to be lent to players during games) based on commands (control instructions) transmitted from the main control device 60. do.

The power supply/launch control device 80 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, the power supply/launch control device 80 generates the operating power required for each of the main control board 61 and the payout control device 70 based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, and the generated operation supply power. The power/launch control device 80 includes a power failure power supply unit such as a backup capacitor. This power-off power supply unit supplies power for memory retention to the RAM 64 of the main control unit 60 even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted.

In addition, the power supply/shooting control device 80 executes shooting control for causing the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot game balls. Here, the game ball shooting mechanism 81 includes a shooting rail extending toward the guide rail 34 of the game board 31, a ball feeding device for supplying game balls stored in the upper tray 25a onto the shooting rail, and a and a solenoid that is an electric actuator that shoots the game ball supplied to the guide rail 34 toward the guide rail 34 . The power supply/launch control device 80 supplies a drive signal (launch permission signal) to the solenoid to launch the game ball when a predetermined launch condition is met.

Further, in this embodiment, the main controller 60 executes processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the game state transition process, the big winning opening opening/closing process, and the big winning opening opening process are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the game state transition process, the big winning opening opening/closing process, and the big winning opening opening process in this embodiment will be described.

<Game state transition processing>
FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes steps S801 to S815. It should be noted that, in this embodiment, the MPU 62 differs from the first embodiment in that, as shown in FIG. 61, the processing of step S809 is not executed.

In step S801, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S802 onward.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, the processing from step S812 onward is executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

First, the processing (processing after step S802) when it is determined in step S801 that the MPU 62 is not in the opening/closing execution mode will be described.
In step S802, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the variable display on the main display section 45 has ended. When the MPU 62 determines in step S802 that the variable display on the main display section 45 has not ended, it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S802 that the variable display of the main display section 45 has ended, it determines in step S803 whether the success/failure result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. determine whether Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is "big win winning" or "special losing result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 sets an opening/closing execution mode flag in the RAM 64, and then executes the processing from step S804.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the win/fail result does not correspond to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (if it determines that the win/fail result is the "normal deviation result"), the game Terminate state transition processing.

In step S804, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special losing result".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S804 that the win/loss result is the "special loss result", the MPU 62 sets "2" to the open/close counter SOC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S805. This open/close counter SOC is a counter for specifying the total number of opening and closing times of the large winning opening 50 of the variable winning device 5C in the MPU 62 when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S804 that the win/loss result is not the "special loss result", i.e., if it determines that the win/loss result is the "jackpot winning", in step S806, the distribution result is a small-round high-probability result ("implicit small-round high-probability result" or "explicit small-round high-probability result").

When the MPU 62 determines in step S806 that the result of allocation is a small round high probability result, in step S807 the MPU 62 sets the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "2". In addition, when the MPU 62 determines in step S806 that the distribution result is not the high probability result for a small number of rounds, that is, when it determines that the distribution result is the "low probability result" or the "best result", step In S808, "15" is set in the round counter RC. This round counter RC is a counter for specifying the number of round games by the MPU 62 when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

After executing any of the processes of steps S805, S807, and S808, in step S810, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 as waiting time (waiting period) for opening. Set "1000". The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for opening is 2 seconds. The waiting time for opening is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

In this way, when the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the win/fail result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 sets the waiting time for opening to the timer counter T regardless of the type of the game result. set. In other words, the waiting time for opening is the same regardless of the type of game result.
The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to be subtly different according to the type of game result to such an extent that the player recognizes the same. In addition, for example, the waiting time for the opening is greatly different between the game result of "low probability result" or "best result" and the game result other than these. It is good also as a structure which makes it differ greatly according to the kind.

At step S811, the MPU 62 sets an opening command. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the game state transition process. This opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. The MPU 62 transmits the opening command set in step S811 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 recognizes the transition to the opening/closing execution mode based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes predetermined processing. This processing will be described later in detail.

FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing process.
In the big winning opening opening/closing process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1024. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62, the MPU 62 executes the process of step S1010C instead of the process of step S1010, executes the process of step S1018C instead of the process of step S1018, and executes the process of step S1007. This differs from the first embodiment in that the processes of steps S1026C and S1027C are executed before executing the processes.

In step S1001, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the big winning opening 50 is open.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the large winning opening 50 is not open, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1002.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the big winning opening 50 is open, it executes the processing from step S1006.

First, in step S1001, the processing (processing after step S1002) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the big winning opening 50 is not open will be described.
In step S1002, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the open/close counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1002 that both the value of the opening/closing counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1002 that at least one of the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, in step S1003, the timer counter T Determines whether the value is less than or equal to "0".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1003 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", it ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1003 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", in step S1004, it executes a special winning opening opening process.
The special winning opening opening process of step S1004 will be described in detail below.

FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process.
In the big winning opening opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1114C. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 63, the MPU 62 executes step S1113C after executing the process of step S1106, and after executing the process of step S1103 or the process of step S1113C, the process of step S1114C is performed. is different from the first embodiment in that

In step S1101, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special loss result".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the win/fail result is the "special loss result", in step S1102, the MPU 62 sets "8" to the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64, and At S1103, the timer counter T is set to "85". As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 sec.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the win/fail result is not the "special loss result", in step S1104, it sets "8" to the winning counter PC, and in step S1105, the distribution result is a small-round high-probability result ("implicit small-round high-probability result" or "explicit small-round high-probability result").

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the result of allocation is the small round high probability result, it sets the timer counter T to "85" in step S1103 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the allocation result is not the small round high probability result, it sets the timer counter T to "15000" in step S1106. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 seconds.
In step S1113C, the MPU 62 executes round prize ball determination processing.

FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the round prize ball determination process.
In the round prize ball determination process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1501C to S1504C as shown in FIG.
In step S1501C, the MPU 62 executes a round prize lottery process. In this round prize ball lottery process, the MPU 62 selects whether the number of prize balls of the variable prize winning device 5C is a large number of prize balls or a small number of prize balls based on a predetermined probability (50% in this embodiment). Run.

In step S1502C, the MPU 62 determines whether or not multiple prize balls have been won in the round prize ball lottery process of step S1501C.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1502C that multiple prize balls have been won, it sets a multiple prize ball flag in the RAM 64 in step S1503C.
This multi-prize ball flag is a flag for specifying that the number of prize balls of the variable winning device 5C is a multi-prize ball.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1502C that the multi-prize ball was not won (if it is determined that the small-prize ball was won), in step S1504C, the multi-prize ball stored in the RAM 64 clear the flag.

Returning to the explanation of the special winning opening opening process, the processes after step S1114C will be explained with reference to FIG.
After executing the process of step S1103 or step S1113C, the MPU 62 executes the opening execution process of the big winning opening in step S1114C. In this process for executing the opening of the big winning hole, the MPU 62 sets the rotating bridge 541 to the projecting state by executing the drive control of the advance/retreat driving section 544 . After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening process.

The value set in the winning counter PC in step S1102 or step S1104 defines the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 50. FIG.
In addition, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1103 or step S1106 defines the upper limit duration time from when the big winning port 50 is set to the open state to when it is set to the closed state again. Therefore, the MPU 62 sets two types of upper limit duration time with different lengths by setting the timer counter T to "85" or "15000", as described above. Specifically, the MPU 62 has a long-time mode (long-term mode) in which the upper limit duration is set to 30 sec, and a short-time mode (short-term mode) in which the upper limit duration is set to 0.17 sec, which is shorter than that of the long-time mode. aspect).

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 causes the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot a game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 at a cycle of 0.6 sec. In addition, as described above, the MPU 62 sets the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls to the big winning hole 50 to eight by setting the winning counter PC to "8".
Therefore, the upper limit duration of the long time mode is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 50 and the firing period of the game balls, so the upper limit of 8 game balls is easy to win in the big winning slot 50 .
On the other hand, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is shorter than the product of the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 50 and the firing cycle of the game balls. (shorter than the period), it is difficult to let the game ball enter the big winning hole 50.例文帳に追加It should be noted that it is possible to win about one game ball into the big winning hole 50 depending on the timing.

Returning to the explanation of the big winning opening opening/closing process, the processes after step S1005 will be explained with reference to FIG.
MPU62 sets an opening command in step S1005, after performing the big winning a prize opening opening process of step S1004. In addition, the MPU 62 transmits the open command set in step S1005 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the big winning opening 50 has been set to the open state based on the open command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, the processing (processing after step S1006) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the big winning opening 50 is being opened in step S1001 will be described.
In step S1006, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less. That is, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the upper limit continuation time set in the timer counter T in step S1103 or step S1106 of the special winning opening opening process has elapsed.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", it executes the processing from step S1026C.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processing from step S1018C.

First, processing (processing after step S1026C) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0" will be described.
In step S1026C, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the timer counter T is "13000" or less. That is, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a predetermined time (4 sec in this embodiment) has elapsed after executing the opening execution process of the big winning opening and setting the rotating bridge 541 to the projecting state.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1026C that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "13000", the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1026C that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "13000" (executing the opening execution processing of the big winning opening and setting the rotating bridge 541 to the projecting state) If it is determined that 4 seconds have elapsed later), the bridge rotation process is executed in step S1027C.

FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a flowchart of bridge rotation processing.
In the bridge rotation process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1601C to S1605C as shown in FIG.
In step S1601C, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the multiple prize ball flag is set in the RAM 64 .

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1601C that the multiple ball flag is not set in the RAM 64, it executes left rotation processing in step S1602C. In this left rotation process, the MPU 62 sets the rotation bridge 541 to the left rotation state by executing the drive control of the rotation drive section 543 . In other words, the MPU 62 sets the big winning opening 50 to the open state.
In step S1603C, the MPU 62 sets a small prize ball command. After that, the MPU 62 ends the bridge rotation processing. The MPU 62 transmits the small prize ball command set in step S1603C to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the rotation bridge 541 is set to the left rotation state based on the small prize ball command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process. This processing will be described later in detail.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the multi-ball flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S1601C, the MPU 62 executes right rotation processing in step S1604C. In this right rotation process, the MPU 62 sets the rotation bridge 541 to the right rotation state by executing the drive control of the rotation driving section 543 . In other words, the MPU 62 sets the big winning opening 50 to the open state.
In step S1605C, the MPU 62 sets a multiple prize ball command. After that, the MPU 62 ends the bridge rotation processing. MPU62, in step S301 of normal processing, transmits the multi prize ball command which is set with step S1605C to sound emission control device 90.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the rotating bridge 541 is set to the right rotating state based on the multi-prize ball command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process. This processing will be described later in detail.

Returning to the description of the big winning opening opening/closing process, the processes after step S1007 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S1007, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a prize has been awarded to the special prize opening 50. It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not a prize has been awarded to the large winning opening 50 is executed based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40 c and 40 d corresponding to the large winning opening 50 .

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1007 that no prize has been awarded to the large winning opening 50, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening/closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1007 that a prize has been awarded to the large prize winning port 50, in step S1008, the value of the prize winning counter PC is updated by subtracting 1 from it.

In step S1009, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1009 that the value of the winning counter PC is not equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1009 that the value of the winning counter PC is equal to or less than "0", in step S1010C, it executes closing execution processing. In this closing execution process, the MPU 62 sets the rotation bridge 541 to the horizontal state by executing the drive control of the rotation drive unit 543 , and then executes the drive control of the advance/retreat drive unit 544 to rotate the bridge 541 . Set the bridge 541 to the immersive state. In other words, the MPU 62 sets the big winning opening 50 to the closed state.

In step S1011, the MPU 62 sets a closing command. The MPU 62 transmits the closing command set in step S1011 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the big winning opening 50 has been set to the closed state based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S1012, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special loss result".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1012 that the win/fail result is the "special loss result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1023, which will be described later.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1012 that the win/fail result is not the "special loss result", it executes the processing from step S1013 onward.
In step S1013, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter RC to update it.

In step S1014, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1014 that the value of the round counter RC is not less than "0", it sets the value of the timer counter T to "500" in step S1015. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1015 is set to the open state of the big prize winning port 50, then set to the closed state again, and set the big winning port 50 to the open state again. Defines the open standby time. In addition, in this embodiment, the release waiting time is 1 sec. This opening standby time is the same regardless of the type and progress of the opening/closing execution mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1014 that the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processing from step S1016.
In step S1016, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T to "2000" as a waiting time (waiting period) for ending. As described above, the value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the ending is 4 seconds. Note that the waiting time for the ending is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

The waiting time for the ending is the same regardless of the type of game result, like the waiting time for the opening. That is, the waiting time for this ending is the same regardless of the type of opening/closing execution mode.
The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be slightly different according to the type of game result to the extent that the player recognizes the same. In addition, for example, the waiting time for the ending is greatly different between the game result of "low probability result" or "best result" and the game result other than these. It is good also as a structure which makes it differ greatly according to the kind.

In step S1017, the MPU 62 sets an ending command. The MPU 62 transmits the ending command set in step S1017 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 recognizes the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, the processing (processing after step S1018C) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less will be described.
In step S1018C, the MPU 62 executes closing execution processing in the same manner as in step S1010C described above.
In step S1019, the MPU 62 sets a closing command as in step S1011 described above.

In step S1020, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special loss result".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1020 that the win/loss result is not the "special loss result", that is, when it determines that the win/loss result is "big win", it executes the processing from step S1021 onward.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1020 that the win/loss result is the "special loss result", the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1023 onwards.

First, the process (process after step S1021) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the win/fail result is not the "special loss result" in step S1020 will be described.
In step S1021, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter RC to update it.

In step S1022, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1022 that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes after step S1015 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1022 that the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes after step S1016 described above.

Next, processing (processing after step S1023) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1012 or step S1020 that the win/fail result is the "special losing result" will be described.
In step S1023, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the open/close counter SOC to update it.

In step S1024, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the open/close counter SOC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1024 that the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is not equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1015 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1024 that the value of the open/close counter SOC is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes after step S1016 described above.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60, based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37, the It functions as game state transition means for shifting the game state to the opening/closing execution mode.
Also, the variable winning device 5C has shifted to a state in which a game ball can enter when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the rotating bridge 541, the rotating driving unit 543, and the advance/retreat driving unit 544 cause the game ball to enter the first winning hole 51 and the second winning hole 52 to enter the game ball. A first ball entry possible state (left rotation state) in which no ball is allowed to enter, and a second entry state in which a game ball is allowed to enter the second winning opening 52 and a game ball is not allowed to enter the first winning opening 51. A ball possible state (right rotation state), a ball incapable state (immersion state) in which the game ball is not allowed to enter either the first winning hole 51 or the second winning hole 52, and a reservation to hold the game ball The state (horizontal state) is switched, and functions as ball-entering state switching means provided between the first prize winning port 51 and the second prize winning port 52 .

Specifically, the rotation drive unit 543 and the advance/retreat drive unit 544 project the rotation bridge 541 with respect to the game board 31C, and then set the rotation bridge 541 to the left rotation state. After switching to the first ball entry possible state in which the game ball is entered into the first winning hole 51 via the bridge 541, the rotation bridge 541 is protruded from the game board 31C, and then the rotation bridge 541 is moved to the right. By setting to the rotating state, it switches to the second ball entry possible state in which the game ball enters the second winning hole via the rotating bridge 541, and the rotating bridge 541 is immersed in the game board 31C. By setting the rotating bridge 541 to the horizontal state, the state is switched to the suspended state.

In the present embodiment, when the main controller 60 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, after switching to the horizontal state by the ball-entering state switching means, the main controller 60 switches to the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state. When the state is switched to the possible state and the state is not shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the ball-entering state switching means is used to switch to the state where the ball cannot be entered.
Specifically, main controller 60 switches to the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state by the ball-enterable state switching means, and then switches back to the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state. One round game is performed until the state is switched to the ball-enterable state, and when the mode is shifted to the open/close execution mode, the ball-entered state switching means switches to the holding state each time the round game is executed, and then the first input is performed. Switching to the ball-allowable state or the second ball-enterable state.

In the present embodiment, when the main controller 60 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the main controller 60 switches to the holding state by the ball-entering state switching means each time the round game is executed, and then switches to the first ball-enterable state. Although it is switched to the state or the second enterable state, it is not necessary to switch to the first enterable state or the second enterable state each time a round game is executed. For example, main controller 60 may switch to the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state each time a plurality of round games are executed.

In addition, main controller 60 performs a round winning ball determination process (ball entering possible state selection) for selecting either a small number of winning balls (first ball entering possible state) or multiple winning balls (second ball entering possible state). part), and when a small number of prize balls is selected in the round prize ball determination process, the ball state switching means switches to the first ball enterable state, and a large number of prize balls is selected in the prize ball determination process. In this case, a bridge turning process (enterable state switching unit) for switching to the second enterable state by the enterable state switching means is provided.

Here, in the round prize ball determination process, a lottery is executed to select either a small prize ball or a large prize ball based on a predetermined probability (50% in this embodiment).
It should be noted that in the present embodiment, the ball-enterable state selection unit executes a lottery to select either the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state based on a predetermined probability. Any method may be adopted as long as one of the first ball-enterable state and the second ball-enterable state is selected. For example, the ball-enterable state selection unit selects the first ball-enterable state and the second ball-enterable state according to the type and expectation of the reach display leading to the jackpot winning that triggered the transition to the open/close execution mode. You may set the lottery probability which selects either.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the effect determination process is different from that in the first embodiment. The contents of the effect determination process in this embodiment will be described below.

<Regarding effect determination processing executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect determination processing.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process in order to execute an effect for the game cycle, an effect for the open/close execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2101 to S2116. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 66, when the MPU 92 determines that the opening command is received in step S2109, it executes the processing of steps S2110 to S2112 in the first embodiment. It differs from the first embodiment in that the process of step S2113 is executed without Also, in this embodiment, the MPU 92 differs from the first embodiment in that it executes the processes of steps S2120C to S2125C before executing the process of step S2116.

After executing the process of step S2115, or when it is determined that the opening command has not been received in step S2109, the MPU 92 determines in step S2120C whether the small prize ball command transmitted from the MPU 62 has been received. determine whether
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2120C that the small prize ball command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S2123C.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2120C that the small prize ball command has been received, in step S2121C, the MPU 92 executes a small prize ball notification effect determination process. In this small prize ball notification effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines execution of the small prize ball notification effect for informing the player that the number of prize balls of the variable winning device 5C is set to a small prize ball.
Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the display lamp section 23 and the sound control of the speaker section 24 in the effect execution processing of step S2003 described above.

In step S2122C, the MPU 92 sets a small prize ball notification command including information related to the small prize ball notification effect determined in step S2121C. Then, the MPU 92 stores the small winning ball notification command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94 a of the RAM 94 . This small winning ball notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the above-described command transmission processing of step S2005.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the small prize ball notification effect in the symbol display device 47 based on the small prize ball notification command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the small prize ball notification effect.

After executing the processing of step S2122C, or when it is determined that the small prize ball command has not been received in step S2120C, the MPU 92 receives the multiple prize ball command transmitted from the MPU 62 in step S2123C. determine whether or not there is
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2123C that it has not received the multi-prize ball command, it executes the processes after step S2116.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2123C that it has received the multi-prize ball command, in step S2124C, the MPU 92 executes a process of determining the multi-principal ball notification effect. In this process of determining the multi-prize ball notification effect, the MPU 92 determines execution of the multi-prize ball notification effect for informing the player that the number of prize balls of the variable winning device 5C will be the multi-prize ball.
Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and the sound control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution processing of step S2003 described above.

In step S2125C, the MPU 92 sets a multiple prize ball notification command including information related to the multiple prize ball notification effect determined in step S2124C. Then, the MPU 92 stores the multiple prize ball notification command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94 a of the RAM 94 . This multi-prize notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the multiple prize ball notification effect in the symbol display device 47 based on the multiple prize ball notification command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes a multi-ball notification effect.

<About the flow when switching to open/close execution mode>
FIG. 67 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device and the variable winning device when the opening/closing execution mode is entered. Note that FIG. 67 shows the variable winning device 5C under the display screen G in a simplified manner.
Specifically, FIG. 67A is a diagram showing the display screen G at the time of transition to the opening/closing execution mode. FIG. 67B is a view showing the display screen G when the big winning opening opening process of step S1004 is executed. FIG. 67C is a diagram showing the display screen G when the left rotation processing of step S1602C is executed. FIG. 67D is a diagram showing the display screen G when the right rotation processing of step S1604C is executed.

When shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 stops the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 as shown in FIG. 67(A). In the example of FIG. 67, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result. The result indicates the "best result".

When the open command is received, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. 67(B), reduces the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and arranges them at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display the symbols. A character (for example, "ROUND1") indicating the number of times the round game is executed is displayed at the upper left position of the display screen G of the device 47, and the round game is started. In addition, the MPU 102 displays the characters "BIGor SMALL?" at the center of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, suggesting execution of the round prize ball lottery process.
Further, in step S1114C, the MPU 62 executes processing for executing the opening of the big winning opening, and executes drive control of the advance/retreat driving section 544, thereby setting the rotating bridge 541 to the projecting state. Thereby, the MPU 62 can place the game ball flowing down the game area between the cover 511 and the cover 521 on the rotating bridge 541 .

After that, when the small winning ball notification command is received, the MPU 102 displays the characters "SMALL" at the center position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 as shown in FIG. In the round prize ball lottery process of (1), the player is informed that he/she has not won a lot of prize balls (he has won a few prize balls).
Further, in step S1602C, the MPU 62 executes the left rotation process and controls the rotation driving section 543 to set the rotation bridge 541 to the left rotation state. Thereby, the MPU 62 can guide the game balls placed on the rotating bridge 541 and the game balls flowing down the game area between the cover 511 and the cover 521 to the opening of the cover 511 .

On the other hand, when the multi-prize notification command is received, the MPU 102 displays the characters "BIG!!" This is displayed, and the player is notified that the multiple prize balls have been won in the round prize ball lottery process of step S1501C.
Further, in step S1604C, the MPU 62 executes right rotation processing and executes drive control of the rotation drive section 543, thereby setting the rotation bridge 541 to the right rotation state. Thereby, the MPU 62 can guide the game balls placed on the rotating bridge 541 and the game balls flowing down the game area between the cover 511 and the cover 521 to the opening of the cover 521 .

Here, the MPU 62 sets the rotating bridge 541 to the projecting state, and 4 seconds have passed since the game ball flowing down the game area between the cover 511 and the cover 521 can be placed on the rotating bridge 541. Triggered by , the rotating bridge 541 is set to the left rotating state or the right rotating state.
In addition, as described above, the power supply/shooting control device 80 excites the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 at a predetermined period (0.6 sec in this embodiment) to deliver a game ball to the game ball shooting mechanism 81. I am firing.
Therefore, the MPU 62 sets the rotating bridge 541 to the projecting state, and after enabling the game ball flowing down the game area between the cover 511 and the cover 521 to be placed on the rotating bridge 541, moves the rotating bridge 541 to the left. A maximum of about six game balls can be placed on the rotating bridge 541 until the rotating state or the right rotating state is set.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) Since the variable prize winning device 5C is provided with a ball entry state switching means, when it shifts to the open/close execution mode, the first ball entry is possible after switching to a holding state by the ball entry state switching means. By switching to the state, the game ball can be entered into the first prize winning port 51 for executing the payout of the predetermined number of prize balls, and the state can be switched to the second ball enterable state by the ball entering state switching means. Thus, game balls can enter the second winning hole 52 that pays out more winning balls than the first winning hole 51.例文帳に追加In addition, when the variable winning device 5C is not in the opening/closing execution mode, the variable winning device 5C switches to the state where the ball cannot be entered by the ball entering state switching means, thereby opening the first winning port 51 and the second winning port 52. It is possible to prevent game balls from entering. Therefore, when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, the variable prize winning device 5C can change the number of prize balls by switching the ball entering possible state after switching to the holding state by the ball entering state switching means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

(2) When the main controller 60 shifts to the open/close execution mode, each time the round game is executed, the main controller 60 switches to the holding state by the ball entry state switching means, and then switches to the first ball entry possible state or the second ball entry possible state. Since the state is switched to the ball entry possible state, the player pays attention to the whereabouts of the game ball held by the ball entry state switching means each time the round game is executed, and the player's attention to the game is improved. can be made

(3) When a small prize ball is selected in the round prize ball determination process, the main controller 60 switches to the first ball-enterable state by the ball-entering state switching means, and When multiple prize balls are selected, the player pays attention to the selection result of the round prize ball determination process because the bridge rotation processing is provided for switching to the second ball enterable state by the ball entry state switching means. Therefore, it is expected that the second ball-enterable state will occur. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
(4) In the round prize ball determination process, a lottery is executed to select either the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state based on a predetermined probability. Attention will be paid to the lottery result of the ball determination process, and the second ball-enterable state will be expected. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(5) In the left-rotation state, the rotating bridge 541 protrudes from the game board 31C, and then tilts downward toward the first winning port 51 to reach the first winning port 51. Since the game ball is guided, the rotation drive unit 543 and the advance/retreat drive unit 544 set the rotation bridge 541 to the left rotation state, thereby guiding the game ball to the first winning hole 51 via the rotation bridge 541. It is possible to switch to the first ball-enterable state in which the ball is entered. In the right rotation state, the rotating bridge 541 protrudes with respect to the game board 31C, and then tilts downward toward the second winning port 52 side to deliver the game ball to the second winning port 52. Therefore, the rotation driving unit 543 and the advance/retreat driving unit 544 set the rotation bridge 541 to the right rotation state, thereby allowing the game ball to enter the second winning hole 52 via the rotation bridge 541. It is possible to switch to the second ball-enterable state. In addition, since the first prize winning port 51 and the second prize winning port 52 are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the rotation driving section 543 and the advance/retreat driving section 544 move the rotation bridge 541 into the game board. By immersing the player in 31C, it is possible to switch to the state where the ball cannot be entered. In the horizontal state, the rotating bridge 541 protrudes from the game board 31C and then retains the game ball without guiding it to the first winning opening 51 and the second winning opening 52. 543 and advance/retreat drive unit 544 can be switched to a holding state for holding the game ball by setting rotation bridge 541 in a horizontal state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can simplify the configuration of the ball entry state switching means. In addition, the rotation drive section 543 and the advance/retreat drive section 544 can prevent the path of the game ball from being obstructed when the state is switched to the non-enterable state.

(6) The first prize winning port 51 is provided to open on one side in the horizontal direction, and the second prize winning port 52 is provided to open on the other side in the horizontal direction. The state switching means causes the ball to enter the first winning hole 51 or the second winning hole 52 by distributing the game balls in the horizontal left and right direction. Therefore, in order to switch between the first ball-enterable state, the second ball-enterable state, and the ball-enterable state, for example, compared to the case of adopting a mechanism such as an opening and closing door, the ball-entering state switching means is , the space of the game area can be effectively used for installation.

(7) The projecting width D1 of the rotating bridge 541 from the game board 31C is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball. Thus, the rotating bridge 541 can be quickly immersed in the game board 31C. Therefore, the rotation drive unit 543 and the advance/retreat drive unit 544 move the first winning port 51 or the second winning port 52 at the rotating bridge 541 immediately after the rotating bridge 541 is immersed in the game board 31C. It is possible to suppress over-winning in which the game ball that has been guided to the top is made to enter the first winning port 51 or the second winning port 52.例文帳に追加
(8) Since the upper surface portions of the covers 511 and 521 protrude further toward the opening direction than the lower surface portions of the covers 511 and 521, the upper surface portions of the covers 511 and 521 protrude from the lower surface portions of the covers 511 and 521. The game ball is less likely to enter the first prize winning port 51 or the second prize winning port 52 by mistake as compared with the case where the shape does not protrude toward the opening direction side.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the rotating bridge 541 allows the game ball to fall in the projecting direction side of the rotating bridge 541 .
On the other hand, the rotating bridge 541 may be provided with a fall prevention portion that prevents the game ball from falling in the projecting direction side of the rotating bridge 541, as in the modification of the first embodiment.

According to this, since the rotation bridge 541 is provided with a fall prevention portion that prevents the game ball from falling to the projecting direction side of the rotation bridge 541, the first winning opening 51 and the second winning opening 52 A game ball can be surely entered.

In addition, in this embodiment, the ball-entering state switching means inserts the rotating bridge 541 set in the horizontal state through the hole 317 formed in the game board 31C, so that the space between the cover 511 and the cover 521 is changed. The game ball flowing down the game area is set to an immersion state in which it cannot be placed on the rotating bridge 541, and the game ball is not allowed to enter either the first prize winning port 51 or the second prize winning port 52. was in a state.

On the other hand, the ball-entering state switching means is set to the horizontal state if it is possible to set the ball-entering impossible state in which the game ball is not allowed to enter either the first winning hole 51 or the second winning hole 52. A mode other than immersing the rotating bridge 541 through the hole 317 formed in the game board 31C may be adopted.

FIG. 68 is an enlarged front view showing the variable prize winning device when the swing bridge is in a non-enterable state. Specifically, FIG. 68(A) is a diagram showing the flow path of the game ball dropped on the upper surface of the rotating bridge 541 when the rotating bridge 541 is set to the non-enterable state, and FIG. ) is a diagram showing the flow path of the game ball that has fallen above the cover 511 when the rotating bridge 541 is set to be in a non-enterable state, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the flow path of the game ball which fell above the cover 521 when it set to a state.

As shown in FIG. 68, the rotation drive section 543 can be set to the state where the ball cannot be entered by largely rotating the rotation bridge 541 . In FIG. 68, the rotation drive unit 543 sets the state in which the ball cannot be entered by largely rotating the rotation bridge 541 counterclockwise. It may be set to a state where the ball cannot be entered. In this case, the ball-entering state switching means may not include the advance/retreat driving section 544, and the game board 31C may not include the hole 317.

The game ball dropped on the upper surface of the rotating bridge 541 moves to the left along the inclination of the upper surface of the rotating bridge 541, and is guided to the out port 39, as shown in FIG. 68(A).
Also, the game ball that has fallen above the cover 511 moves to the right along the slope of the upper surface of the cover 511 and is guided to the out port 39 as shown in FIG.
Further, the game ball that has fallen above the cover 521 moves to the left along the slope of the upper surface of the cover 521 and is guided to the out port 39, as shown in FIG. 68(C).
In addition, the game ball dropped between the cover 511 and the rotating bridge 541 and between the cover 521 and the rotating bridge 541 is guided to the out port 39 as it is.

According to this, the rotation drive unit 543 rotates the rotation bridge 541 so as not to enter the game ball into either the first winning opening 51 or the second winning opening 52. Can be switched to disabled state. Therefore, the rotary drive section 543 can switch the rotary bridge 541 to the ball entry disabled state without adding a new structure such as the forward/backward drive section 544 .

Also, in the present embodiment, the ball-entering state switching means is composed of the rotary bridge 541, the rotary drive section 543, and the forward/backward drive section 544, but other structures may be employed. For example, the ball-entering state switching means may be composed of the first bridge 512, the second bridge 522, the first bridge driving section 514, and the second bridge driving section 524 in the first embodiment. good.

FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a modification of the display screen of the symbol display device and the variable winning device when the open/close execution mode is entered. It should be noted that FIG. 69 shows the variable prize winning device 5 under the display screen G in a simplified manner.
Specifically, FIG. 69(A) is a diagram showing the display screen G when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode. FIG. 69B shows the display screen G when the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 are switched to the pending state. FIG. 69(C) is a diagram showing the display screen G when the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 are switched to the first ball-enterable state. FIG. 69D shows the display screen G when the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 are switched to the second ball-enterable state.

When shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 stops the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, as shown in FIG. 69(A). In the example of FIG. 69, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result. The result indicates the "best result".

When the open command is received, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. 69(B), reduces the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and arranges them at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display the symbols. A character (for example, "ROUND1") indicating the number of times the round game is executed is displayed at the upper left position of the display screen G of the device 47, and the round game is started. In addition, the MPU 102 displays the characters "BIGorSMALL?" at the center position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, suggesting execution of the round prize ball lottery process.
Also, the first bridge drive unit 514 and the second bridge drive unit 524 switch to the holding state by projecting the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 with respect to the game board 31 . Thereby, the MPU 62 can place the game ball flowing down the game area between the cover 511 and the cover 521 on the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 .

After that, when the small winning ball notification command is received, the MPU 102 displays the characters "SMALL" at the center position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 as shown in FIG. 69(C), and step S1501C. In the round prize ball lottery process of (1), the player is informed that he/she has not won a lot of prize balls (he has won a few prize balls).
Also, the second bridge drive unit 524 switches to the first ball-enterable state by immersing the second bridge 522 into the game board 31 . Thereby, the MPU 62 guides the game balls placed on the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 and the game balls flowing down the game area between the covers 511 and 521 to the opening of the cover 511. be able to.

On the other hand, when the multi-prize notification command is received, the MPU 102 displays the characters "BIG!!" The player is notified that the multiple prize balls have been won in the round prize ball lottery process of step S1501C.
Also, the first bridge drive unit 514 switches to the second ball-enterable state by immersing the first bridge 512 into the game board 31 . Thereby, the MPU 62 guides the game balls placed on the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 and the game balls flowing down the game area between the covers 511 and 521 to the opening of the cover 521. be able to.

Thus, in this modification, each of the bridge drive units 514 and 524 protrudes the first bridge 512 with respect to the game board 31, and retracts the second bridge 522 with respect to the game board 31. , switching to the first ball-enterable state in which the game ball is entered into the first winning hole 51 via the first bridge 512, the second bridge 522 is projected from the game board 31, and the first By immersing the bridge 512 in the game board 31, the state is switched to the second ball entry possible state in which the game ball is entered into the second winning hole 52 via the second bridge 522, and the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 are immersed in the game board 31 to switch to a state in which the ball cannot be entered, and the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 are protruded from the game board 31 to hold the ball. state is switched. In other words, the ball-entering state switching means switches to a holding state for holding the game ball by setting the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 to valid.

According to this, the first bridge 512 is inclined so as to descend toward the first prize winning port 51 side, so that the first bridge driving section 514 moves the first bridge 512 to the game board 31. By protruding against it, it is possible to switch to the first ball-enterable state in which the game ball is entered into the first winning hole 51 via the first bridge 512 . Since the second bridge 522 is inclined so as to descend toward the second prize winning port 52 side, the second bridge driving section 524 causes the second bridge 522 to protrude with respect to the game board 31. , it is possible to switch to the second ball entry possible state in which the game ball is allowed to enter the second winning hole 52 via the second bridge 522 . Also, since the first prize winning port 51 and the second prize winning port 52 are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the respective bridge drive units 514 and 524 are arranged to be connected to the first bridge 512 and the second bridge. By immersing the player 522 into the game board 31, it is possible to switch to a state in which it is impossible to enter a ball. Since the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 are provided so as to intersect each other, each of the bridge driving units 514 and 524 moves the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 to the game board 31. can be switched to the pending state by protruding against the Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can simplify the configuration of the ball entry state switching means.

[Fifth embodiment]
A fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 70 is a front view of a game board according to the fifth embodiment of the invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 has the variable winning device 5 , and the variable winning device 5 has the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 .
On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 70, the game board 31D is provided with a variable winning device 5D, and the variable winning device 5D is different from the first embodiment in that it includes a movable bridge 55. different.

FIG. 71 is a front view of the variable winning device. Note that in FIG. 71, the vertically upward direction is defined as +Z-axis direction, and the two axes orthogonal to this Z-axis are defined as X and Y-axes. The same applies to the following drawings.
The variable winning device 5D is provided below the lower operation opening 37, as shown in FIG. This variable prize winning device 5D has a first prize winning port 51D provided on the left side of the game area and a second prize winning port 52D provided on the right side of the game area.
In addition, the player can guide the game ball to the variable prize winning device 5D by adjusting the rotational operation amount of the shooting handle 27 and adjusting the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area.

Here, the game board 31D has a panel 53 provided so as to cover the front side of the variable winning device 5D. This panel 53 is transparent (or translucent) so that the variable winning device 5D can be seen from the front side.
Therefore, the player can visually recognize the variable winning device 5D from the front through the panel 53. FIG.

The first prize winning opening 51D is provided in an opening 311 formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by applying a router process. This first prize winning opening 51D is provided so as to open to the right, and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped cover 511 that guides the game ball entered through this opening to the opening 311, and inside the cover 511 It is provided with the aforementioned detection sensor 40c for detecting the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of prize balls based on the detection result.
A game ball guided by the cover 511 and entered into the opening 311 is discharged from the game area through the discharge passage 311a. The game balls passing through the discharge passage 311a join the game balls discharged from the game area through the discharge passage 39a (see FIG. 5) of the out port 39.

The second prize winning opening 52D is provided in an opening 312 formed in the game area so as to pass through in the front-rear direction by applying router processing. This second winning opening 52D is provided so as to open to the left, and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped cover 521 that guides the game ball entering through this opening to the opening 312, and inside the cover 521 It is provided with the aforementioned detection sensor 40d for detecting the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number (15 in this embodiment) of prize balls based on the detection result.
A game ball guided by the cover 521 and entered into the opening 312 is discharged from the game area through the discharge passage 312a. The game balls passing through the discharge passage 312a join the game balls discharged from the game area through the discharge passage 39a (see FIG. 5) of the out port 39 in the same way as the game balls passing through the discharge passage 311a. Become.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the first winning hole 51D functions as a small winning ball winning hole for executing payout of a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of winning balls when a game ball enters, The second winning hole 52D functions as a multi-ball winning hole that pays out more prize balls (15 in this embodiment) than the first winning hole 51D when a game ball enters.
Further, in the present embodiment, the first prize winning opening 51D is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction (+X axis direction side). The second prize winning opening 52D is provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction (−X axis direction side).
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first winning opening 51D and the second winning opening 52D function as ball entry means for entering game balls flowing down the game area.

In addition, the variable winning device 5D includes a substantially triangular prism-shaped moving bridge 55 provided between the cover 511 and the cover 521. As shown in FIG.

FIG. 72 is a diagram showing the detailed configuration of the variable winning device with the moving bridge moved to the left. Specifically, FIG. 72(A) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 5D as viewed from above, and FIG. 72(B) is a front view of the variable winning device 5D. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing the detailed configuration of the variable winning device with the moving bridge moved to the right. Specifically, FIG. 73(A) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 5D as viewed from above, and FIG. 73(B) is a front view of the variable winning device 5D.

As shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, the moving bridge 55 includes a substantially triangular prism-shaped moving bridge main body 551 provided between the covers 511 and 521, and an L-shaped moving bridge main body 551 attached to the rear side of the moving bridge main body 551. and a bridge driving section 553 for driving the movable bridge main body 551 via the arm 552 .

The moving bridge main body 551 is formed in a substantially triangular prism shape as a whole. The moving bridge main body 551 has a first guide surface 551a that slopes downward from its center position toward the cover 511 side, and a second guide surface 551a that slopes downward toward the cover 521 side from its center position. 2 guide surfaces 551b.
The arm 552 is provided so as to connect the back surface of the moving bridge body 551 and the shaft of the bridge driving section 553 via an elongated hole 318 formed in the game board 31D.

The bridge drive unit 553 moves the moving bridge main body 551 along the X-axis direction by moving the shaft back and forth along the X-axis direction.
Specifically, the bridge drive unit 553 moves the moving bridge main body 551 in the −X-axis direction by advancing the shaft along the X-axis direction, as indicated by the leftward arrow in FIG. (Left movement state).
Since the moving bridge main body 551 has a first guide surface 551a that slopes downward from its central position toward the cover 511 side, moving it in the -X-axis direction allows the cover 511 and A game ball flowing down the game area between the lower operation openings 37 can be guided to the opening of the cover 511 (see downward arrow in FIG. 72(B)).

73, the bridge drive unit 553 moves the moving bridge main body 551 in the +X-axis direction by retracting the shaft along the X-axis direction (rightward movement state). ).
Since the movable bridge main body 551 has a second guide surface 551b that slopes downward from its central position toward the cover 521 side, moving it in the +X-axis direction allows the cover 521 and the lower A game ball flowing down the game area between the operation openings 37 can be guided to the opening of the cover 521 (see downward arrow in FIG. 73(B)).

In this way, the first winning opening 51D has an open state in which the moving bridge main body 551 is moved in the -X-axis direction to guide the game ball to the opening of the cover 511, and a moving bridge main body 551 in the +X-axis direction. and a closed state in which the game ball is guided to the out port 39 by moving the game ball.
Then, the bridge driving section 553 drives the moving bridge main body 551 to set the first prize winning opening 51D to either an open state or a closed state.

In addition, the second prize winning port 52D moves the moving bridge body 551 toward the +X-axis direction to guide the game ball to the opening of the cover 521, and moves the moving bridge body 551 toward the -X-axis direction. and a closed state in which the game ball is led to the out port 39.
Then, the bridge driving section 553 drives the moving bridge main body 551 to set the second prize winning opening 52D to either an open state or a closed state.

Here, as shown in FIG. 71, the bridge driving section 553 drives the moving bridge main body 551 to move the moving bridge main body 551 to the center of the cover 511 and the cover 521, thereby opening the first prize winning opening 51D and the first winning opening 51D. Both of the two winning openings 52D can be set to a closed state (central movement state).

Thus, in this embodiment, the moving bridge main body 551 functions as a bridge provided between the first winning opening 51D and the second winning opening 52D. Also, the bridge drive unit 553 moves the moving bridge main body 551 along the horizontal direction.
In other words, the moving bridge main body 551 functions as a switching guide composed of at least one member that guides the game ball to either the first winning opening 51D or the second winning opening 52D.
Also, the bridge driving section 553 functions as a switching induction driving section that integrally drives the moving bridge main body 551 .
In this embodiment, the first guide surface 551a is inclined downward toward the first winning opening 51D, and the second guiding surface 551b is inclined toward the second winning opening 52D. It slopes downwards according to

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 74 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
In the first embodiment, the output ports of the MPU 62 are the electric accessory driving section 37b that opens and closes the electric accessory 37a of the lower operating port 37, and the first bridge 512 of the variable winning device 5 that projects and retracts. 1 bridge drive unit 514, the second bridge drive unit 524 for causing the second bridge 522 of the variable prize winning device 5 to project and retract, the main display unit 45, and the character object display unit 46. .
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, the output port of the MPU 62 is an electric accessory drive unit 37b that opens and closes the electric accessory 37a of the lower operation opening 37, and the variable winning device 5D. This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that it is connected to a bridge driving section 553 that moves the bridge main body 551, the main display section 45, and the character object display section .

The main control board 61 has a driver circuit. The MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric role open state, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b to open and close the electric accessory 37a. Further, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the bridge driving section 553 to move the movable bridge main body 551 . Also, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the main display section 45 to display the results of the internal lottery performed based on the winnings to the operation ports 36 and 37 . Further, the MPU 62 executes display control of the accessory display section 46 to display the results of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41 .

Further, in this embodiment, the main controller 60 executes processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the big winning opening opening/closing process and the big winning opening opening process are different from those in the first embodiment. The details of the big winning opening opening/closing process and the big winning opening opening process in the present embodiment will be described below.

FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing process.
In the big winning opening opening/closing process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1024. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75, the MPU 62 executes the process of step S1010D instead of the process of step S1010, and executes the process of step S1018D instead of the process of step S1018. Differs from one embodiment.

In steps S1010D and S1018D, the MPU 62 executes closing execution processing. In this closing execution process, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the bridge driving section 553 to move the moving bridge main body 551 to the center of the cover 511 and the cover 521 to close the first winning opening 51D and the second winning opening. 52D are both set to the closed state.

FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process.
In the big winning opening opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1109D. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76, the MPU 62 executes the process of step S1108D instead of the process of step S1108, and executes the process of step S1109D instead of the process of step S1109. Differs from one embodiment.

In step S1108D, the MPU 62 executes processing for opening the first winning hole. In this first winning hole opening execution process, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the bridge drive unit 553 to move the moving bridge main body 551 in the -X-axis direction to the left movement state. The winning opening 51D is set in an open state.
Also, in step S1109D, the MPU 62 executes processing for opening the second winning opening. In this second winning hole opening execution process, the MPU 62 moves the moving bridge main body 551 in the +X-axis direction by executing the driving control of the bridge driving unit 553 to move the moving bridge body 551 to the right, thereby achieving the second winning. Set the mouth 52D to the open state.

Thus, in this embodiment, the moving bridge main body 551 and the bridge driving section 553 allow game balls to enter the first winning opening 51D, and prevent game balls from entering the second winning opening 52D. A ball entry possible state (left movement state) and a second ball entry possible state (right movement state) in which a game ball is allowed to enter the second winning opening 52D and a game ball is not allowed to enter the first winning opening 51D state) and a non-enterable state (central movement state) in which a game ball is not allowed to enter either the first winning hole 51D or the second winning hole 52D, and the first winning hole 51D and the second winning hole 51D It functions as a ball entry state switching means provided between the winning openings 52D.

Specifically, the bridge drive unit 553 moves the moving bridge main body 551 toward the first winning opening 51D, thereby entering the game ball into the first winning opening 51D via the first guide surface 551a. The game ball is entered into the second winning opening 52D through the second guide surface 551b by switching to the first ball entering possible state and moving the moving bridge main body 551 toward the second winning opening 52D. By switching to the second ball-enterable state, and moving the moving bridge main body 551 to the center of the first prize-winning hole 51D and the second prize-winning hole 52D, the state is switched to the ball-enterable state.

In the present embodiment, when the main controller 60 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the ball-entering state switching means switches to the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state, and the opening/closing is executed. If the mode has not been changed, the ball-entering state is switched to the ball-entering disabled state by the ball-entering state switching means.
Specifically, main controller 60 performs prize ball determination processing (ball enterable state) for selecting either a small number of prize balls (first ball enterable state) or multiple prize balls (second ball enterable state). state selection section), and when a small number of prize balls is selected in the prize ball determination process, the ball state switching means switches to the first ball enterable state, and multiple prize balls are selected in the prize ball determination process. In the case where it is, a big winning opening opening process (enterable state switching unit) for switching to the second enterable state by the enterable state switching means.

Here, the prize ball determination process executes a lottery to select either a small prize ball or a large prize ball based on a predetermined probability (50% in this embodiment).
It should be noted that in the present embodiment, the ball-enterable state selection unit executes a lottery to select either the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state based on a predetermined probability. , the first ball-enterable state and the second ball-enterable state, any method may be adopted. For example, the ball-enterable state selection unit selects the first ball-enterable state and the second ball-enterable state according to the type and expectation of the reach display leading to the jackpot winning that triggered the transition to the open/close execution mode. You can choose either one.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) Since the variable prize winning device 5D is provided with a ball entry state switching means, when it shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the ball entry state switching means switches to the first ball entry possible state, whereby a predetermined A game ball can be entered into the first winning hole 51D for executing the payout of the number of winning balls, and the first winning hole can be opened by switching to the second ball-enterable state by the ball-entering state switching means. A game ball can enter the second prize winning opening 52D that pays out more prize balls than 51D. Further, when the variable winning device 5D is not in the opening/closing execution mode, the variable winning device 5D switches to the state in which the ball cannot be entered by the ball entering state switching means, thereby opening the first winning port 51D and the second winning port 52D. It is possible to prevent game balls from entering. Therefore, when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, the variable prize winning device 5D can change the number of prize balls by switching the ball entry possible state with the ball entry state switching means. can improve the attention of

(2) Since the moving bridge main body 551 is composed of at least one member that guides the game ball to either the first winning opening 51D or the second winning opening 52D, the bridge drive unit 553 can enter the first ball. In the state and the second ball-enterable state, game balls are not led to both the first winning opening 51D and the second winning opening 52D.
(3) The first prize winning port 51D is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction, and the second prize winning port 52D is provided so as to open to the other side in the horizontal direction. The state switching means causes the game balls to enter the first winning hole 51D or the second winning hole 52D by allocating the game balls in the horizontal left and right direction. Therefore, in order to switch between the first ball-enterable state, the second ball-enterable state, and the ball-enterable state, for example, compared to the case of adopting a mechanism such as an opening and closing door, the ball-entering state switching means is , the space of the game area can be effectively used for installation.

(4) Main controller 60 switches to the first ball-enterable state by the ball-entering state switching means when a small prize-winning ball is selected in the prize-ball determination process, and the main controller 60 switches to the first ball-enterable state in the prize-ball determination process. When a ball is selected, a large winning opening opening process for switching to the second ball enterable state by the ball entering state switching means is provided, so the player pays attention to the selection result of the prize ball determination process. , and it is expected that the second ball-enterable state will occur. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
(5) The prize ball determination process executes a lottery to select either the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state based on a predetermined probability. Attention will be paid to the lottery result of the process, and the second ball-enterable state will be expected. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(6) Since the first guide surface 551a is inclined downward toward the first winning opening 51D, the bridge driving section 553 moves the moving bridge main body 551 toward the first winning opening 51D. By doing so, it is possible to switch to the first ball-enterable state in which the game ball is entered into the first winning hole 51D via the first guide surface 551a. Since the second guide surface 551b is inclined so as to descend toward the second winning opening 52D, the bridge driving section 553 moves the moving bridge body 551 toward the second winning opening 52D. , can be switched to the second ball entry possible state in which the game ball is allowed to enter the second winning hole 52D via the second guide surface 551b. In addition, since the first prize winning port 51D and the second prize winning port 52D are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge driving section 553 can move the first prize winning port 51D and the second prize winning port 52D. By moving the moving bridge main body 551 to the center of , it is possible to switch to the ball-entering impossible state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can diversify the movements of the game balls flowing down the game area, and can improve the attention of the players to the game.

(7) Since the upper surface portions of the covers 511 and 521 protrude further toward the opening direction than the lower surface portions of the covers 511 and 521, the upper surface portions of the covers 511 and 521 protrude from the lower surface portions of the covers 511 and 521. Compared to the case where the shape does not protrude toward the opening direction side, the game ball is less likely to enter the first winning opening 51D or the second winning opening 52D by mistake.

[Sixth Embodiment]
A sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 77 is a front view of a variable winning device according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. Note that in FIG. 77, the vertically upward direction is defined as +Z-axis direction, and the two axes orthogonal to this Z-axis are defined as X and Y-axes. The same applies to the following drawings.
In the fifth embodiment, the game board 31D includes the variable winning device 5D, and the variable winning device 5D includes the substantially triangular prism-shaped movable bridge 55 provided between the covers 511 and 521. FIG.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, the game board 31E includes a variable winning device 5E, and the variable winning device 5E includes a substantially semi-cylindrical moving bridge 55E provided between the cover 511 and the cover 521. It differs from the fifth embodiment in that

FIG. 78 is a diagram showing the detailed configuration of the variable winning device. Specifically, FIG. 78(A) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 5E viewed from above, and FIG. 78(B) is a front view of the variable winning device 5E.
As shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, the moving bridge 55E includes a substantially semi-cylindrical moving bridge main body 551E provided between the cover 511 and the cover 521, and an L-shaped moving bridge main body 551E attached to the rear side of the moving bridge main body 551E. shaped arm 552E, a bridge drive unit 553 that drives the moving bridge main body 551E via the arm 552E, a substantially rectangular plate-shaped first guide plate 554 provided at the upper right position of the moving bridge main body 551E, and a moving bridge. It has a substantially rectangular second guide plate 555 provided at the upper left position of the main body 551E, and a link mechanism 556 attached to the rear side of the first guide plate 554 and the second guide plate 555. .

The moving bridge main body 551E is formed in a substantially semi-cylindrical shape as a whole. The moving bridge main body 551E has an upper surface that curves and slopes downward from its central position toward the cover 511 side and the cover 521 side.
The arm 552E is provided so as to connect the rear surface of the moving bridge main body 551E and the shaft of the bridge driving section 553 via the long hole 318 formed in the game board 31E. This arm 552E has a rack gear 552E1 formed on the surface on the -Y axis direction side.
The bridge drive unit 553 moves the moving bridge main body 551E along the X-axis direction by moving the shaft back and forth along the X-axis direction.

The first guide plate 554 is protrusively and retractably provided through a hole 318a having a substantially rectangular cross section formed in the game board 31E. provided at an angle so as to descend toward the
Here, the game board 31E is provided so as to cover the first guide plate 554 around the Y-axis, and has a guide portion 31E1 that guides the first guide plate 554 along the Y-axis direction. The first guide plate 554 is guided by the guide portion 31E1 and protrudes through a hole 318a having a substantially rectangular cross section formed in the game board 31E.

The second guide plate 555 is protruded and retracted through a hole 318b having a substantially rectangular cross section formed in the game board 31E. provided at an angle so as to descend toward the
Here, the game board 31E is provided so as to cover the second guide plate 555 around the Y-axis, and has a guide portion 31E2 that guides the second guide plate 555 along the Y-axis direction. The second guide plate 555 is guided by the guide portion 31E2 and protrudes through a hole 318b having a substantially rectangular cross section formed in the game board 31E.

The link mechanism 556 includes pinion gears 556a1 to 556a3 that mesh with the rack gear 552E1 of the arm 552E, a rotary arm 556b that is fixed to the rotation shaft of the pinion gear 556a3 and rotates around the Z-axis as the pinion gear 556a3 rotates, A first arm 556c rotatably attached to the +X-axis direction end of the arm 556b and a second arm 556d rotatably attached to the −X-axis direction end of the rotary arm 556b. I have.

One end of the first arm 556c is attached to the back surface of the first guide plate 554 so as to be rotatable around the Z axis, and the other end is attached to the end of the rotary arm 556b so as to be rotatable around the Z axis. there is
One end of the second arm 556d is attached to the back surface of the second guide plate 555 so as to be rotatable around the Z axis, and the other end is attached to the end of the rotary arm 556b so as to be rotatable around the Z axis. there is

FIG. 79 is a diagram showing the detailed configuration of the variable winning device with the moving bridge moved to the left. Specifically, FIG. 79(A) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 5E viewed from above, and FIG. 79(B) is a front view of the variable winning device 5E. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing the detailed configuration of the variable winning device with the moving bridge moved to the right. Specifically, FIG. 80(A) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 5E viewed from the top side, and FIG. 80(B) is a front view of the variable winning device 5E.

As indicated by the leftward arrow in FIG. 79, the bridge drive unit 553 moves the moving bridge body 551E in the -X-axis direction by advancing the shaft along the -X-axis direction (left movement state). ).
Since the moving bridge main body 551E has an upper surface that curves and slopes downward from its central position toward the cover 511 side and the cover 521 side, moving it in the -X-axis direction , the game ball flowing down the game area between the cover 511 and the lower operation opening 37 can be guided to the opening of the cover 511 (see arrow A in FIG. 79(B)).

When the moving bridge body 551E is moved in the -X direction, the rotary arm 556b moves the first arm 556c in the +Y direction via the rack gear 552E1 of the arm 552E and the pinion gears 556a1 to 556a3. Therefore, the first guide plate 554 protrudes from the game board 31E through the hole 318a formed in the game board 31E. According to this, the game ball flowing down the game area between the cover 521 and the lower operation opening 37 can be guided to the opening of the cover 511 through the first guide plate 554 and the moving bridge main body 551E (Fig. 79 ( B) See arrow B).

80, the bridge drive unit 553 moves the moving bridge main body 551E in the +X-axis direction by advancing the shaft along the +X-axis direction (rightward movement state). ).
The moving bridge main body 551E has an upper surface that curves and slopes downward from its central position toward the cover 511 side and the cover 521 side. A game ball flowing down the game area between the cover 521 and the lower operation opening 37 can be guided to the opening of the cover 521 (see arrow A in FIG. 80(B)).

Further, when the moving bridge main body 551E is moved in the +X-axis direction, the rotating arm 556b moves the second arm 556d in the +Y-axis direction via the rack gear 552E1 of the arm 552E and the pinion gears 556a1 to 556a3. Therefore, the second guide plate 555 protrudes from the game board 31E through the hole 318b formed in the game board 31E. According to this, the game ball flowing down the game area between the cover 511 and the lower operation opening 37 can be guided to the opening of the cover 521 via the second guide plate 555 and the moving bridge main body 551E (Fig. 80 ( B) See arrow B).

In this way, the first winning opening 51D has an open state in which the moving bridge main body 551E is moved in the direction of the -X axis to guide the game ball to the opening of the cover 511, and the moving bridge main body 551E in the cover 511 and the cover 521. and a closed state (see FIG. 78) in which the game ball is guided to the out port 39 by moving it to the center.
Then, the bridge driving section 553 sets the first prize winning opening 51D to either an open state or a closed state by driving the moving bridge main body 551E.

In addition, the second winning opening 52D has an open state in which the moving bridge body 551E is moved in the +X-axis direction to guide the game ball to the opening of the cover 521, and a moving bridge body 551 in the center of the cover 511 and the cover 521. It has a closed state (see FIG. 78) in which it is moved to guide the game ball to the out port 39 .
Then, the bridge driving section 553 sets the second winning opening 52D to either the open state or the closed state by driving the moving bridge main body 551E.

Here, as shown in FIG. 78, the bridge driving section 553 drives the moving bridge main body 551E to move the moving bridge main body 551E to the center of the cover 511 and the cover 521 so that the first guide plate 554 and the second guide plate 554 move. 2 guide plates 555 can both be immersed in the game board 31E.

Thus, in this embodiment, the moving bridge main body 551E has an upper surface that curves and slopes downward from its central position toward the cover 511 side and the cover 521 side. The curved surface on the side functions as a first guide surface that slopes downward toward the first winning opening 51D, and the curved surface on the cover 521 side descends toward the second winning opening 52D. It functions as a second guide surface that is inclined so as to
In addition, in this embodiment, the ball entry state switching means includes the first guide plate 554 that guides the game ball falling toward the second guide surface to the first guide surface, and the A second guide plate 555 for guiding the falling game ball to the second guide surface is provided.

In this embodiment, the bridge driving section 553 protrudes the first guide plate 554 with respect to the game board 31E, and retracts the second guide plate 555 with respect to the game board 31E, thereby The game ball is entered into the first winning hole 51D via the guide plate 554 and the first guide surface, and the second guide plate 555 is projected from the game board 31E. At the same time, by retracting the first guide plate 554 into the game board 31E, the game ball enters the second winning hole 52D via the second guide plate 555 and the second guide surface. 2, and by immersing the first guide plate 554 and the second guide plate 555 into the game board 31E, the state is switched to the non-enterable state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the ball-entering state switching means moves the moving bridge main body 551E toward the first winning hole 51D, thereby causing the first guide plate 554 to protrude with respect to the game board 31E. The second guide plate 555 is immersed in the game board 31E, and the moving bridge main body 551E is moved to the second prize winning opening 52D side, thereby projecting the second guide plate 555 with respect to the game board 31E, A link mechanism 556 is provided for retracting the first guide plate 554 with respect to the game board 31E.

According to this embodiment, in addition to the same effects and effects as those of the fifth embodiment, the following effects and effects can be achieved.
(1) Since the first guide plate 554 guides the game ball falling toward the second guide surface to the first guide surface, the bridge driving section 553 moves the first guide plate 554 to the game board 31E. By protruding against the first guide plate 554 and the first guide surface, it is possible to switch to the first ball entry possible state in which the game ball is entered into the first winning opening 51D. Since the second guide plate 555 guides the game ball falling toward the first guide surface to the second guide surface, the bridge driving section 553 projects the second guide plate 555 with respect to the game board 31E. By doing so, it is possible to switch to the second enterable state in which the game ball is entered into the second winning opening 52D via the second guide plate 555 and the second guide surface. In addition, since the first prize winning port 51D and the second prize winning port 52D are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge driving section 553 is provided with the first guide plate 554 and the second guide plate 555. is immersed in the game board 31E, it is possible to switch to a state in which it is impossible to enter a ball. Therefore, the ball-entering state switching means can guide the game ball falling toward the second guide surface to the first guide surface via the first guide plate 554 in the first ball-enterable state. , In the second ball-enterable state, the game ball falling toward the first guide surface can be guided to the second guide surface via the second guide plate 555 .

(2) The ball-entering state switching means includes a link mechanism 556 for interlocking the first guide plate 554 and the second guide plate 555 to protrude and retract by moving the moving bridge body 551E. A power source such as an actuator or the like can be made unnecessary.

[Seventh Embodiment]
A sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 81 is a front view of a game board according to the seventh embodiment of the invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 has the variable winning device 5 , and the variable winning device 5 has the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 .
On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 81, the game board 31F is provided with a variable winning device 5F, and the variable winning device 5F is different from the first embodiment in that it includes a lift bridge 56. different.

FIG. 82 is a front view of the variable winning device. In FIG. 82, the vertically upward direction is the +Z-axis direction, and two axes perpendicular to the Z-axis are the X and Y axes. The same applies to the following drawings.
The variable winning device 5F is provided below the lower operation opening 37, as shown in FIG. This variable prize winning device 5F has a first prize winning port 51F provided on the left side of the game area and a second prize winning port 52F provided below the first prize winning port 51F.
In addition, the player can guide the game ball to the variable winning device 5F by adjusting the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 27 and adjusting the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area.

Here, the game board 31F has a panel 53 provided so as to cover the front side of the variable winning device 5F. This panel 53 is transparent (or translucent) so that the variable winning device 5F can be visually recognized from the front side.
Therefore, the player can visually recognize the variable winning device 5F from the front through the panel 53. FIG.

The first prize winning opening 51F is provided in an opening 311F formed in the game area so as to pass through in the front-rear direction by applying router processing. This first prize winning opening 51F is provided so as to open to the right, and a substantially rectangular parallelepiped cover 511F that guides the game ball entered through this opening to the opening 311F, and inside the cover 511F It is provided with the aforementioned detection sensor 40c for detecting the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of prize balls based on the detection result.
A game ball guided by the cover 511F and entered into the opening 311F is discharged from the game area through the discharge passage 311b. The game balls passing through the discharge passage 311b join the game balls discharged from the game area through the discharge passage 39a of the out port 39 (see FIG. 5).

The second winning opening 52F is provided in an opening 312F formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by applying a router process. The second winning opening 52F is provided so as to open to the right, and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped cover 521F that guides the game ball entered through this opening to the opening 312F. It is provided with the aforementioned detection sensor 40d for detecting the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number (15 in this embodiment) of prize balls based on the detection result.
A game ball guided by the cover 521F and entered into the opening 312F is discharged from the game area through the discharge passage 312b. The game balls passing through the discharge passage 312b join the game balls discharged from the game area through the discharge passage 39a (see FIG. 5) of the out port 39 in the same way as the game balls passing through the discharge passage 311b. Become.

Thus, in this embodiment, the first winning hole 51F functions as a small winning ball winning hole for executing payout of a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of winning balls when a game ball enters, The second winning hole 52F functions as a multi-ball winning hole that pays out more prize balls (15 in this embodiment) than the first winning hole 51F when a game ball enters.
Further, in the present embodiment, the first prize winning opening 51F is provided so as to open to one side in the horizontal direction (+X axis direction side). The second prize winning port 52F is provided below the first prize winning port 51F in the vertical direction, and is provided so as to open to one side in the horizontal direction (+X axis direction side).
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first winning hole 51F and the second winning hole 52F function as ball entry means for entering game balls flowing down the game area.

In addition, the variable prize winning device 5F has a lifting bridge 56 provided on the right side of the cover 511F and the cover 521F.

FIG. 83 is a front view showing the detailed configuration of the variable winning device.
As shown in FIG. 83, the lifting bridge 56 includes a substantially rectangular plate-like lifting plate 561 provided on the right side of the cover 511F, a rectangular plate-like fixing plate 562 provided on the right side of the lifting plate 561, and a lifting plate. and a bridge driver 563 for driving 561 .

The elevating plate 561 is inclined so as to descend toward the cover 511F side. The elevating plate 561 has a shaft portion 561a that supports the end on the +X-axis direction so as to be rotatable about the Y-axis. Therefore, in the state of FIG. 83, the game ball that has fallen on the upper surface of the lifting plate 561 falls along the upper surface of the lifting plate 561 from the left side of the cover 511F.
The fixed plate 562 is provided so as to be inclined downward toward the cover 511F side. In addition, the left end of the fixed plate 562 is provided so as to communicate with the right end of the lifting plate 561 . Therefore, the game ball dropped on the upper surface of the fixed plate 562 falls from the left side of the cover 511F along the upper surface of the lifting plate 561 and the upper surface of the cover 511F.
The bridge drive unit 563 has a shaft connected to the shaft portion 561a of the lift plate 561, and rotates the shaft around the Y axis to move the lift plate 561 around the Y axis via the shaft portion 561a. Rotate.

FIG. 84 is a diagram showing the detailed configuration of the variable winning device with the lift bridge rotated. Specifically, FIG. 84(A) is a front view of the variable winning device 5F in a state in which the lifting bridge 56 is lowered to the first winning opening 51F, and FIG. It is a front view of the variable prize winning device 5F in a state of being lowered to the prize winning port 52F of No. 2.

As shown in FIG. 84A, the bridge drive unit 563 rotates the shaft around the Y-axis to rotate the lift plate 561 around the Y-axis via the shaft portion 561a, thereby moving the first It is lowered to the winning opening 51F (first elevation state).
Since the lifting plate 561 is inclined so as to descend toward the lower end of the cover 511F, the game balls that have fallen on the upper surface of the lifting plate 561 and the game balls that have fallen on the upper surface of the fixed plate 562 are guided to the opening of the cover 511F. (See downward arrow in FIG. 84(A)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 84(B), the bridge driving section 563 rotates the shaft around the Y-axis to rotate the lift plate 561 around the Y-axis via the shaft 561a. 2 to the winning opening 52F (second elevation state).
Since the lifting plate 561 is inclined so as to descend toward the lower end of the cover 521F, the game balls that have fallen on the upper surface of the lifting plate 561 and the game balls that have fallen on the upper surface of the fixed plate 562 are guided to the opening of the cover 521F. (See downward arrow in FIG. 84(B)).

In this way, the first winning opening 51F has an open state in which the elevation plate 561 is lowered to the first winning opening 51F to guide the game ball to the opening of the cover 511F, and an opening state in which the elevation plate 561 is raised to release the game ball. and a closed state (see FIG. 83) leading to port 39.
Then, the bridge driving section 563 drives the lifting plate 561 to set the first prize winning opening 51F to either the open state or the closed state.

In addition, the second winning opening 52F has an open state in which the elevation plate 561 is lowered to the second winning opening 52F to guide the game ball to the opening of the cover 521F, and an opening state in which the elevation plate 561 is raised to release the game ball to the outlet 39. and a closed state (see FIG. 83) that leads to
Then, the bridge driving section 563 drives the lifting plate 561 to set the second winning opening 52F to either an open state or a closed state.

Here, as shown in FIG. 83, the bridge driving section 563 drives the elevation plate 561 to raise the elevation plate 561 to close both the first winning opening 51F and the second winning opening 52F. can be set (third up/down state).

Thus, in this embodiment, the lift bridge 56 functions as a bridge provided on one side in the horizontal direction of the first prize winning port 51F and the second prize winning port 52F. Also, the bridge drive unit 563 moves the lift bridge 56 up and down.
In other words, the lifting bridge 56 functions as a switching guide made up of at least one member that guides the game ball to either the first winning opening 51F or the second winning opening 52F.
Also, the bridge driving section 563 functions as a switching induction driving section that integrally drives the lifting bridge 56 .
And, in this embodiment, the lifting bridge 56 is tilted so as to descend toward the first winning opening 51F side, and guides the game ball to the first winning opening 51F. A second elevation state in which the game ball is led to the second winning opening 52F by tilting downward toward the winning opening 52F side, and a game ball to the first winning opening 51F and the second winning opening 52F and a third lifting state that does not lead to

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 85 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
In the first embodiment, the output ports of the MPU 62 are the electric accessory driving section 37b that opens and closes the electric accessory 37a of the lower operating port 37, and the first bridge 512 of the variable winning device 5 that projects and retracts. 1 bridge drive unit 514, the second bridge drive unit 524 for causing the second bridge 522 of the variable prize winning device 5 to project and retract, the main display unit 45, and the character object display unit 46. .
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 85, the output ports of the MPU 62 are the electric accessory driving section 37b for opening and closing the electric accessory 37a of the lower operation opening 37 and the elevation of the variable prize winning device 5F. This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that it is connected to a bridge drive section 563 that rotates a plate 561, a main display section 45, and a character object display section .

The main control board 61 has a driver circuit. The MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric role open state, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b to open and close the electric accessory 37a. Further, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the bridge driving section 563 to rotate the lifting plate 561 . Also, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the main display section 45 to display the results of the internal lottery performed based on the winnings to the operation ports 36 and 37 . Further, the MPU 62 executes display control of the accessory display section 46 to display the results of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41 .

Further, in this embodiment, the main controller 60 executes processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the big winning opening opening/closing process and the big winning opening opening process are different from those in the first embodiment. The details of the big winning opening opening/closing process and the big winning opening opening process in the present embodiment will be described below.

FIG. 86 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing process.
In the big winning opening opening/closing process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1024. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86, the MPU 62 executes the process of step S1010F instead of the process of step S1010, and executes the process of step S1018F instead of the process of step S1018. Differs from one embodiment.

In steps S1010F and S1018F, the MPU 62 executes closing execution processing. In this closing execution process, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the bridge driving section 563 to raise the lifting plate 561 and set both the first winning opening 51F and the second winning opening 52F to the closed state.

FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process.
In the big winning opening opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1109F. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, the MPU 62 executes the process of step S1108F instead of the process of step S1108, and executes the process of step S1109F instead of the process of step S1109. Differs from one embodiment.

In step S1108F, the MPU 62 executes processing for opening the first winning opening. In the opening execution processing of the first winning opening, the MPU 62 lowers the lifting plate 561 to the first winning opening 51F by executing the drive control of the bridge driving section 563, and sets the first lowered state to the first opening. The winning opening 51F of is set to an open state.
Also, in step S1109F, the MPU 62 executes processing for opening the second prize winning opening. In this second prize winning opening opening execution process, the MPU 62 lowers the lifting plate 561 to the second winning opening 52F by executing drive control of the bridge drive section 563, thereby setting the second lowered state as the second lowering state. The winning opening 52F of is set to an open state.

Thus, in this embodiment, the lifting plate 561 and the bridge drive unit 563 are the first ball entering possible state (first lifting state) for entering the game ball into the first winning hole 51F, the second A second ball entry possible state (second lifting state) in which a game ball enters the winning opening 52F, and a game ball is not allowed to enter either the first winning opening 51F or the second winning opening 52F. It functions as a ball-entering state switching means for switching between a ball-entering disabled state (third up/down state).

Specifically, the bridge drive unit 563 sets the elevating bridge 56 to the first elevating state, thereby entering the game ball into the first winning opening 51F via the elevating bridge 56. By switching to the possible state and setting the elevating bridge 56 to the second elevating state, switching to the second ball entering possible state in which the game ball enters the second winning hole 52F via the elevating bridge 56, and elevating. By setting the bridge 56 to the third up/down state, the state is switched to the non-enterable state.

In the present embodiment, when the main controller 60 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the ball-entering state switching means switches to the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state, and the opening/closing is executed. If the mode has not been changed, the ball-entering state is switched to the ball-entering disabled state by the ball-entering state switching means.
Specifically, main controller 60 performs prize ball determination processing (ball enterable state) for selecting either a small number of prize balls (first ball enterable state) or multiple prize balls (second ball enterable state). state selection section), and when a small number of prize balls is selected in the prize ball determination process, the ball state switching means switches to the first ball enterable state, and multiple prize balls are selected in the prize ball determination process. In the case where it is, a big winning opening opening process (enterable state switching unit) for switching to the second enterable state by the enterable state switching means.

Here, the prize ball determination process executes a lottery to select either a small prize ball or a large prize ball based on a predetermined probability (50% in this embodiment).
It should be noted that in the present embodiment, the ball-enterable state selection unit executes a lottery to select either the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state based on a predetermined probability. , the first ball-enterable state and the second ball-enterable state, any method may be adopted. For example, the ball-enterable state selection unit selects the first ball-enterable state and the second ball-enterable state according to the type and expectation of the reach display leading to the jackpot winning that triggered the transition to the open/close execution mode. You can choose either one.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) Since the variable prize winning device 5F is provided with a ball entry state switching means, when it shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the predetermined ball entry possible state is achieved by switching to the first ball entry possible state with the ball entry state switching means. A game ball can enter the first winning hole 51F for executing the payout of the number of winning balls, and the first winning hole is opened by switching to the second ball entering possible state by the ball entering state switching means. A game ball can enter the second prize winning opening 52F that pays out more prize balls than 51F. In addition, when the variable winning device 5F is not in the open/close execution mode, the variable winning device 5F switches to the state where the ball cannot be entered by the ball entering state switching means, thereby switching the first winning port 51F and the second winning port 52F. It is possible to prevent game balls from entering. Therefore, when shifting to the open/close execution mode, the variable winning device 5F can change the number of prize balls by switching the ball entry possible state with the ball entry state switching means. can improve the attention of

(2) Since the lifting bridge 56 is composed of at least one member that guides the game ball to either the first winning opening 51F or the second winning opening 52F, the bridge drive unit 563 is in the first ball-enterable state. And in the second ball-enterable state, the game ball is not led to both the first winning hole 51F and the second winning hole 52F.

(3) When a small prize ball is selected in the prize ball determination process, the main controller 60 switches to the first ball-enterable state by the ball-entering state switching means, When a ball is selected, a large winning opening opening process for switching to the second ball enterable state by the ball entering state switching means is provided, so the player pays attention to the selection result of the prize ball determination process. , and it is expected that the second ball-enterable state will occur. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.
(4) In the prize ball determination process, a lottery is executed to select either the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state based on a predetermined probability. Attention will be paid to the lottery result of the process, and the second ball-enterable state will be expected. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.

(5) The pachinko machine 10 is in a first ball-enterable state in which a game ball enters the first prize-winning opening 51F, and a second ball-enterable state in which a game ball enters the second prize-winning opening 52F. and a ball-entering impossible state in which the game ball is not allowed to enter either the first prize-winning port 51F or the second prize-winning port 52F. The movement of the player can be diversified, and the player's attention to the game can be improved.
(6) The first winning opening 51F and the second winning opening 52F are provided so as to open to one side in the horizontal direction. The second winning opening 52F is provided vertically below the first winning opening 51F. Therefore, since the direction of the game ball flowing down to enter the first winning hole 51F and the second winning hole 52F is the same direction, the ball entering state switching means switches between the first ball entering possible state and the second winning hole 52F. In the case of switching to the ball entry possible state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which of the first prize winning opening 51F and the second winning opening 52F the game ball will enter. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(7) In the first up/down state, the lift bridge 56 is tilted so as to descend toward the first winning opening 51F, and guides the game ball to the first winning opening 51F. , by setting the elevation bridge 56 to the first elevation state, it is possible to switch to the first ball entering possible state in which the game ball enters the first winning opening 51F via the elevation bridge 56. In the second up-and-down state, the lift bridge 56 inclines so as to descend toward the second winning opening 52F side and guides the game ball to the second winning opening 52F. By setting the bridge 56 to the second elevating state, it is possible to switch to the second enterable state in which the game ball enters the second winning opening 52F via the elevating bridge 56.例文帳に追加In addition, since the lifting bridge 56 does not guide the game balls to the first winning opening 51F and the second winning opening 52F in the third lifting state, the bridge driving section 563 moves the lifting bridge 56 to the third lifting state. By setting to , it is possible to switch to the state where it is impossible to enter the ball. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can simplify the configuration of the ball entry state switching means.

[Eighth embodiment]
An eighth embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 88 is a front view of a game board according to the eighth embodiment of the invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 has the variable winning device 5 , and the variable winning device 5 has the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 .
On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 88, the game board 31G is provided with a variable winning device 5G, and the variable winning device 5G is different from the first embodiment in that it includes an upper and lower bridge 57. different.

FIG. 89 is a front view of the variable winning device. In FIG. 89, the vertically upward direction is the +Z-axis direction, and two axes perpendicular to the Z-axis are the X and Y axes. The same applies to the following drawings.
The variable winning device 5G is provided below the lower operation opening 37 as shown in FIG. This variable prize winning device 5G has a first prize winning port 51G provided on the left side of the game area and a second prize winning port 52G provided below the first prize winning port 51G.
In addition, the player can guide the game ball to the variable prize winning device 5G by adjusting the rotation operation amount of the shooting handle 27 and adjusting the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area.

Here, the game board 31G has a panel 53 provided so as to cover the front side of the variable winning device 5G. This panel 53 is formed transparent (or translucent) so that the variable winning device 5G can be visually recognized from the front side.
Therefore, the player can visually recognize the variable prize winning device 5G from the front through the panel 53 .

The first prize winning opening 51G is provided in an opening 311G formed in the game area so as to pass through in the front-rear direction by applying a router process. The first winning opening 51G is provided so as to open to the right, and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped cover 511G that guides the game ball entered through this opening to the opening 311G. It is provided with the aforementioned detection sensor 40c for detecting the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of prize balls based on the detection result.
A game ball guided by the cover 511G and entered into the opening 311G is discharged from the game area through the discharge passage 311c. The game balls passing through the discharge passage 311c join the game balls discharged from the game area through the discharge passage 39a of the out port 39 (see FIG. 90).

The second prize winning opening 52G is provided in an opening 312G formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by applying router processing. The second winning opening 52G is provided so as to open to the right, and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped cover 521G that guides the game ball entered through this opening to the opening 312G. It is provided with the aforementioned detection sensor 40d for detecting the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number (15 in this embodiment) of prize balls based on the detection result.
A game ball guided by the cover 521G and entered into the opening 312G is discharged from the game area through the discharge passage 312c. The game balls passing through the discharge passage 312c join the game balls discharged from the game area through the discharge passage 39a (see FIG. 90) of the out port 39 in the same way as the game balls passing through the discharge passage 311c. Become.

Thus, in this embodiment, the first winning hole 51G functions as a small winning ball winning hole for executing payout of a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of winning balls when a game ball enters, The second winning hole 52G functions as a multi-ball winning hole that pays out more prize balls (15 in this embodiment) than the first winning hole 51G when a game ball enters.
In addition, in this embodiment, the first prize winning opening 51G is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction (+X axis direction side). The second winning opening 52G is provided below the first winning opening 51G in the vertical direction, and is provided so as to open to one side in the horizontal direction (+X-axis direction side).
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first winning hole 51G and the second winning hole 52G function as ball entry means for entering game balls flowing down the game area.

In the first embodiment, the upper surface portion of the cover 521 has a shape that protrudes toward the cover 511 side (opening direction side) from the lower surface portion of the cover 521 .
In contrast, the present embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the upper surface of the cover 521G does not protrude further toward the opening than the lower surface of the cover 521G.

In addition, the variable prize winning device 5G has an upper and lower bridge 57 provided on the right side of the cover 511G and the cover 521G.

FIG. 90 is a diagram showing the detailed configuration of the variable winning device. Specifically, FIG. 90(A) is a front view of the variable winning device 5G, and FIG. 90(B) is a sectional view of the variable winning device 5G viewed from the right side.
As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, the upper and lower bridges 57 are provided on the right side of the cover 521G so as to be parallel to the substantially rectangular plate-shaped upper bridge 571 provided on the right side of the cover 511G. A substantially rectangular plate-shaped lower bridge 572, a bridge drive unit 573 (see FIG. 90B) for driving the upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572, and a link attached to the rear side of the upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572. mechanism 574 (see FIG. 90(B)).

The upper bridge 571 is provided so as to be able to project through a hole 319a having a rectangular cross section formed in the game board 31G. .
Here, the game board 31G is provided so as to cover the upper bridge 571 around the Y-axis, and has a guide portion 31G1 (see FIG. 90(B)) that guides the upper bridge 571 along the Y-axis direction. . The upper bridge 571 is guided by the guide portion 31G1 and protrudes through a hole 319a having a rectangular cross section formed in the game board 31G.

The lower bridge 572 is provided so as to be able to protrude through a hole 319b having a rectangular cross section formed in the game board 31G, and is provided so as to be inclined downward toward the lower end of the cover 521G. .
Here, the game board 31G is provided so as to cover the lower bridge 572 around the Y-axis and has a guide portion 31G2 (see FIG. 90B) that guides the lower bridge 572 along the Y-axis direction. . The lower bridge 572 is guided by the guide portion 31G2 and protrudes through a hole 319b having a rectangular cross section formed in the game board 31G.

The bridge driving section 573 drives the upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572 via the link mechanism 574 by rotating the shaft around the X-axis.
The link mechanism 574 includes a rotating arm 574a that is fixed to the shaft of the bridge driving portion 573 and rotates around the X-axis as the shaft rotates, and an end portion of the rotating arm 574a on the +Z-axis direction side. and a second arm 574c rotatably attached to the -Z-axis direction end of the rotary arm 574a.

The first arm 574b has one end attached to the back surface of the upper bridge 571 so as to be rotatable about the X axis, and the other end attached to the end of the rotating arm 574a so as to be rotatable about the X axis.
The second arm 574c has one end attached to the back surface of the lower bridge 572 so as to be rotatable about the X axis, and the other end attached to the end of the rotary arm 574a so as to be rotatable about the X axis.

FIG. 91 is a diagram showing the detailed configuration of the variable winning device with the upper bridge projected. Specifically, FIG. 91(A) is a front view of the variable winning device 5G, and FIG. 91(B) is a sectional view of the variable winning device 5G viewed from the right side. FIG. 92 is a diagram showing the detailed configuration of the variable winning device with the lower bridge projected. Specifically, FIG. 92(A) is a front view of the variable winning device 5G, and FIG. 92(B) is a sectional view of the variable winning device 5G viewed from the right side.

The bridge drive unit 573 causes the upper bridge 571 to protrude from the game board 31G through a hole 319a formed in the game board 31G (upwardly) by rotating the shaft counterclockwise in the figure about the X axis. projecting state). Specifically, when the shaft body of the bridge driving unit 573 is rotated counterclockwise in the drawing about the X axis, the rotating arm 574a causes the first arm 574b to move in the +Y axis direction. Therefore, the upper bridge 571 protrudes from the game board 31G through the hole 319a formed in the game board 31G. According to this, the game ball flowing down the game areas on both the left and right sides of the lower operation opening 37 can be guided to the opening of the cover 511G (see arrows in FIG. 91(A)).

Here, the projecting width D1 of the upper bridge 571 from the game board 31G is set to be narrower than the interval D2 between the game board 31G and the panel 53. As shown in FIG. In other words, the projecting width D1 of the upper bridge 571 from the game board 31G is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball.
In addition, in this embodiment, the protrusion width D1 of the upper bridge 571 from the game board 31G is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball. It may be set so as to be wider than the diameter of the game ball.

In addition, the bridge driving section 573 causes the lower bridge 572 to protrude from the game board 31G through the hole 319b formed in the game board 31G by rotating the shaft clockwise in the drawing about the X axis ( downward projection). Specifically, when the shaft body of the bridge driving unit 573 is rotated clockwise around the X axis, the rotating arm 574a moves the second arm 574c in the +Y axis direction. Therefore, the lower bridge 572 protrudes from the game board 31G through the hole 319b formed in the game board 31G. According to this, the game ball flowing down the game areas on both the left and right sides of the lower operation opening 37 can be guided to the opening of the cover 521G (see arrows in FIG. 92(A)).

Here, the projecting width D1 of the lower bridge 572 from the game board 31G is set to be narrower than the interval D2 between the game board 31G and the panel 53. As shown in FIG. In other words, the projecting width D1 of the lower bridge 572 from the game board 31G is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball.
In this embodiment, the width D1 of protrusion of the lower bridge 572 from the game board 31G is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball. It may be set so as to be wider than the diameter of the game ball.

Thus, the first winning port 51G has an open state in which the upper bridge 571 protrudes from the game board 31G through a hole 319a formed in the game board 31G to guide the game ball to the opening of the cover 511G, and an upper bridge 571 is immersed in the game board 31G through the hole 319a formed in the game board 31G to lead the game ball to the out port 39 (see FIG. 90).
Then, the bridge driving section 573 drives the upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572 to set the first prize winning opening 51G to either the open state or the closed state.

In addition, the second winning port 52G has an open state in which the lower bridge 572 is protruded from the game board 31G through a hole 319b formed in the game board 31G to guide the game ball to the opening of the cover 521G, and an open state in which the lower bridge 572 is opened. It has a closed state (see FIG. 90) in which the game ball is immersed in the game board 31G through a hole 319b formed in the game board 31G to guide the game ball to the out port 39. FIG.
Then, the bridge driving section 573 drives the upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572 to set the second prize winning opening 52G to either the open state or the closed state.

Here, as shown in FIG. 90, the bridge driving section 573 drives the upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572 to immerse both the upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572 into the game board 31G to open the first winning hole. Both 51G and the second prize winning opening 52G can be set in a closed state (immersion state).

As described above, the width D1 of protrusion of the upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572 from the game board 31G is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball. , the upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572 can be quickly immersed in the game board 31G.
According to this, the bridge driving section 573 moves the upper bridge 571 to the opening of the cover 511G immediately after setting the first winning opening 51G to the closed state and immediately before setting the first winning opening 51G to the closed state. It is possible to suppress an over-winning that causes the guided game ball to enter the first winning port 51G.
In addition, the bridge driving section 573 guides the lower bridge 572 to the opening of the cover 521G immediately after setting the second winning opening 52G to the closed state and immediately before setting the second winning opening 52G to the closed state. It is possible to suppress the over winning that causes the game ball to enter the second winning port 52G.

Thus, in this embodiment, the upper bridge 571 is provided as a first bridge that is provided to be able to protrude from the game board 31G and that is inclined downward toward the first prize winning opening 51G. Functioning, the lower bridge 572 functions as a second bridge that is protrusively retractable with respect to the game board 31G and that slopes downward toward the second prize winning opening 52G side. In addition, the bridge driving section 573 causes the upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572 to protrude from the game board 31G.

In other words, the upper bridge 571 functions as a first derivative that guides game balls to the first winning opening 51G.
Then, the bridge drive unit 573 sets the upper bridge 571 to be effective (open state) by causing the upper bridge 571 to protrude with respect to the game board 31G, and by causing the upper bridge 571 to be immersed in the game board 31G. , the upper bridge 571 is disabled (closed).

In addition, the lower bridge 572 functions as a second derivative that guides game balls to the second winning opening 52G.
Then, the bridge drive unit 573 sets the lower bridge 572 to be effective (open state) by projecting the lower bridge 572 with respect to the game board 31G, and by causing the lower bridge 572 to be immersed in the game board 31G. , lower bridge 572 is disabled (closed).

Then, the bridge drive unit 573 switches between the first ball-enterable state, the second ball-enterable state, and the ball-enterable state by switching between valid and invalid states of the upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572. 1 and the second enterable state, both the upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572 cannot be effectively set.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 93 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
In the first embodiment, the output ports of the MPU 62 are the electric accessory driving section 37b that opens and closes the electric accessory 37a of the lower operating port 37, and the first bridge 512 of the variable winning device 5 that projects and retracts. 1 bridge drive unit 514, the second bridge drive unit 524 for causing the second bridge 522 of the variable prize winning device 5 to project and retract, the main display unit 45, and the character object display unit 46. .
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 93, the output ports of the MPU 62 are the electric accessory drive section 37b that opens and closes the electric accessory 37a of the lower operation opening 37, and the upper side of the variable winning device 5G. This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that it is connected to a bridge driving section 573 that causes the bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572 to project and retract, the main display section 45 and the character object display section 46 .

The main control board 61 has a driver circuit. The MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric role open state, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b to open and close the electric accessory 37a. Further, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the bridge driving section 573 to cause the upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572 to protrude. Also, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the main display section 45 to display the results of the internal lottery performed based on the winnings to the operation ports 36 and 37 . Further, the MPU 62 executes display control of the accessory display section 46 to display the results of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41 .

Further, in this embodiment, the main controller 60 executes processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the big winning opening opening/closing process and the big winning opening opening process are different from those in the first embodiment. The details of the big winning opening opening/closing process and the big winning opening opening process in the present embodiment will be described below.

FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing process.
In the big winning opening opening/closing process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1024. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 94, the MPU 62 executes the process of step S1010G instead of the process of step S1010, and executes the process of step S1018G instead of the process of step S1018. Differs from one embodiment.

In steps S1010G and S1018G, the MPU 62 executes closing execution processing. In this closing execution process, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the bridge driving section 573 to immerse both the upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572 into the game board 31G to open the first winning hole 51G and the second winning hole. 52G are both set to the closed state.

FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process.
In the big winning opening opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1109G. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 95, the MPU 62 executes the process of step S1108G instead of the process of step S1108, and executes the process of step S1109G instead of the process of step S1109. Differs from one embodiment.

In step S1108G, the MPU 62 executes processing for opening the first winning hole. In the opening execution processing of the first winning opening, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the bridge drive unit 573 to project the upper bridge 571 from the game board 31G and open the first winning opening 51G in an upward projecting state. Set to open state.
Also, in step S1109F, the MPU 62 executes processing for opening the second winning opening. In this second winning hole opening execution process, the MPU 62 executes the driving control of the bridge drive unit 573 to project the lower bridge 572 from the game board 31G and open the second winning hole 52G in a downward projecting state. Set to open state.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the upper bridge 571, the lower bridge 572, and the bridge drive unit 573 are the first ball entering possible state (upward projecting state) for entering the game ball into the first winning hole 51G. , a second ball-enterable state (downward protruding state) in which a game ball is entered into the second winning hole 52G, and a game ball entering both the first winning hole 51G and the second winning hole 52G. It functions as a ball-entering state switching means for switching between a ball-entering impossible state (immersion state) and a ball-entering impossible state (immersion state).

Specifically, the bridge drive unit 573 projects the upper bridge 571 with respect to the game board 31G and causes the lower bridge 572 to be immersed with respect to the game board 31G, thereby achieving the first winning through the upper bridge 571. The lower bridge is switched to the first ball-enterable state in which the game ball is entered into the mouth 51G, the lower bridge 572 is protruded with respect to the game board 31G, and the upper bridge 571 is retracted with respect to the game board 31G. Switching to the second ball-enterable state in which the game ball is entered into the second winning hole 52G via 572, and by immersing the upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572 into the game board 31G, the ball-enterable state is achieved. is switching to

In the present embodiment, when the main controller 60 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the ball-entering state switching means switches to the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state, and the opening/closing is executed. If the mode has not been changed, the ball-entering state is switched to the ball-entering disabled state by the ball-entering state switching means.
Specifically, main controller 60 performs prize ball determination processing (ball enterable state) for selecting either a small number of prize balls (first ball enterable state) or multiple prize balls (second ball enterable state). state selection section), and when a small number of prize balls is selected in the prize ball determination process, the ball state switching means switches to the first ball enterable state, and multiple prize balls are selected in the prize ball determination process. In the case where it is, a big winning opening opening process (enterable state switching unit) for switching to the second enterable state by the enterable state switching means.

Here, the prize ball determination process executes a lottery to select either a small prize ball or a large prize ball based on a predetermined probability (50% in this embodiment).
It should be noted that in the present embodiment, the ball-enterable state selection unit executes a lottery to select either the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state based on a predetermined probability. , the first ball-enterable state and the second ball-enterable state, any method may be adopted. For example, the ball-enterable state selection unit selects the first ball-enterable state and the second ball-enterable state according to the type and expectation of the reach display leading to the jackpot winning that triggered the transition to the open/close execution mode. You can choose either one.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) Since the variable prize winning device 5G is provided with a ball entry state switching means, when it shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the predetermined ball entry possible state is achieved by switching to the first ball entry possible state with the ball entry state switching means. A game ball can be entered into the first winning hole 51G for executing the payout of the number of winning balls, and the first winning hole is opened by switching to the second ball-enterable state by the ball-entering state switching means. A game ball can be entered into the second winning hole 52G that pays out more prize balls than 51G. Further, when the variable winning device 5G is not in the open/close execution mode, the variable winning device 5G switches to the state in which the ball cannot be entered by the ball-entering state switching means, so that the first winning hole 51G and the second winning hole 52G are switched. It is possible to prevent game balls from entering. Therefore, when shifting to the open/close execution mode, the variable winning device 5G can change the number of prize balls by switching the ball entry possible state with the ball entry state switching means, so that the player can enjoy the game. can improve the attention of

(2) When a small prize ball is selected in the prize ball determination process, the main controller 60 switches to the first ball-enterable state by the ball-entering state switching means, When a ball is selected, a large winning opening opening process is provided for switching to the second ball enterable state by the ball entering state switching means, so the player should pay attention to the selection result of the winning ball determination process. , and it is expected that the second ball-enterable state will occur. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
(3) In the prize ball determination process, a lottery is executed to select either the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state based on a predetermined probability. Attention will be paid to the lottery result of the process, and the second ball-enterable state will be expected. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(4) The pachinko machine 10 is in a first ball-enterable state in which a game ball enters the first prize-winning opening 51G, and a second ball-enterable state in which a game ball enters the second prize-winning opening 52G. , and a state in which the game ball is not allowed to enter either the first prize winning port 51G or the second prize winning port 52G. The movement of the player can be diversified, and the player's attention to the game can be improved.
(5) The first winning opening 51G and the second winning opening 52G are provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction. The second winning opening 52G is provided vertically below the first winning opening 51G. Therefore, since the direction of the game ball flowing down to enter the first winning hole 51G and the second winning hole 52G is the same direction, the first ball entering possible state or the second In the case of switching to the ball entry possible state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which of the first prize winning port 51G and the second prize winning port 52G the game ball will enter. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(6) Since the upper bridge 571 inclines so as to descend toward the first prize winning port 51G, the bridge driving section 573 protrudes the upper bridge 571 from the game board 31G so that the upper bridge Through 571, it is possible to switch to the first ball entry possible state in which the game ball is allowed to enter the first winning hole 51G. Since the lower bridge 572 is inclined so as to descend toward the second prize winning opening 52G, the bridge driving section 573 protrudes the lower bridge 572 with respect to the game board 31G so that the lower bridge 572 can be switched to a second ball-enterable state in which a game ball is entered into the second winning hole 52G. In addition, since the first prize winning port 51G and the second prize winning port 52G are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge driving section 573 moves the upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572 to the game board 31G. By immersing it in the ball, you can switch to the state where it is impossible to enter. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can simplify the configuration of the ball entry state switching means.

(7) Projection width D1 of the upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572 from the game board 31G is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball, so when it is set to the same width as the diameter of the game ball , the upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572 can be quickly immersed in the game board 31G. Therefore, immediately after the upper bridge 571 or the lower bridge 572 is immersed in the game board 31G, the bridge drive unit 573 moves the first winning hole 51G or the second winning hole 52G with the upper bridge 571 or the lower bridge 572. It is possible to suppress over-winning that causes the game ball that has been guided to enter the first winning port 51G or the second winning port 52G.
(8) The upper surface of the cover 511G is shaped so as to protrude further toward the opening than the lower surface of the cover 511G. As compared with the case of , it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the first winning hole 51G or the second winning hole 52G by mistake.

In addition, in this embodiment, the upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572 allow the game ball to fall to the projecting direction side of the upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572 .
On the other hand, at least one of the upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572 prevents the game ball from falling in the projection direction side of the upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572, as in the modification of the first embodiment. It may be provided with a fall prevention part to do.

According to this, at least one of the upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572 is provided with a fall prevention portion that prevents the game ball from falling to the projecting direction side of the upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572. Therefore, the first The game ball can be surely entered into at least one of the winning opening 51G and the second winning opening 52G.

[Modification of each embodiment]
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and includes modifications, improvements, etc. within the scope of achieving the object of the present invention.
(1) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 executes the opening and closing of the big winning hole 50 once per round game. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may execute the opening and closing of the big winning opening 50 a plurality of times for one round game.
(2) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets a predetermined upper limit continuous time (upper limit continuous period) after setting the large winning opening 50 to the open state, or the opening to the large winning opening 50 When the total winning number of game balls reaches a predetermined upper limit number, the big winning opening 50 is closed again. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit number may be changed according to the upper limit duration time, and the condition for closing the big winning opening 50 again is arbitrary.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10, after setting the big winning hole 50 to the open state, the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 50 is 8, which is the predetermined upper limit number. By reaching it, the big winning opening 50 is set to be closed again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set the upper limit number to any number other than eight. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set different upper limit numbers according to the distribution results. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set different upper limit numbers for each round in one open/close execution mode.

(4) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the big winning hole 50 to the open state, and then the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 50 reaches the predetermined upper limit number. The big winning opening 50 is set to be closed again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an end trigger opening that sets the big winning opening 50 to a closed state when a game ball enters, and when a predetermined time elapses, this opening is closed. It may be configured to allow the ball to enter the end opportunity.
(5) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 opens the large winning opening 50 again after a predetermined upper limit duration time (upper limit duration) elapses after setting the large winning opening 50 to the open state. It was set to closed. On the other hand, for example, after the pachinko machine 10 sets the large winning hole 50 to the open state, the large winning hole 50 is opened when a predetermined time elapses from the time when the winning to the large winning hole 50 occurs. 50 may be set to the closed state again.

(6) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the big winning hole 50 to the open state and then sets the big winning hole 50 to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, after the pachinko machine 10 sets the large winning opening 50 to the open state, the next round game may be started without setting the large winning opening 50 to the closed state again. .
(7) In each of the above-described embodiments, the upper limit duration of the short time mode is set shorter than the game ball launch cycle. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is a time equal to or longer than the firing cycle of the game ball and less than or equal to n times (n=1, 2, or 3) the firing cycle of the game ball. It may be set to time.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of open/close execution modes. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has an opening/closing execution mode in which the round game is executed twice with the upper limit duration of the short-time mode, and an opening/closing execution mode in which the round game is executed 15 times with the upper limit duration of the long-time mode. had. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may have an opening and closing execution mode different from these regarding the form of the upper limit duration time and the number of round game executions. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 can vary the degree of opening of the big winning opening 50 such as half-opening or full-opening instead of setting a plurality of types of opening/closing execution modes by varying the form of the upper limit duration time. may be configured to set a plurality of types of opening/closing execution modes. Furthermore, the form of the upper limit duration may be set so that the exact form of the upper limit duration is different, although the form appears to be the same from the player's point of view.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, the game result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode are set in advance so as to correspond one-to-one. On the other hand, for example, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode may be set by randomly selecting from a plurality of types of effects without corresponding to the game result, or may be selected from a plurality of types of effects by lottery or the like. , and the selection rate may be changed according to the game result.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, the MPU 92 is effective when the game result is one of the "special loss result", "non-explicit small round high probability result", and "explicit small round high probability result" Information relating to a special combination of symbols is determined as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the line L, and this special combination of symbols is the same regardless of the type of game result. On the other hand, the MPU 92 may randomly determine the information related to the stop result so that it is difficult for the player to grasp which game result it is.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, the MPU 62 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 for the jackpot generation lottery, and uses the jackpot type counter C2 for the jackpot type lottery when the jackpot is generated. On the other hand, when a big win occurs, the MPU 62 may use the big win random number counter C1 for the lottery of the type of the big win. In this case, the jackpot type counter C2 may not be provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM64.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of loss results, ie, the "special loss result" and the "normal loss result", and the MPU 62 stores the value of the random number that wins the jackpot. A lottery for generating a big hit is executed by comparing the success/failure table and the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b. In other words, the MPU 62 used the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 to execute the lottery for the "special losing result". On the other hand, the MPU 62 uses a new counter different from the jackpot random number counter C1 provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to execute the lottery related to the "special loss result". A lottery related to "result" may be executed.

(13) In each of the above-described embodiments, under the game state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, the value of the random number that becomes the "special loss result" is two, and the occurrence of the big win. Under the game state in which the success/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to in the lottery of (1), the value of the random number that becomes the "special loss result" is one. In other words, the probability of a "special failure result" is set to be higher in the low-probability mode than in the high-probability mode. On the other hand, the probability of becoming a "special outlier result" may be set lower in the low probability mode than in the high probability mode, and set to be the same in the low probability mode and the high probability mode. may have been Also, the probability of the "special failure result" may be set to 0 in at least one of the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode.

(14) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 creates advantageous game states and disadvantageous game states for the player by setting the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode. By setting the states, the player may create favorable and unfavorable playing states. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create an advantageous game state and a disadvantageous game state for the player by varying the number of game rounds for continuing the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create an advantageous game state and a disadvantageous game state for the player depending on whether or not to shift to the high frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create advantageous and unfavorable game states for the player by varying the number of game rounds in which the high-probability mode is continued after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. .

(15) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 stores the reservation information related to the upper operation opening 36 in the first result display section reservation area Ra, and stores the reservation information related to the lower operation opening 37 and the first winning opening 51B. By storing the information in the reservation area Rb for the second result display section, the reservation information concerning the upper operation opening 36 and the reservation information concerning the lower operation opening 37 and the first winning opening 51B are separately stored. . On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may store together the pending information related to the upper working hole 36 and the pending information related to the lower working hole 37 and the first winning hole 51B.
(16) In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 62 preferentially holds information related to the lower operation opening 37 and the first winning opening 51B regardless of whether or not there is information concerning the reservation of the upper operation opening 36. It was set for digestion. On the other hand, the MPU 62 sets the reservation information related to the upper operation port 36 and the reservation information related to the lower operation port 37 and the first prize winning port 51B for completion of the game cycle in the winning order of the respective reservation information. You may

(17) In each of the above embodiments, the main controller 60 transmits a command to the audio light emission control device 90, and the audio light emission control device 90 transmits a command as a result of analyzing the command to the display control device 100. The control of the display control device 100 was executed by. In response to this, the main control device 60 transmits a command to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 transmits a command as a result of analyzing the command to the sound emission control device 90, thereby performing sound emission control. Control of device 90 may be performed. The commands sent from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 90 and the commands sent from the sound emission control device 90 to the display control device 100 are not limited to the commands described in the above embodiments, and are arbitrary. .
(18) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 includes the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100 as separate control devices. On the other hand, for example, the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 may be provided as the same control device, and at least one of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 is the main control device. It may be provided as the same control device as the control device 60 .

(19) In each of the above-described embodiments, the symbol display device 47 displays the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 based on the winning in the upper operating port 36, the lower operating port 37, or the first winning port 51B. By starting the variable display of symbols so as to periodically scroll in the direction, an effect for a game cycle is executed on the display screen G. - 特許庁On the other hand, the effects for game rounds are not limited to the effects described in the above embodiments, and are optional. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute an effect for a game cycle by operating a combination of movable decorative members provided on the game boards 31 to 31G and the symbol display device 47 . Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute an effect for a game round by operating the light-emitting means provided on the game boards 31 to 31G and the symbol display device 47 in combination. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute a game round effect by combining these decorative members and light emitting means with the pattern display device 47 to operate.

(20) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 executes an internal lottery (win/fail lottery and distribution lottery) based on winnings to the upper working port 36, the lower working port 37, or the first winning port 51B. After that, the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47 execute the variable display, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the winning to the upper working port 36, the lower working port 37, or the first winning port 51B. It displayed the results of an internal lottery conducted based on On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 and the pattern display device 47 start the variable display before executing the internal lottery, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed after the start of the variable display may display the results of In this case, after starting the variable display, before stopping the variable display, an internal lottery may be executed and the stop result and the like may be set.

(21) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the main display unit 45, and the main display unit 45 executes the variable display of the pattern and displays the result of the internal lottery as a result of stopping the variable display. Was. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 may display the same stop result as the stop result of the variable display regardless of the result of the internal lottery. The result of the lottery may be made unidentifiable. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 does not have to include the main display section 45 .

(22) In each of the above-described embodiments, the symbol display device 47 displays the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 based on the winning of the upper operating port 36, the lower operating port 37, or the first winning port 51B. By starting the variable display of symbols so as to periodically scroll in the direction, an effect for a game cycle is executed on the display screen G. - 特許庁On the other hand, the symbol display device 47 may execute an effect for a game round on the display screen G by displaying a symbol (design) that indicates the result of the internal lottery.

For example, the pattern display device 47 displays a predetermined area in at least one of an area narrower than the area for displaying the patterns of each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 and a peripheral area of the area for displaying the patterns of each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3. When the variable display of the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped, a symbol indicating the result of the internal lottery may be displayed in the predetermined area. The symbols to be displayed in the predetermined area may be variably displayed or may not be displayed during the variably displayed symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

Here, the pattern displayed in the predetermined area may employ letters, colors, or patterns that are difficult for the player to distinguish, or may employ a combination of these. In addition, even if characters, colors, and patterns that are difficult for the player to identify are not used, mutually similar patterns or combinations thereof may be used to make it difficult for the player to identify. According to this, the administrator of the game parlor, for example, looks at the pattern display device 47 without looking at the main display section 45 at the end of the game round, in the same way as in the case of winning a big win lottery. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not a fraudulent act is being performed to cause the pachinko machine 10 to perform the behavior of .

(23) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 was configured to operate independently, but it may be configured to transmit and receive information by linking with an external device such as a mobile phone. . For example, a game machine is configured so that an optical code can be output by a player operating a button or the like provided on the game machine, and information on the optical code is transmitted to a camera provided on a mobile phone or the like. The game machine may be configured so that the information of the game machine can be transmitted to the web server by capturing and reading the image at the , and accessing the website. In addition, the gaming machine is configured so that the information of the web server can be received by the player accessing the website and entering the password issued by operating the button etc. provided on the gaming machine into the gaming machine. You may

(24) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has been exemplified and explained as the gaming machine of the present invention. On the other hand, the gaming machine of the present invention may be a pachinko machine of another type different from the pachinko machine 10. For example, the gaming machine of the present invention may be configured such that when a game ball enters a specific area, It may be a pachinko machine that opens an electric accessory a predetermined number of times, or a pachinko machine that generates a jackpot right when a game ball enters a specific area. Also, the gaming machine of the present invention may be an arrangement ball machine or other types of gaming machines such as majang ball machines.

[Group of Inventions Extracted from Each Embodiment]
The features of the group of inventions extracted from the above embodiments will be described below. Among the features of the group of inventions, the corresponding configurations in each of the above-described embodiments are shown in parentheses, but the features of the group of inventions are not limited to the above-described embodiments, and the features of the group of inventions Modifications, improvements, etc., and combinations of features within the range that can achieve the purpose are included in the features of the present invention group.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Based on the starting ball entry means (upper operation opening 36 and lower operation opening 37) to be executed and the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means as a trigger, it is advantageous for the player. A game state transition means (main controller 60) that shifts the game state to a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode), and a variable winning device that shifts to a state where game balls can enter when the specific control state is changed A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising a variable winning device 5),
The variable winning device is
a small winning ball winning opening (first winning openings 51, 51D, 51F, 51G) for executing a payout of a predetermined number of winning balls when a game ball enters;
a multiple winning ball winning opening (second winning openings 52, 52D, 52F, 52G) for executing the payout of a larger number of winning balls than the small winning winning opening when a game ball enters;
A first ball entry possible state in which game balls are not allowed to enter the multi-prize ball winning opening while game balls are allowed to enter the small-prize ball winning opening, and game balls are allowed to enter the multi-prize ball winning opening. In addition, a second ball entry possible state in which the game ball is not allowed to enter the small prize ball winning opening, and a ball entry impossible state in which the game ball is not allowed to enter either the small prize ball winning opening or the multiple winning ball winning opening. and a ball entry state switching means for switching between the state and
The game state transition means switches to the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state by the ball-entering state switching means when the state is changed to the specific control state, and the state is changed to the specific control state. , the game machine is characterized in that, when the state has not shifted to the state where the ball cannot be entered, the state is switched to the state where the ball cannot be entered by the state switching means.

According to feature A1 of the present invention group, since the variable winning device includes the ball entering state switching means, when the state is shifted to the specific control state, the first ball entering possible state is established by the entering ball state switching means. By switching to , the game ball can be entered into the small winning ball winning opening for executing the payout of a predetermined number of winning balls, and by switching to the second ball entering possible state by the ball entering state switching means, A game ball can be made to enter a multi-prize ball winning hole that pays out a larger number of prize balls than a small-prize ball winning hole. In addition, when the variable winning device does not shift to the specific control state, the ball-entering state switching means switches the ball-entering state to a non-enterable state, thereby allowing the game balls to enter the small-ball winning port and the multi-ball winning port. You can prevent it from entering the ball. Therefore, when the variable prize winning device shifts to the specific control state, the number of prize balls can be changed by switching the ball entering possible state with the ball entering state switching means. Attention can be improved.

Feature A2.
In the gaming machine described in feature A1 of the invention group,
The game state transition means is
a ball-enterable state selection unit (prize ball determination process) that selects either the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state;
When the first ball entry possible state is selected by the ball entry possible state selection unit, the ball entry possible state switching means switches to the first ball entry possible state, and the ball entry possible state selection unit selects the first ball entry possible state. when the second ball-enterable state is selected, the ball-enterable state switching unit (large winning opening opening process) for switching to the second ball-enterable state by the ball-enterable state switching means A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature A2 of the present invention group, when the game state transition means selects the first possible ball entry state by the ball entry possible state selection unit, the first ball entry state is selected by the ball entry state switching means. When the ball entering possible state is switched to the entering possible state and the second entering possible state is selected by the entering possible state selecting unit, the entering possible state switching unit for switching to the second entering possible state by the entering possible state switching means is provided. Since it is provided, the player pays attention to the selection result of the ball-enterable state selection section and expects the second ball-enterable state to occur. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A3.
In the gaming machine described in feature A2 of the invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the ball-enterable state selection unit executes a lottery to select either the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state based on a predetermined probability. .

According to feature A3 of the group of inventions, the ball-enterable state selection unit executes a lottery to select either the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state based on a predetermined probability. Therefore, the player pays attention to the lottery result of the ball-enterable state selection unit, and expects the second ball-enterable state to occur. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A4.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3 of the present invention group,
The variable winning device is
The small prize winning opening provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction;
The multi-ball winning opening provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction,
The ball entering state switching means is
A first bridge (first bridge 512) that is provided so as to be protruding and retractable with respect to the game board and that is inclined so as to descend toward the small winning ball winning opening side;
A second bridge (second bridge 522) that is provided so as to be able to protrude from the game board and that is inclined so as to descend toward the multi-ball winning opening side;
A bridge drive unit (first bridge drive unit 514 and second bridge drive unit 524) that causes the first bridge and the second bridge to project and sink into the game board,
The bridge drive unit protrudes the first bridge with respect to the game board and sinks the second bridge with respect to the game board, thereby causing the small prize through the first bridge. Switching to the first ball entry possible state in which the game ball is entered into the ball winning opening, the second bridge is projected with respect to the game board, and the first bridge is immersed with respect to the game board. by switching to the second ball entry possible state in which game balls are entered into the multi-ball winning opening via the second bridge, and the first bridge and the second bridge are switched to the game A game machine characterized by switching to the ball-entering impossible state by immersing the player in the board.

According to feature A4 of the present invention group, the first bridge is inclined so as to descend toward the small-ball winning opening side, so that the bridge drive unit protrudes the first bridge with respect to the game board. By doing so, it is possible to switch to the first ball-enterable state in which the game ball is entered into the small prize-winning hole via the first bridge. Since the second bridge inclines so as to descend toward the multi-ball winning opening side, the bridge drive unit protrudes the second bridge with respect to the game board to can be switched to a second ball-enterable state in which game balls are entered into the multi-ball winning opening. In addition, since the small ball winning opening and the multiple winning ball winning opening are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge driving section immerses the first bridge and the second bridge with respect to the game board. By doing so, you can switch to the state where you cannot enter the ball. Therefore, the gaming machine can simplify the configuration of the ball entering state switching means.
In addition, the small winning ball winning opening is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction, and the multiple winning ball winning opening is provided so as to open to the other side in the horizontal direction. By distributing the game balls in the horizontal left and right direction, the balls are made to enter the small winning ball winning opening or the multiple winning ball winning opening. Therefore, in order to switch between the first ball-enterable state, the second ball-enterable state, and the ball-enterable state, for example, compared to the case of adopting a mechanism such as an opening and closing door, the ball-entering state switching means is , the space of the game area can be effectively used for installation.

Feature A5.
In the gaming machine described in feature A4 of the invention group,
A gaming machine, wherein the first bridge and the second bridge are provided so as to cross each other.

According to feature A5 of the group of inventions, the first bridge and the second bridge are provided so as to cross each other. As compared with the case where the game area is provided, the ball-entering state switching means can be installed by effectively utilizing the space of the game area.

Feature A6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3 of the present invention group,
The variable winning device is
The small prize winning opening provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction;
The multi-ball winning opening provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction,
The ball entering state switching means is
a bridge (moving bridge main body 551) provided between the small-ball winning opening and the multi-ball winning opening;
A bridge drive unit (bridge drive unit 553) for moving the bridge along the horizontal direction,
The bridge is
A first guide surface (first guide surface 551a) that slopes downward toward the small winning ball winning opening side;
A second guide surface (second guide surface 551b) that slopes downward toward the multi-ball winning opening side,
The bridge drive unit moves the bridge to the small ball winning hole side to enter the game ball into the small ball winning hole via the first guide surface. By switching to the enabled state and moving the bridge to the multiple ball winning opening side, the second ball entering possibility is made to enter the game ball into the multiple winning ball winning opening via the second guide surface. state, and by moving the bridge to the center of the small-ball winning opening and the multi-ball winning opening, the game machine is switched to the ball-unable-to-enter state.

According to feature A6 of the invention group, since the first guide surface is inclined so as to descend toward the small-ball winning opening side, the bridge drive unit moves the bridge toward the small-ball winning opening side. By doing so, it is possible to switch to the first ball-enterable state in which the game ball is entered into the small ball winning hole via the first guide surface. Since the second guide surface is inclined so as to descend toward the multiple-ball winning opening side, the bridge driving section moves the bridge toward the multiple-ball winning opening side to move the second guide surface. It is possible to switch to the second ball entry possible state in which the game ball is entered into the multi-ball winning hole through the game ball. Further, since the small-ball winning opening and the multi-ball winning opening are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge driving section places the bridge in the center of the small-ball winning opening and the multi-ball winning opening. By moving it, it is possible to switch to the state where it is impossible to enter the ball. Therefore, the gaming machine can simplify the configuration of the ball entering state switching means.
In addition, the small winning ball winning opening is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction, and the multiple winning ball winning opening is provided so as to open to the other side in the horizontal direction. By distributing the game balls in the horizontal left and right direction, the balls are made to enter the small winning ball winning opening or the multiple winning ball winning opening. Therefore, in order to switch between the first ball-enterable state, the second ball-enterable state, and the ball-enterable state, for example, compared to the case of adopting a mechanism such as an opening and closing door, the ball-entering state switching means is , the space of the game area can be effectively used for installation.

Feature A7.
In the gaming machine described in feature A6 of the invention group,
The ball entering state switching means is
a first guide plate (first guide plate 554) that guides the game ball falling toward the second guide surface to the first guide surface;
A second guide plate (second guide plate 555) that guides the game ball falling toward the first guide surface to the second guide surface,
The bridge drive unit protrudes the first guide plate with respect to the game board and retracts the second guide plate with respect to the game board, thereby moving the first guide plate and the second guide plate. Switching to the first ball entry possible state in which a game ball is entered into the small prize winning opening via the guide surface 1, and protruding the second guide plate with respect to the game board, By immersing the first guide plate into the game board, the second entrance for entering the game ball into the multi-prize winning hole via the second guide plate and the second guide surface. A game machine characterized by switching to a state in which a ball can be entered, and by causing the first guide plate and the second guide plate to sink into the game board, thereby switching to the state in which a ball cannot be entered.

According to feature A7 of the group of inventions, the first guide plate guides the game ball falling toward the second guide surface to the first guide surface, so that the bridge drive section guides the first guide plate to the first guide surface. By protruding from the game board, it is possible to switch to the first ball entry possible state in which the game ball is allowed to enter the small winning ball winning opening via the first guide plate and the first guide surface. Since the second guide plate guides the game ball falling toward the first guide surface to the second guide surface, the bridge driving section protrudes the second guide plate from the game board, It is possible to switch to the second ball entry possible state in which the game ball is entered into the multi-ball winning opening via the second guide plate and the second guide surface. In addition, since the small ball winning opening and the multiple winning ball winning opening are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge driving section moves the first guide plate and the second guide plate to the game board. By immersing it in the ball, you can switch to the state where it is impossible to enter. Therefore, the ball-entering state switching means can guide the game ball falling toward the second guide surface to the first guide surface via the first guide plate in the first ball-enterable state, In the second ball-enterable state, game balls falling toward the first guide surface can be guided to the second guide surface via the second guide plate.

Feature A8.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3 of the present invention group,
The variable winning device is
The small prize winning opening provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction;
The multi-ball winning opening is provided below the small-ball winning opening in the vertical direction and is provided so as to open to one side in the horizontal direction,
The ball entering state switching means is
A first bridge (upper bridge 571) that is provided so as to be able to protrude from the game board and that is inclined so as to descend toward the small ball winning opening side;
A second bridge (lower bridge 572) that is provided so as to be able to protrude from the game board and that is inclined downward toward the multi-ball winning opening side;
A bridge drive unit (bridge drive unit 573) that causes the first bridge and the second bridge to project and sink into the game board,
The bridge drive unit protrudes the first bridge with respect to the game board and sinks the second bridge with respect to the game board, thereby causing the small prize through the first bridge. Switching to the first ball entry possible state in which the game ball is entered into the ball winning opening, the second bridge is projected with respect to the game board, and the first bridge is immersed with respect to the game board. by switching to the second ball entry possible state in which game balls are entered into the multi-ball winning opening via the second bridge, and the first bridge and the second bridge are switched to the game A game machine characterized by switching to the ball-entering impossible state by immersing the player in the board.

According to feature A8 of the present invention group, the first bridge is inclined so as to descend toward the side of the small winning ball winning opening, so that the bridge drive unit protrudes the first bridge with respect to the game board. By doing so, it is possible to switch to the first ball-enterable state in which the game ball is entered into the small prize-winning hole via the first bridge. Since the second bridge inclines so as to descend toward the multi-ball winning opening side, the bridge drive unit protrudes the second bridge with respect to the game board to can be switched to a second ball entry possible state in which game balls are entered into the multi-ball winning opening. In addition, since the small ball winning opening and the multiple winning ball winning opening are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge driving section immerses the first bridge and the second bridge with respect to the game board. By doing so, you can switch to the state where you cannot enter the ball. Therefore, the gaming machine can simplify the configuration of the ball entering state switching means.

Feature A9.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3 of the present invention group,
The variable winning device is
The small prize winning opening provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction;
The multi-ball winning opening is provided below the small-ball winning opening in the vertical direction and is provided so as to open to one side in the horizontal direction,
The ball entering state switching means is
A lifting bridge (lifting bridge 56) provided on one side in the horizontal direction of the small-ball winning opening and the multiple-ball winning opening;
A bridge driving unit (bridge driving unit 563) that raises and lowers the lifting bridge,
The elevating bridge includes:
A first elevation state in which the game ball is inclined downward toward the small prize winning opening and guides the game ball to the small winning ball winning opening;
a second elevation state in which the gaming ball is guided downward toward the multi-ball winning opening side, and the game ball is led to the multi-ball winning opening;
and a third lifting state in which game balls are not guided to the small-ball winning opening and the multi-ball winning opening,
The bridge drive unit sets the elevating bridge to the first elevating state to bring a game ball into the small ball winning opening via the elevating bridge to enter the first ball entry possible state. By switching and setting the elevating bridge to the second elevating state, switching to the second ball entering possible state in which a game ball enters the multiple ball winning opening via the elevating bridge, and the elevating A game machine characterized by switching to the ball-entering impossible state by setting the bridge to the third lifting state.

According to feature A9 of the present invention group, in the first elevation state, the elevating bridge is inclined so as to descend toward the small ball winning opening side and guide the game ball to the small winning ball winning opening. The bridge drive unit can switch to the first ball entry possible state for entering the game ball into the small winning ball winning opening via the elevation bridge by setting the elevation bridge to the first elevation state. In the second elevation state, the elevating bridge inclines so as to descend toward the multiple-ball winning opening side and guides the game balls to the multiple-ball winning opening side. can be switched to the second ball entry possible state in which the game ball is entered into the multi-ball winning opening via the elevation bridge. In addition, since the lifting bridge does not guide game balls to the small ball winning opening and the multiple winning ball winning opening in the third lifting state, the bridge drive unit sets the lifting bridge to the third lifting state. , can be switched to a state where the ball cannot be entered. Therefore, the gaming machine can simplify the configuration of the ball entering state switching means.

Feature A10.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3 of the present invention group,
The variable winning device is
The small prize winning opening provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction;
The multi-ball winning opening provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction,
The ball entering state switching means is
a bridge (rotating bridge 541) provided between the small-ball winning opening and the multi-ball winning opening;
A bridge drive unit (rotation drive unit 543) that rotates the bridge,
The bridge is
A first rotation state (left rotation state) that inclines so as to descend toward the small prize winning opening and guides the game ball to the small winning ball winning opening;
a second rotation state (right rotation state) in which the game ball is inclined downward toward the multi-ball winning opening side and guides the game ball to the multi-ball winning opening;
By setting the bridge to the first rotating state, the bridge drive unit switches to the first ball entering possible state for entering a game ball into the small winning ball winning opening via the bridge. , by setting the bridge to the second rotating state, switching to the second ball-enterable state in which a game ball is entered into the multi-ball winning hole via the bridge. game machine.

According to feature A10 of the present invention group, in the first rotating state, the bridge is inclined so as to descend toward the side of the small-ball winning opening and guides the game ball to the small-ball winning opening. By setting the bridge to the first rotating state, the bridge driving section can switch to the first ball-enterable state for entering the game ball into the small prize-winning hole via the bridge. In the second rotating state, the bridge is inclined so as to descend toward the multiple-ball winning opening side and guide the game ball to the multiple-ball winning opening, so the bridge driving section moves the bridge to the second position. By setting to the rotating state, it is possible to switch to the second ball entry possible state in which the game ball is entered into the multi-ball winning opening via the bridge. Therefore, the gaming machine can simplify the configuration of the ball entering state switching means.
In addition, the small winning ball winning opening is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction, and the multiple winning ball winning opening is provided so as to open to the other side in the horizontal direction. By distributing the game balls in the horizontal left and right direction, the balls are made to enter the small winning ball winning opening or the multiple winning ball winning opening. Therefore, in order to switch between the first ball-enterable state, the second ball-enterable state, and the ball-enterable state, for example, compared to the case of adopting a mechanism such as an opening and closing door, the ball-entering state switching means is , the space of the game area can be effectively used for installation.

Feature A11.
In the gaming machine described in feature A10 of the invention group,
The ball entering state switching means is
The bridge (rotating bridge 541) provided so as to be able to project and retract with respect to the game board;
The bridge driving section (rotating driving section 543 and advance/retreat driving section 544) that rotates the bridge after projecting and retracting the bridge with respect to the game board and projecting the bridge with respect to the game board. and
The bridge is
After protruding from the game board, a first rotation state (left rotation state) in which the game ball is inclined to descend toward the small prize winning opening side and guide the game ball to the small winning ball winning opening )When,
After protruding from the game board, a second rotation state (right rotation state) in which the game ball is guided downward toward the multi-prize winning opening by inclining downward toward the multi-prizing winning opening ) and
The bridge drive unit protrudes the bridge with respect to the game board, and then sets the bridge in the first rotational state, thereby driving game balls into the small prize winning opening via the bridge. After switching to the first ball-enterable state in which the ball is entered, and projecting the bridge with respect to the game board, by setting the bridge to the second rotating state, through the bridge Switching to the second ball-enterable state in which game balls enter the multi-ball winning opening, and switching to the ball-enterable state by immersing the bridge in the game board. game machine.

According to the feature A11 of the present invention group, the bridge protrudes from the game board in the first rotating state, and then tilts downward toward the small-prize-ball winning opening side. Since the game ball is guided to the winning hole, the bridge driving part sets the bridge to the first rotating state, thereby allowing the first ball entry to enter the game ball into the small winning ball winning hole via the bridge. state can be switched. In the second rotating state, the bridge protrudes from the game board and then tilts downward toward the multiple-ball winning opening side to guide the game balls to the multiple-ball winning opening. By setting the bridge to the second rotating state, the driving section can switch to the second ball-enterable state for entering the game ball into the multi-ball winning hole via the bridge. In addition, since the small-ball winning opening and the multi-ball winning opening are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge driving section can move the bridge into the game board so that no ball can be entered. can be switched to Therefore, the bridge driving section can prevent the path of the game ball from being obstructed when switching to the non-enterable state.

Feature A12.
In the gaming machine described in feature A10 of the invention group,
The bridge driving unit is characterized by switching to the ball-entering disabled state by rotating the bridge so as not to allow game balls to enter either the small-ball winning opening or the multi-ball winning opening. Amusement machine.

According to the feature A12 of the present invention group, the bridge drive unit rotates the bridge so as not to allow the game ball to enter either the small ball winning opening or the multiple winning ball winning opening, whereby the ball cannot be entered. can be switched to Therefore, the bridge driving section can switch the bridge to the ball-entry disabled state without adding a new structure.

According to the characteristic group A of the present invention, since it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game, the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine equipped with a display device that variably displays a plurality of patterns. This gaming machine has a shooting means for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board, and when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means), a jackpot lottery or the like is performed. An internal lottery is executed, and the variable display of patterns is started. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns on the display device, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

However, since the variable prize winning device pays out a predetermined number of prize balls when a game ball enters the game, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is reduced.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Based on the starting ball entry means (upper operation opening 36 and lower operation opening 37) to be executed and the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means as a trigger, it is advantageous for the player. A game state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting a game state from a normal control state to a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode), and a state in which a game ball can be entered when shifting to the specific control state. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising a variable winning device (variable winning device 5A),
The normal control state is
A first gaming state (low probability mode);
A second game state (high probability mode) different from the first game state,
The variable winning device is
a normal winning port (first winning port 51) for executing a payout of a predetermined number of prize balls when a game ball enters;
a specific winning opening (second winning opening 52A) for setting the normal control state to the second gaming state when a game ball enters;
A first ball-enterable state in which a game ball is allowed to enter the normal winning opening and is not allowed to enter the specific winning opening, and a game ball is allowed to enter the specific winning opening and the normal winning opening. and a ball-entering state switching means for switching between a second ball-enterable state in which a game ball is not allowed to enter the game ball and a ball-enterable state in which a game ball is not allowed to enter either the normal winning hole or the specific winning hole. ,
The game state transition means switches to the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state by the ball-entering state switching means when the state is changed to the specific control state, and the state is changed to the specific control state. , the game machine is characterized in that, when the state has not shifted to the state where the ball cannot be entered, the state is switched to the state where the ball cannot be entered by the state switching means.

According to feature B1 of the present invention group, since the variable prize winning device includes the ball entering state switching means, when the state is shifted to the specific control state, the first ball entering possible state is established by the entering ball state switching means. By switching to , the game ball can be entered into the normal winning hole for executing the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls, and by switching to the second ball enterable state by the ball entering state switching means, normal control is performed A game ball can enter a specific winning hole that sets the state to the second game state. In addition, the variable winning device prevents the game ball from entering the normal winning opening and the specific winning opening by switching the ball entry state switching means to the non-enterable state when the transition to the specific control state has not occurred. can be Therefore, when the variable winning device shifts to the specific control state, the normal control state can be set to the second game state by switching the ball entry possible state with the ball entry state switching means. It is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature B2.
In the gaming machine described in feature B1 of the invention group,
The game state transition means is
Based on the result of an internal lottery executed when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means, it is determined whether or not to switch to the second ball entry possible state by the ball entry state switching means. a ball entry state determination unit (large winning opening opening process);
When the game ball does not enter the specific winning hole in the specific control state, the normal control state is set to the first game state, and when the game ball enters the specific winning hole, the A gaming machine characterized by comprising a game state setting section (transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode) for setting the normal control state to the second game state.

According to feature B2 of the present invention group, the game state transition means causes the ball entering state switching means to select the second ball based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means. Since the second ball-enterable state is provided, the player pays attention to the decision result of the ball-enterable state determiner. will be expected to be Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature B3.
In the gaming machine described in feature B1 or feature B2 of the invention group,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the ball-entering state switching means switches the second ball-enterable state to the first ball-enterable state when a game ball enters the specific winning hole.

According to feature B3 of the present invention group, the ball-entering state switching means switches the second ball-entering possible state to the first ball-entering possible state when the game ball enters the specific winning hole. After entering the game ball into the specific winning hole, the player can enter the game ball into the normal winning hole. Then, the normal prize winning port can execute the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls when a game ball enters. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature B4.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature B1 to feature B3 of the present invention group,
The variable winning device is
the normal winning opening provided so as to open to one side in the horizontal direction;
The specific winning opening provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction,
The ball entering state switching means is
A first bridge (first bridge 512) that is provided so as to be able to protrude from the game board and that is inclined downward toward the normal winning opening side;
A second bridge (second bridge 522) which is provided so as to be able to protrude from the game board and which is inclined so as to descend toward the specific winning opening side;
A bridge drive unit (first bridge drive unit 514 and second bridge drive unit 524) that causes the first bridge and the second bridge to project and sink into the game board,
The bridge driving unit protrudes the first bridge with respect to the game board and sinks the second bridge with respect to the game board, thereby the normal winning through the first bridge. Switching to the first ball-enterable state in which a game ball is entered into the mouth, protruding the second bridge with respect to the game board, and sinking the first bridge with respect to the game board. by switching to the second ball-enterable state in which a game ball enters the specific winning hole via the second bridge, and the first bridge and the second bridge are moved to the game board. A game machine characterized by switching to the ball-entering impossible state by immersing the player in the game machine.

According to feature B4 of the present invention group, the first bridge is normally inclined so as to descend toward the winning opening side, so that the bridge driving section causes the first bridge to protrude with respect to the game board. , it is possible to switch to the first ball-enterable state in which the game ball is entered into the normal winning hole via the first bridge. Since the second bridge is inclined so as to descend toward the side of the specific winning port, the bridge drive unit protrudes the second bridge with respect to the game board, thereby specifying the It is possible to switch to a second ball-enterable state in which a game ball is allowed to enter the winning hole. Further, since the normal prize winning port and the specific prize winning port are provided so as to open horizontally, the bridge driving section immerses the first bridge and the second bridge into the game board, You can switch to a state where you cannot enter the ball. Therefore, the gaming machine can simplify the configuration of the ball entering state switching means.
In addition, the normal winning opening is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction, and the specific winning opening is provided so as to open to the other side in the horizontal direction. are distributed in the horizontal left and right directions, the ball is entered into the normal winning hole or the specific winning hole. Therefore, in order to switch between the first ball-enterable state, the second ball-enterable state, and the ball-enterable state, for example, compared to the case of adopting a mechanism such as an opening and closing door, the ball-entering state switching means is , the space of the game area can be effectively used for installation.

Feature B5.
In the gaming machine described in feature B4 of the invention group,
A gaming machine, wherein the first bridge and the second bridge are provided so as to cross each other.

According to feature B5 of the group of inventions, the first bridge and the second bridge are provided so as to cross each other. As compared with the case where the game area is provided, the ball-entering state switching means can be installed by effectively utilizing the space of the game area.

Feature B6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature B1 to feature B3 of the present invention group,
The variable winning device is
the normal winning opening provided so as to open to one side in the horizontal direction;
The specific winning opening provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction,
The ball entering state switching means is
a bridge (moving bridge main body 551) provided between the normal winning opening and the specific winning opening;
A bridge drive unit (bridge drive unit 553) for moving the bridge along the horizontal direction,
The bridge is
a first guide surface (first guide surface 551a) that slopes downward toward the normal winning opening side;
A second guide surface (second guide surface 551b) that slopes downward toward the specific winning opening side,
The bridge drive unit moves the bridge to the normal winning opening side, thereby switching to the first ball entering possible state in which a game ball enters the normal winning opening via the first guide surface. , by moving the bridge to the specific winning opening side, switching to the second ball enterable state in which a game ball enters the specific winning opening via the second guide surface, and the normal winning opening. and, by moving the bridge to the center of the specific winning hole, the game machine is switched to the state where balls cannot be entered.

According to feature B6 of the present invention group, the first guide surface is inclined so as to descend toward the normal winning opening side. It is possible to switch to the first ball-enterable state in which the game ball is entered into the normal winning hole via the first guide surface. Since the second guide surface inclines so as to descend toward the specific winning opening side, the bridge drive unit moves the bridge toward the specific winning opening side, thereby driving the specific winning opening through the second guide surface. It is possible to switch to a second ball-enterable state in which a game ball is entered into the mouth. Further, since the normal winning opening and the specific winning opening are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge driving section moves the bridge to the center of the normal winning opening and the specific winning opening to prevent the ball from entering. state can be switched. Therefore, the gaming machine can simplify the configuration of the ball entering state switching means.
In addition, the normal winning opening is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction, and the specific winning opening is provided so as to open to the other side in the horizontal direction. are distributed in the horizontal left and right directions, the ball is entered into the normal winning hole or the specific winning hole. Therefore, in order to switch between the first ball-enterable state, the second ball-enterable state, and the ball-enterable state, for example, compared to the case of adopting a mechanism such as an opening and closing door, the ball-entering state switching means is , the space of the game area can be effectively used for installation.

Feature B7.
In the gaming machine described in feature B6 of the invention group,
The ball entering state switching means is
A first guide plate (first guide plate 554) that guides the game ball falling toward the second guide surface to the first guide surface;
A second guide plate (second guide plate 555) that guides the game ball falling toward the first guide surface to the second guide surface,
The bridge drive unit protrudes the first guide plate with respect to the game board and retracts the second guide plate with respect to the game board, thereby moving the first guide plate and the second guide plate into the game board. Switching to the first ball-enterable state in which a game ball enters the normal winning hole via the guide surface 1, protrudes the second guide plate with respect to the game board, and moves the first guide plate. By immersing the guide plate into the game board, the game ball enters the specific winning hole via the second guide plate and the second guide surface to enter the second ball entry possible state. A game machine characterized by switching to the state where a ball cannot be entered by immersing the first guide plate and the second guide plate into the game board.

According to feature B7 of the group of inventions, the first guide plate guides the game ball falling toward the second guide surface to the first guide surface, so that the bridge drive section guides the first guide plate to the first guide surface. By protruding with respect to the game board, it is possible to switch to the first ball entry possible state in which the game ball is allowed to enter the normal winning opening via the first guide plate and the first guide surface. Since the second guide plate guides the game ball falling toward the first guide surface to the second guide surface, the bridge driving section protrudes the second guide plate from the game board, It is possible to switch to a second ball-enterable state in which a game ball is entered into a specific winning hole via the second guide plate and the second guide surface. In addition, since the normal prize winning port and the specific prize winning port are provided so as to open horizontally, the bridge driving section can immerse the first guide plate and the second guide plate into the game board. You can switch to the state where you can not enter the ball. Therefore, the ball-entering state switching means can guide the game ball falling toward the second guide surface to the first guide surface via the first guide plate in the first ball-enterable state, In the second ball-enterable state, game balls falling toward the first guide surface can be guided to the second guide surface via the second guide plate.

Feature B8.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature B1 to feature B3 of the present invention group,
The variable winning device is
the normal winning opening provided so as to open to one side in the horizontal direction;
The specific winning opening provided vertically below the normal winning opening and opened to one side in the horizontal direction,
The ball entering state switching means is
A first bridge (upper bridge 571) which is provided so as to be protrusive and retractable with respect to the game board and is inclined so as to descend toward the normal winning opening side;
A second bridge (lower bridge 572) that is provided so as to be able to protrude from the game board and that is inclined so as to descend toward the specific winning opening side;
A bridge drive unit (bridge drive unit 573) that causes the first bridge and the second bridge to project and sink into the game board,
The bridge driving unit protrudes the first bridge with respect to the game board and sinks the second bridge with respect to the game board, thereby the normal winning through the first bridge. Switching to the first ball-enterable state in which a game ball is entered into the mouth, protruding the second bridge with respect to the game board, and sinking the first bridge with respect to the game board. by switching to the second ball-enterable state in which a game ball enters the specific winning hole via the second bridge, and the first bridge and the second bridge are moved to the game board. A game machine characterized by switching to the ball-entering impossible state by immersing the player in the game machine.

According to feature B8 of the present invention group, the first bridge is normally inclined so as to descend toward the winning opening side, so that the bridge driving section causes the first bridge to protrude with respect to the game board. , it is possible to switch to the first ball-enterable state in which the game ball is entered into the normal winning hole via the first bridge. Since the second bridge is inclined so as to descend toward the side of the specific winning port, the bridge drive unit protrudes the second bridge with respect to the game board, thereby specifying the It is possible to switch to a second ball-enterable state in which a game ball is allowed to enter the winning hole. Further, since the normal prize winning port and the specific prize winning port are provided so as to open horizontally, the bridge driving section immerses the first bridge and the second bridge into the game board, You can switch to a state where you cannot enter the ball. Therefore, the gaming machine can simplify the configuration of the ball entering state switching means.

Feature B9.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature B1 to feature B3 of the present invention group,
The variable winning device is
the normal winning opening provided so as to open to one side in the horizontal direction;
The specific winning opening provided vertically below the normal winning opening and opened to one side in the horizontal direction,
The ball entering state switching means is
An elevating bridge (elevating bridge 56) provided on one horizontal side of the normal winning opening and the specific winning opening;
A bridge driving unit (bridge driving unit 563) that raises and lowers the lifting bridge,
The elevating bridge includes:
A first elevation state that inclines so as to descend toward the normal winning opening side and guides the game ball to the normal winning opening;
A second elevation state that tilts downward toward the specific winning opening and guides the game ball to the specific winning opening;
A third lifting state in which game balls are not guided to the normal winning opening and the specific winning opening,
The bridge drive unit sets the elevating bridge to the first elevating state, thereby switching to the first ball entering possible state in which a game ball enters the normal winning opening via the elevating bridge, By setting the elevating bridge to the second elevating state, the elevating bridge is switched to the second ball entry possible state in which a game ball enters the specific winning hole via the elevating bridge, and the elevating bridge is set to the second elevating state. A game machine characterized by switching to the ball-entering impossible state by setting the up-and-down state of No. 3.

According to feature B9 of the present invention group, in the first elevation state, the lifting bridge inclines so as to descend toward the normal winning opening side and guides game balls to the normal winning opening side. , By setting the elevating bridge to the first elevating state, it is possible to switch to the first ball entry possible state in which the game ball is entered into the normal winning opening via the elevating bridge. In the second elevation state, the elevating bridge tilts so as to descend toward the specific winning opening side and guides the game ball to the specific winning opening, so that the bridge drive unit moves the elevating bridge to the second elevation state. By setting, it is possible to switch to the second ball entry possible state in which the game ball is entered into the specific winning hole via the lifting bridge. Further, since the elevating bridge does not guide the game ball to the normal winning opening and the specific winning opening in the third elevating state, the bridge drive unit sets the elevating bridge to the third elevating state to prevent the ball from entering. state can be switched. Therefore, the gaming machine can simplify the configuration of the ball entering state switching means.

Feature B10.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature B1 to feature B3 of the present invention group,
The variable winning device is
the normal winning opening provided so as to open to one side in the horizontal direction;
The specific winning opening provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction,
The ball entering state switching means is
a bridge (rotating bridge 541) provided between the normal winning opening and the specific winning opening;
A bridge drive unit (rotation drive unit 543) that rotates the bridge,
The bridge is
A first rotation state (left rotation state) that inclines so as to descend toward the normal winning opening side and guides the game ball to the normal winning opening;
A second rotation state (right rotation state) that tilts downward toward the specific winning opening and guides the game ball to the specific winning opening,
By setting the bridge to the first rotating state, the bridge drive unit switches to the first ball-enterable state in which a game ball enters the normal winning hole via the bridge, and A game machine characterized by switching to the second ball-enterable state in which a game ball is allowed to enter the specific winning hole via the bridge by setting the bridge to the second rotating state.

According to feature B10 of the present invention group, in the first rotating state, the bridge inclines so as to descend toward the normal winning opening side and guides game balls to the normal winning opening, so the bridge drive unit , By setting the bridge to the first rotating state, it is possible to switch to the first ball-enterable state in which the game ball is entered into the normal winning opening via the bridge. In the second rotating state, the bridge is inclined so as to descend toward the specific winning opening side and guide the game ball to the specific winning opening, so that the bridge drive unit moves the bridge to the second rotating state. By setting, it is possible to switch to the second ball entry possible state in which the game ball is allowed to enter the specific winning hole via the bridge. Therefore, the gaming machine can simplify the configuration of the ball entering state switching means.
In addition, the normal winning opening is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction, and the specific winning opening is provided so as to open to the other side in the horizontal direction. are distributed in the horizontal left and right directions, the ball is entered into the normal winning hole or the specific winning hole. Therefore, in order to switch between the first ball-enterable state, the second ball-enterable state, and the ball-enterable state, for example, compared to the case of adopting a mechanism such as an opening and closing door, the ball-entering state switching means is , the space of the game area can be effectively used for installation.

Feature B11.
In the gaming machine described in feature B10 of the invention group,
The ball entering state switching means is
The bridge (rotating bridge 541) provided so as to be able to project and retract with respect to the game board;
The bridge driving section (rotating driving section 543 and advance/retreat driving section 544) that rotates the bridge after projecting and retracting the bridge with respect to the game board and projecting the bridge with respect to the game board. and
The bridge is
A first rotation state (left rotation state) in which a game ball is guided to the normal winning opening by projecting from the game board and then tilting downward toward the normal winning opening side;
and a second rotation state (right rotation state) that inclines so as to descend toward the specific winning opening after protruding from the game board and guides the game ball to the specific winning opening. ,
The bridge drive unit causes the bridge to project from the game board, and then sets the bridge to the first rotational state, thereby allowing game balls to enter the normal winning opening via the bridge. After switching to the first ball-enterable state in which the ball is allowed to enter, and projecting the bridge with respect to the game board, by setting the bridge to the second rotating state, the specified state is set through the bridge. The gaming machine is characterized by switching to the second ball-enterable state in which a game ball is entered into a prize-winning opening, and switching to the ball-enterable state by immersing the bridge in the game board.

According to feature B11 of the present invention group, the bridge protrudes with respect to the game board in the first rotating state, and then tilts so as to descend toward the normal winning opening side, and the bridge moves toward the normal winning opening. Since the ball is guided, the bridge driving part can switch to the first ball-enterable state for entering the game ball into the normal winning hole via the bridge by setting the bridge to the first rotating state. . In the second rotating state, the bridge protrudes from the game board and then tilts downward toward the specific winning opening to guide the game ball to the specific winning opening. By setting the bridge to the second rotating state, it is possible to switch to the second ball-enterable state in which the game ball is entered into the specific winning hole via the bridge. In addition, since the normal winning opening and the specific winning opening are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge driving section can switch to the non-enterable state by immersing the bridge in the game board. can. Therefore, the bridge driving section can prevent the path of the game ball from being obstructed when switching to the non-enterable state.

Feature B12.
In the gaming machine described in feature B10 of the invention group,
The bridge drive unit switches to the ball-entering impossible state by rotating the bridge so that the game ball is not allowed to enter either the normal winning hole or the specific winning hole. .

According to feature B12 of the present invention group, the bridge drive unit can switch to the ball-entering impossible state by rotating the bridge so as not to allow the game ball to enter either the normal winning hole or the specific winning hole. can. Therefore, the bridge driving section can switch the bridge to the ball-entry disabled state without adding a new structure.

According to the characteristic group B of the present invention, since it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game, the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine equipped with a display device that variably displays a plurality of patterns. This gaming machine has a shooting means for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board, and when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means), a jackpot lottery or the like is performed. An internal lottery is executed, and the variable display of patterns is started. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns on the display device, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

However, since the variable winning device has a monotonous function of executing the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls when a game ball enters, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is reduced. .

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Based on the starting ball entry means to be executed (the upper operation port 36 and the first winning hole 51B) and the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball to the start ball entry means, A game state transition means (main controller 60) that shifts the game state to an advantageous specific control state (opening/closing execution mode), and variable winning that shifts to a state in which a game ball can enter when the specific control state is shifted. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising a device (variable winning device 5B),
The variable winning device is
Equipped with a large winning opening (second winning opening 52B) for executing the payout of a predetermined number of winning balls when a game ball enters,
The starting ball entry means is
a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 36);
A second start-up ball entry section (first winning opening 51B) different from the first start-up ball entry section is provided,
The game machine is
A first ball-enterable state in which a game ball enters the second starting ball-entering portion, a second ball-enterable state in which a game ball enters the big winning opening, and the second starting ball-entering portion. and a ball entry state switching means for switching between a ball entry impossible state in which a game ball is not allowed to enter any of the big winning openings,
The game state transition means switches to the first ball-enterable state by the ball-entering state switching means when setting the second starting ball-entering section to the open state, and shifts to the specific control state. , when the ball-entering state switching means switches to the second ball-enterable state and the second start-up ball-entering section is set to the closed state, and when the transition to the specific control state has not occurred is a gaming machine characterized in that the ball-entering state switching means switches to the ball-entering impossible state.

According to feature C1 of the present invention group, the game machine is provided with the ball-entering state switching means. By switching to the ball-enterable state, the game ball can be entered into the second start-up ball-entering unit that executes an internal lottery when the game ball enters. In addition, since the gaming machine is provided with the ball entering state switching means, when the state is shifted to the specific control state, the entering state of the game ball is switched to the second ball entering possible state by the ball entering state switching means. A game ball can be made to enter a big winning hole that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls when the ball is played. Further, when the second start-up ball-entering section is set to the closed state, and when the game machine does not shift to the specific control state, the game machine switches to the ball-entering disabled state by the ball-entering state switching means. It is possible to prevent game balls from entering the 2-start ball entry section and the big winning opening. Therefore, the game machine can guide the game ball to a different winning hole by switching the ball-enterable state with the ball-enterable state switching means, so that the player's attention to the game can be improved.

Feature C2.
In the gaming machine described in feature C1 of the invention group,
The game machine is
the second start-up ball part provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction;
The large winning opening provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction,
The ball entering state switching means is
a first bridge (first bridge 512B) provided so as to be protrusive and retractable with respect to the game board and inclined so as to descend toward the second starting ball entering portion side;
A second bridge (second bridge 522B) that is provided so as to be able to protrude from the game board and that is inclined so as to descend toward the side of the big winning opening;
A bridge drive unit (first bridge drive unit 514B and second bridge drive unit 524B) that causes the first bridge and the second bridge to project and sink into the game board,
The bridge drive unit causes the first bridge to enter the second starting ball entering unit through the first bridge by projecting the first bridge with respect to the game board. The second ball-enterable state in which the game ball is entered into the big winning hole via the second bridge by switching to the ball-allowable state and protruding the second bridge with respect to the game board. , and by immersing the first bridge and the second bridge in the game board, the game machine is switched to the state in which a ball cannot be entered.

According to feature C2 of the present invention group, the first bridge is inclined so as to descend toward the second starting ball-entering part side, so that the bridge driving part moves the first bridge with respect to the game board. By protruding, it is possible to switch to the first ball-enterable state in which the game ball is entered into the second starting ball-entering portion via the first bridge. Since the second bridge inclines so as to descend toward the big winning opening side, the bridge drive unit protrudes the second bridge with respect to the game board, thereby causing a large It is possible to switch to a second ball-enterable state in which a game ball is allowed to enter the winning hole. In addition, since the second starting ball entry portion and the big winning opening are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge drive portion causes the first bridge and the second bridge to sink into the game board. By doing so, it is possible to switch to the state where the ball cannot be entered. Therefore, the gaming machine can simplify the configuration of the ball entering state switching means.
In addition, the second starting ball entry portion is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction, and the big winning opening is provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction. By distributing the game balls in the horizontal left and right directions, the balls are made to enter the second starting ball entering section or the big winning hole. Therefore, in order to switch between the first ball-enterable state, the second ball-enterable state, and the ball-enterable state, for example, compared to the case of adopting a mechanism such as an opening and closing door, the ball-entering state switching means is , the space of the game area can be effectively used for installation.

Feature C3.
In the gaming machine described in feature C2 of the invention group,
A gaming machine, wherein the first bridge and the second bridge are provided so as to cross each other.

According to feature C3 of the group of inventions, the first bridge and the second bridge are provided so as to cross each other, so when they are provided so as not to cross each other (for example, vertically offset provided), the ball entry state switching means can be installed by effectively utilizing the space of the game area.

Feature C4.
In the gaming machine described in feature C3 of the invention group,
A gaming machine, wherein the horizontal length of the first bridge is shorter than the horizontal length of the second bridge.

Here, in general, the opening time of the second starting ball entry section that executes the internal lottery when the game ball enters is the opening time of the large winning opening that executes the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls when the game ball enters. shorter than the opening time.
According to feature C4 of the present invention group, the horizontal length of the first bridge is shorter than the horizontal length of the second bridge, so the opening time of the second starting ball entry section is the same as that of the large winning opening. Even if it is set to be shorter than the opening time, it is possible to make it easier to enter the game ball into the second start ball entering section.

Feature C5.
In the gaming machine described in feature C1 of the invention group,
The game machine is
the second start-up ball part provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction;
The large winning opening provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction,
The ball entering state switching means is
a bridge (moving bridge main body 551) provided between the second starting ball entry portion and the big winning opening;
A bridge drive unit (bridge drive unit 553) for moving the bridge along the horizontal direction,
The bridge is
a first guide surface (first guide surface 551a) that slopes downward toward the second starting ball entering portion side;
A second guide surface (second guide surface 551b) inclined so as to descend toward the big winning opening side,
The bridge driving section moves the bridge toward the second starting ball entering section, thereby entering the game ball into the second starting ball entering section through the first guide surface. By switching to the ball-enterable state and moving the bridge toward the big-winning hole side, the second ball-enterable state is entered in which the game ball enters the big-winning hole via the second guide surface. A game machine characterized by switching to the ball-entering impossible state by switching and moving the bridge to the center of the second start-up ball-entering portion and the big winning hole.

According to feature C5 of the present invention group, the first guide surface is inclined so as to descend toward the second starting ball entering portion side, so that the bridge driving portion moves toward the second starting ball entering portion side. By moving , it is possible to switch to the first ball-enterable state in which the game ball is entered into the second start-up ball-entering portion via the first guide surface. Since the second guide surface is inclined so as to descend toward the big prize winning opening side, the bridge driving section moves the bridge toward the big winning opening side, thereby driving the big prize winning through the second guide surface. It is possible to switch to a second ball-enterable state in which a game ball is entered into the mouth. In addition, since the second starting ball-entering part and the big winning hole are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge driving part moves the bridge to the center of the second starting ball-entering part and the big winning hole. By doing so, it is possible to switch to the state where the ball cannot be entered. Therefore, the gaming machine can simplify the configuration of the ball entering state switching means.
In addition, the second starting ball entry portion is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction, and the big winning opening is provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction. By distributing the game balls in the horizontal left and right directions, the balls are made to enter the second starting ball entering section or the big winning hole. Therefore, in order to switch between the first ball-enterable state, the second ball-enterable state, and the ball-enterable state, for example, compared to the case of adopting a mechanism such as an opening and closing door, the ball-entering state switching means is , the space of the game area can be effectively used for installation.

Feature C6.
In the gaming machine described in feature C5 of the invention group,
The ball entering state switching means is
a first guide plate (first guide plate 554) that guides the game ball falling toward the second guide surface to the first guide surface;
A second guide plate (second guide plate 555) that guides the game ball falling toward the first guide surface to the second guide surface,
The bridge drive unit protrudes the first guide plate with respect to the game board and retracts the second guide plate with respect to the game board, thereby moving the first guide plate and the second guide plate. Switching to the first ball-enterable state in which a game ball is entered into the second start-up ball-entering portion via one guide surface, protruding the second guide plate with respect to the game board, The second ball entry for entering the game ball into the big winning hole via the second guide plate and the second guide surface by immersing the first guide plate into the game board. A gaming machine characterized by switching to the ball-entering impossible state by switching to the possible state and immersing the first guide plate and the second guide plate into the game board.

According to feature C6 of the group of inventions, the first guide plate guides the game ball falling toward the second guide surface to the first guide surface, so that the bridge driving section moves the first guide plate to the first guide surface. By protruding from the game board, it is possible to switch to the first ball-enterable state in which the game ball is entered into the second start-up ball-entering portion via the first guide plate and the first guide surface. Since the second guide plate guides the game ball falling toward the first guide surface to the second guide surface, the bridge driving section protrudes the second guide plate from the game board, It is possible to switch to a second ball-enterable state in which a game ball is entered into the big winning opening via the second guide plate and the second guide surface. In addition, since the second starting ball entry portion and the big winning opening are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge driving portion moves the first guide plate and the second guide plate to the game board. By immersing it, you can switch to a state where you cannot enter the ball. Therefore, the ball-entering state switching means can guide the game ball falling toward the second guide surface to the first guide surface via the first guide plate in the first ball-enterable state, In the second ball-enterable state, game balls falling toward the first guide surface can be guided to the second guide surface via the second guide plate.

Feature C7.
In the gaming machine described in feature C1 of the invention group,
The game machine is
the second start-up ball part provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction;
The large winning opening provided vertically downward of the second start-up ball entry portion and opening to one side in the horizontal direction,
The ball entering state switching means is
a first bridge (upper bridge 571) provided so as to be able to protrude from the game board and inclined so as to descend toward the second starting ball entering portion side;
A second bridge (lower bridge 572) that is provided so as to be able to protrude from the game board and that is inclined so as to descend toward the side of the big winning opening;
A bridge drive unit (bridge drive unit 573) that causes the first bridge and the second bridge to project and sink into the game board,
The bridge drive unit causes the first bridge to enter the second starting ball entering unit through the first bridge by projecting the first bridge with respect to the game board. The second ball-enterable state in which the game ball is entered into the big winning hole via the second bridge by switching to the ball-allowable state and protruding the second bridge with respect to the game board. , and by immersing the first bridge and the second bridge in the game board, the game machine is switched to the state in which a ball cannot be entered.

According to feature C7 of the present invention group, since the first bridge is inclined so as to descend toward the second starting ball-entering part side, the bridge driving part moves the first bridge with respect to the game board. By protruding, it is possible to switch to the first ball-enterable state in which the game ball is entered into the second starting ball-entering portion via the first bridge. Since the second bridge inclines so as to descend toward the big winning hole side, the bridge drive unit protrudes the second bridge with respect to the game board, thereby causing a large It is possible to switch to a second ball-enterable state in which a game ball is allowed to enter the winning hole. In addition, since the second starting ball entry portion and the big winning opening are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge drive portion causes the first bridge and the second bridge to sink into the game board. By doing so, it is possible to switch to the state where the ball cannot be entered. Therefore, the gaming machine can simplify the configuration of the ball entering state switching means.

Feature C8.
In the gaming machine described in feature C1 of the invention group,
The game machine is
the second start-up ball part provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction;
The large winning opening provided vertically downward of the second start-up ball entry portion and opening to one side in the horizontal direction,
The ball entering state switching means is
an elevating bridge (elevating bridge 56) provided on one horizontal side of the second starting ball entry portion and the big winning opening;
A bridge driving unit (bridge driving unit 563) that raises and lowers the lifting bridge,
The elevating bridge includes:
A first elevating state in which the gaming ball is led to the second starting ball-entering part by tilting downward toward the second starting ball-entering part;
A second elevation state in which the gaming ball is guided to the big winning opening by being inclined so as to descend toward the big winning opening;
A third lifting state that does not guide the game ball to the second start ball entry section and the big winning opening,
The bridge drive unit sets the elevating bridge to the first elevating state, thereby entering the first ball entering possible state in which a game ball enters the second starting ball entering unit via the elevating bridge. , and by setting the elevating bridge to the second elevating state, switching to the second ball entry possible state in which a game ball enters the big winning opening via the elevating bridge, and the elevating bridge to the third elevating state, thereby switching to the state in which a ball cannot be entered.

According to feature C8 of the present invention group, in the first elevation state, the elevating bridge inclines so as to descend toward the second starting ball-entering part side to guide the game ball to the second starting ball-entering part. Therefore, the bridge driving section can switch to the first ball entry possible state in which the game ball is entered into the second start ball entry section via the elevation bridge by setting the elevation bridge to the first elevation state. can. In the second elevating state, the elevating bridge inclines so as to descend toward the large winning opening side and guides the game ball to the large winning opening, so that the bridge drive unit moves the elevating bridge to the second elevating state. By setting, it is possible to switch to the second ball entry possible state in which the game ball is entered into the big winning opening via the lifting bridge. In addition, since the elevating bridge does not guide game balls to the second starting ball entry portion and the big winning opening in the third elevating state, the bridge driving portion sets the elevating bridge to the third elevating state, You can switch to a state where you cannot enter the ball. Therefore, the gaming machine can simplify the configuration of the ball entering state switching means.

Feature C9.
In the gaming machine described in feature C1 of the invention group,
The variable winning device is
the second start-up ball part provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction;
The large winning opening provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction,
The ball entering state switching means is
A bridge (rotating bridge 541) provided between the second starting ball entry portion and the big winning opening;
A bridge drive unit (rotation drive unit 543) that rotates the bridge,
The bridge is
A first rotation state (left rotation state) that inclines so as to descend toward the second starting ball-entering portion and guides a game ball to the second starting ball-entering portion;
a second rotation state (right rotation state) that inclines so as to descend toward the big winning opening side and guides the game ball to the big winning opening,
The bridge drive unit enters the first ball entering possible state in which the game ball enters the second starting ball entering unit through the bridge by setting the bridge to the first rotating state. A game characterized by switching to the second ball-enterable state in which a game ball is entered into the big winning hole via the bridge by switching and setting the bridge to the second rotating state. machine.

According to feature C9 of the present invention group, in the first rotating state, the bridge inclines so as to descend toward the second starting ball-entering part side to guide the game ball to the second starting ball-entering part. Therefore, by setting the bridge to the first rotating state, the bridge driving section can switch to the first ball-enterable state in which the game ball is entered into the second start-up ball-entering section via the bridge. . In the second rotating state, the bridge is inclined so as to descend toward the big winning opening side and guide the game ball to the big winning opening, so that the bridge drive unit moves the bridge to the second rotating state. By setting, it is possible to switch to the second ball entry possible state in which the game ball is entered into the big winning hole via the bridge. Therefore, the gaming machine can simplify the configuration of the ball entering state switching means.
In addition, the second starting ball entry portion is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction, and the big winning opening is provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction. By distributing the game balls in the horizontal left and right directions, the balls are made to enter the second starting ball entering section or the big winning hole. Therefore, in order to switch between the first ball-enterable state, the second ball-enterable state, and the ball-enterable state, for example, compared to the case of adopting a mechanism such as an opening and closing door, the ball-entering state switching means is , the space of the game area can be effectively used for installation.

Feature C10.
In the gaming machine described in feature C9 of the invention group,
The ball entering state switching means is
The bridge (rotating bridge 541) provided so as to be able to project and retract with respect to the game board;
The bridge driving section (rotating driving section 543 and advance/retreat driving section 544) that rotates the bridge after projecting and retracting the bridge with respect to the game board and projecting the bridge with respect to the game board. and
The bridge is
After protruding with respect to the game board, a first rotation state (counterclockwise rotation) that inclines so as to descend toward the second starting ball entering portion and guides the game ball to the second starting ball entering portion dynamic state) and
and a second rotation state (right rotation state) in which the game ball is inclined downward toward the large winning opening after protruding from the game board to guide the game ball to the large winning opening. ,
After projecting the bridge with respect to the game board, the bridge drive unit sets the bridge to the first rotation state, thereby allowing the second start ball-entering unit to play the game via the bridge. After switching to the first ball-enterable state in which a ball can be entered and projecting the bridge with respect to the game board, the bridge is set to the second rotating state, thereby to switch to the second ball-enterable state in which a game ball enters the big winning hole, and to switch to the ball-enterable state by immersing the bridge in the game board. machine.

According to the feature C10 of the present invention group, the bridge protrudes with respect to the game board in the first rotating state, and then tilts so as to descend toward the second start-up ball-entering portion. Since the game ball is guided to the starting ball-entering part, the bridge driving part sets the bridge to the first rotating state, thereby causing the game ball to enter the second starting ball-entering part via the bridge. It can be switched to a ball-enterable state. In the second rotating state, the bridge protrudes from the game board and then tilts downward toward the large winning opening side to guide the game ball to the big winning opening. By setting the bridge to the second rotating state, it is possible to switch to the second ball-enterable state in which the game ball is entered into the big winning hole via the bridge. In addition, since the second starting ball-entering part and the big winning hole are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge drive part puts the bridge into a ball-entering disabled state by immersing the bridge into the game board. You can switch. Therefore, the bridge driving section can prevent the path of the game ball from being obstructed when switching to the non-enterable state.

Feature C11.
In the gaming machine described in feature C9 of the invention group,
The bridge driving unit switches to the ball-entering impossible state by rotating the bridge so as not to allow the game ball to enter either the second starting ball-entering unit or the big winning hole. game machine.

According to the feature C11 of the present invention group, the bridge driving section rotates the bridge so as not to allow the game ball to enter either the second start ball entering section or the big winning opening, thereby making it impossible to enter the ball. You can switch. Therefore, the bridge driving section can switch the bridge to the ball-entry disabled state without adding a new structure.

According to the characteristic group C of the present invention, since it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game, the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine equipped with a display device that variably displays a plurality of patterns. This gaming machine has a shooting means for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board, and when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means), a jackpot lottery or the like is performed. An internal lottery is executed, and the variable display of patterns is started. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns on the display device, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

However, since the variable winning device has a monotonous function of executing the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls when a game ball enters, it is said that the player's attention to the game may decrease. There's a problem.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Based on the starting ball entry means (upper operation opening 36 and lower operation opening 37) to be executed and the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means as a trigger, it is advantageous for the player. A game state transition means (main controller 60) that shifts the game state to a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode), and a variable winning device that shifts to a state where game balls can enter when the specific control state is changed A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising a variable winning device 5C),
The variable winning device is
a small winning ball winning opening (first winning opening 51) for executing a payout of a predetermined number of winning balls when a game ball enters;
a multiple winning ball winning opening (second winning opening 52) for executing the payout of a larger number of winning balls than the small winning winning opening when a game ball enters;
A first ball entry possible state in which game balls are not allowed to enter the multi-prize ball winning opening while game balls are allowed to enter the small-prize ball winning opening, and game balls are allowed to enter the multi-prize ball winning opening. In addition, a second ball entry possible state in which the game ball is not allowed to enter the small prize ball winning opening, and a ball entry impossible state in which the game ball is not allowed to enter either the small prize ball winning opening or the multiple winning ball winning opening. A ball entry state switching means for switching between a state and a holding state for holding a game ball,
The game state transition means switches to the holding state by the ball entering state switching means when the state is shifted to the specific control state, and then enters the first ball entering possible state or the second entering possible state. state, and if it is not shifted to the specific control state, the ball-entering state switching means switches to the ball-entering impossible state.

According to feature D1 of the present invention group, the variable winning device includes the ball-entering state switching means. By switching to the first ball-enterable state, the game ball can be entered into the small-prize-ball winning port for executing the payout of the predetermined number of prize balls, and the state is switched to the holding state by the ball-entering state switching means. After that, by switching to the second ball entry possible state, the game ball can be entered into the multiple winning ball winning opening for executing the payout of a larger number of winning balls than the small winning ball winning opening. In addition, when the variable winning device does not shift to the specific control state, the ball-entering state switching means switches the ball-entering state to a non-enterable state, thereby allowing the game balls to enter the small-ball winning port and the multi-ball winning port. You can prevent it from entering the ball. Therefore, when the variable winning device shifts to the specific control state, the variable prize winning device can change the number of winning balls by switching the ball-enterable state after switching to the holding state by the ball-entering state switching means. , the player pays attention to the destination of the game ball held by the entering-ball state switching means, and thus the degree of attention of the player to the game can be improved.

Feature D2.
In the gaming machine described in feature D1 of the invention group,
After switching to the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state by the ball-enterable state switching means, the game state transition means returns to the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state. A game in the specific control state (round game) is performed until switching to the state in which a ball can be entered. A game machine characterized by switching to the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state after switching to the holding state by a switching means.

According to the feature D2 of the present invention group, the game state transition means switches to the holding state by the ball entry state switching means each time a game in the specific control state is executed when the game state transitions to the specific control state. Since the state is switched to the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state, the player pays attention to the destination of the game ball held by the ball-enterable state switching means each time the game in the specific control state is executed. , and the degree of attention of the player to the game can be improved.

Feature D3.
In the gaming machine described in feature D2 of the invention group,
The game state transition means is
a ball-enterable state selection unit (round prize ball determination process) that selects either the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state;
When the first ball-enterable state selection unit selects the first ball-enterable state, the ball-enterable state selection unit switches to the first ball-enterable state. a ball entry possible state switching unit (bridge rotation processing) for switching to the second ball entry possible state by the ball entry state switching means when the second ball entry possible state is selected in A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature D3 of the present invention group, when the game state transition means selects the first ball entry possible state by the ball entry possible state selection section, the ball entry state switching means selects the first ball entry. When the ball entering possible state is switched to the entering possible state and the second entering possible state is selected by the entering possible state selecting unit, the entering possible state switching unit for switching to the second entering possible state by the entering possible state switching means is provided. Since it is provided, the player pays attention to the selection result of the ball-enterable state selection section and expects the second ball-enterable state to occur. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature D4.
In the gaming machine described in feature D3 of the invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the ball-enterable state selection unit executes a lottery to select either the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state based on a predetermined probability. .

According to feature D4 of the group of inventions, the ball-enterable state selection unit executes a lottery to select either the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state based on a predetermined probability. Therefore, the player pays attention to the lottery result of the ball-enterable state selection unit, and expects the second ball-enterable state to occur. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature D5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D4 of the present invention group,
The variable winning device is
The small prize winning opening provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction;
The multi-ball winning opening provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction,
The ball entering state switching means is
A first bridge (first bridge 512) that is provided so as to be protruding and retractable with respect to the game board and that is inclined so as to descend toward the small winning ball winning opening side;
A second bridge (a second bridge 522);
A bridge drive unit (first bridge drive unit 514 and second bridge drive unit 524) that causes the first bridge and the second bridge to project and sink into the game board,
The bridge drive unit protrudes the first bridge with respect to the game board and sinks the second bridge with respect to the game board, thereby causing the small prize through the first bridge. Switching to the first ball entry possible state in which the game ball is entered into the ball winning opening, the second bridge is projected with respect to the game board, and the first bridge is immersed with respect to the game board. by switching to the second ball entry possible state in which game balls are entered into the multi-ball winning opening via the second bridge, and the first bridge and the second bridge are switched to the game It is characterized by switching to the state where the ball cannot be entered by immersing it in the board, and switching to the holding state by protruding the first bridge and the second bridge with respect to the game board. game machine.

According to feature D5 of the present invention group, the first bridge is inclined so as to descend toward the side of the small winning ball winning opening, so that the bridge drive unit protrudes the first bridge with respect to the game board. By doing so, it is possible to switch to the first ball-enterable state in which the game ball is entered into the small prize-winning hole via the first bridge. Since the second bridge inclines so as to descend toward the multi-ball winning opening side, the bridge drive unit protrudes the second bridge with respect to the game board to can be switched to a second ball entry possible state in which game balls are entered into the multi-ball winning opening. In addition, since the small ball winning opening and the multiple winning ball winning opening are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge driving section immerses the first bridge and the second bridge with respect to the game board. By doing so, you can switch to the state where you cannot enter the ball. Since the first bridge and the second bridge are provided so as to intersect each other, the bridge driving section protrudes the first bridge and the second bridge with respect to the game board. state can be switched. Therefore, the gaming machine can simplify the configuration of the ball entering state switching means.
In addition, the small winning ball winning opening is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction, and the multiple winning ball winning opening is provided so as to open to the other side in the horizontal direction. By distributing the game balls in the horizontal left and right direction, the balls are made to enter the small winning ball winning opening or the multiple winning ball winning opening. Therefore, in order to switch between the first ball-enterable state, the second ball-enterable state, and the ball-enterable state, for example, compared to the case of adopting a mechanism such as an opening and closing door, the ball-entering state switching means is , the space of the game area can be effectively used for installation.

Feature D6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D4 of the present invention group,
The variable winning device is
The small prize winning opening provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction;
The multi-ball winning opening provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction,
The ball entering state switching means is
a bridge (rotating bridge 541) provided between the small-ball winning opening and the multi-ball winning opening;
A bridge drive unit (rotation drive unit 543) that rotates the bridge,
The bridge is
A first rotation state (left rotation state) that inclines so as to descend toward the small prize winning opening and guides the game ball to the small winning ball winning opening;
A second rotation state (right rotation state) in which the game ball is inclined downward toward the multiple ball winning opening side and guides the game ball to the multiple winning ball winning opening;
A horizontal state in which game balls are held without being guided to the small prize ball winning opening and the multiple winning ball winning opening,
By setting the bridge to the first rotating state, the bridge drive unit switches to the first ball entering possible state in which a game ball enters the small winning ball winning opening via the bridge. , by setting the bridge to the second rotating state, switching to the second ball-enterable state in which game balls are entered into the multi-ball winning opening via the bridge, and moving the bridge to the above-mentioned A game machine characterized by switching to the holding state by setting the game machine to a horizontal state.

According to feature D6 of the group of the present invention, the bridge, in the first rotating state, is inclined so as to descend toward the side of the small winning ball winning opening and guides the game ball to the small winning ball winning opening. By setting the bridge to the first rotating state, the bridge driving section can switch to the first ball-enterable state for entering the game ball into the small prize-winning hole via the bridge. In the second rotating state, the bridge is inclined so as to descend toward the multiple-ball winning opening side and guide the game ball to the multiple-ball winning opening, so the bridge driving section moves the bridge to the second position. By setting to the rotating state, it is possible to switch to the second ball entry possible state in which the game ball is entered into the multi-ball winning opening via the bridge. Since the bridge retains the game ball in the horizontal state without guiding the game ball to the small prize ball winning opening and the multiple winning ball winning opening, the bridge driving section retains the game ball by setting the bridge in the horizontal state. can be switched to a pending state. Therefore, the gaming machine can simplify the configuration of the ball entering state switching means.
In addition, the small winning ball winning opening is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction, and the multiple winning ball winning opening is provided so as to open to the other side in the horizontal direction. By distributing the game balls in the horizontal left and right direction, the balls are made to enter the small winning ball winning opening or the multiple winning ball winning opening. Therefore, in order to switch between the first ball-enterable state, the second ball-enterable state, and the ball-enterable state, for example, compared to the case of adopting a mechanism such as an opening and closing door, the ball-entering state switching means is , the space of the game area can be effectively used for installation.

Feature D7.
In the gaming machine described in feature D6 of the invention group,
The ball entering state switching means is
The bridge (rotating bridge 541) provided to be able to project and retract with respect to the game board;
The bridge driving section (rotating driving section 543 and advance/retreat driving section 544) that rotates the bridge after projecting and retracting the bridge with respect to the game board and projecting the bridge with respect to the game board. and
The bridge is
After protruding from the game board, a first rotation state (left rotation state) in which the game ball is inclined to descend toward the small prize winning opening side and guide the game ball to the small winning ball winning opening )When,
After protruding from the game board, a second rotation state (right rotation state) in which the game ball is guided downward toward the multi-prize winning opening by inclining downward toward the multi-prizing winning opening )When,
A horizontal state in which the game ball is held without being guided to the small prize ball winning opening and the multiple winning ball winning opening after projecting from the game board,
The bridge drive unit protrudes the bridge with respect to the game board, and then sets the bridge in the first rotational state, thereby driving game balls into the small prize winning opening via the bridge. After switching to the first ball-enterable state in which the ball is entered, and projecting the bridge with respect to the game board, by setting the bridge to the second rotating state, through the bridge By switching to the second ball-enterable state in which game balls enter the multi-ball winning opening, and by immersing the bridge in the game board, the ball-enterable state is switched to and the bridge is moved to the above-described second ball-enterable state. A game machine characterized by switching to the holding state by setting the bridge to the horizontal state after protruding from the game board.

According to feature D7 of the present invention group, the bridge protrudes with respect to the game board in the first rotating state, and then tilts so as to descend toward the small-prize-ball winning opening side. Since the game ball is guided to the winning hole, the bridge driving part sets the bridge to the first rotating state, thereby allowing the first ball entry to enter the game ball into the small winning ball winning hole via the bridge. state can be switched. In the second rotating state, the bridge protrudes from the game board and then tilts downward toward the multiple-ball winning opening side to guide the game balls to the multiple-ball winning opening. By setting the bridge to the second rotating state, the driving section can switch to the second ball-enterable state for entering the game ball into the multi-ball winning hole via the bridge. In addition, since the small-ball winning opening and the multi-ball winning opening are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge driving section can move the bridge into the game board so that no ball can be entered. can be switched to In the horizontal state, the bridge protrudes from the game board and then retains the game balls without guiding them to the small ball winning opening and the multiple winning ball winning opening. By setting, it is possible to switch to a holding state in which the game ball is held. Therefore, the bridge driving section can prevent the path of the game ball from being obstructed when switching to the non-enterable state.

Feature D8.
In the gaming machine described in feature D6 of the invention group,
The bridge driving unit is characterized by switching to the ball-entering disabled state by rotating the bridge so as not to allow game balls to enter either the small-ball winning opening or the multi-ball winning opening. Amusement machine.

According to the feature D8 of the present invention group, the bridge drive unit rotates the bridge so as not to allow the game ball to enter either the small ball winning opening or the multiple winning ball winning opening, so that the ball cannot be entered. can be switched to Therefore, the bridge driving section can switch the bridge to the ball-entry disabled state without adding a new structure.

According to the characteristic group D of the present invention, since it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game, the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine equipped with a display device that variably displays a plurality of patterns. This gaming machine has a shooting means for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board, and when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means), a jackpot lottery or the like is performed. An internal lottery is executed, and the variable display of patterns is started. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns on the display device, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

However, since the variable prize winning device pays out a predetermined number of prize balls when a game ball enters the game, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is reduced.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine) comprising shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board and ball entry means for entering game balls flowing down the game area. 10),
The ball entry means is
a first winning opening (first winning openings 51, 51B) provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction;
A second winning opening (second winning openings 52, 52B) provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction,
The game machine is
A first ball-enterable state in which a game ball enters the first winning hole, a second ball-enterable state in which a game ball enters the second winning hole, and the first winning hole and a ball entry state switching means for switching between a state in which a game ball is not allowed to enter any of the second winning holes,
The ball entering state switching means is
a first bridge (first bridges 512, 512B) provided so as to be protruding and retractable with respect to the game board and inclined so as to descend toward the first winning opening side;
a second bridge (second bridges 522, 522B) provided so as to be able to protrude from the game board and inclined so as to descend toward the second winning opening side;
A bridge drive unit (first bridge drive unit 514, 514B and second bridge drive unit 524, 524B) that causes the first bridge and the second bridge to project and sink into the game board,
The bridge driving section projects the first bridge with respect to the game board, thereby entering the game ball into the first winning hole via the first bridge. By switching to the enabled state and protruding the second bridge with respect to the game board, the second ball entry possibility for entering the game ball into the second winning hole via the second bridge a game machine characterized by switching to a state in which a ball cannot be entered by immersing the first bridge and the second bridge in the game board.

According to feature E1 of the present invention group, the first bridge is inclined so as to descend toward the first prize winning port side, so that the bridge drive unit protrudes the first bridge with respect to the game board. By doing so, it is possible to switch to the first ball-enterable state in which the game ball is entered into the first winning hole via the first bridge. Since the second bridge inclines so as to descend toward the second winning hole side, the bridge drive unit protrudes the second bridge with respect to the game board to can be switched to a second ball-enterable state in which a game ball is entered into the second winning hole. Further, since the first prize winning port and the second prize winning port are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge driving section immerses the first bridge and the second bridge with respect to the game board. By doing so, you can switch to the state where you cannot enter the ball. Therefore, the gaming machine can diversify the movement of the game ball flowing down the game area, and can improve the attention of the player to the game.
Further, the first prize winning port is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction, and the second prize winning port is provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction. , by distributing the game balls in the horizontal left and right directions, the balls enter the first winning hole or the second winning hole. Therefore, in order to switch between the first ball-enterable state, the second ball-enterable state, and the ball-enterable state, for example, compared to the case of adopting a mechanism such as an opening and closing door, the ball-entering state switching means is , the space of the game area can be effectively used for installation.

Feature E2.
In the gaming machine described in feature E1 of the invention group,
A gaming machine, wherein the first bridge and the second bridge are provided so as to cross each other.

According to the feature E2 of the group of inventions, the first bridge and the second bridge are provided so as to cross each other, so if they are provided so as not to cross each other (for example, vertically offset provided), the ball entry state switching means can be installed by effectively utilizing the space of the game area.

Feature E3.
In the gaming machine described in feature E2 of the invention group,
The first bridge and the second bridge have slits formed along the projecting/retracting direction, the slit of the first bridge (slit 5124) and the slit of the second bridge (slit 5224). ) are provided so as to intersect each other by engaging the first bridge and the second bridge along the projecting/retracting direction.

According to feature E3 of the invention group, the first bridge and the second bridge are configured such that the slit of the first bridge and the slit of the second bridge are aligned in the projecting/retracting direction of the first bridge and the second bridge. By interlocking along, the construction of the first bridge and the second bridge can be simplified.

Feature E4.
In the gaming machine described in feature E2 of the invention group,
The first bridge and the second bridge are composed of a one-side bridge piece (one-side bridge piece 5221K) located on one side in the horizontal direction of either one of the first bridge and the second bridge, and a horizontal bridge piece 5221K. A gaming machine characterized by being provided so as to intersect by being divided into the other side bridge piece (the other side bridge piece 5222K) located on the other side of the direction.

According to feature E4 of the group of inventions, the first bridge and the second bridge are provided so as to intersect by dividing either one of the first bridge and the second bridge. , the configuration of the first bridge and the second bridge can be simplified.

Feature E5.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature E1 to feature E4 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine, wherein a width of protrusion of the first bridge and the second bridge from the gaming board is set to be narrower than a diameter of a game ball.

According to feature E5 of the present invention group, the width of protrusion of the first bridge and the second bridge from the game board is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball. The first bridge and the second bridge can be quickly immersed in the game board as compared with the width setting. Therefore, the bridge drive unit, immediately after the first bridge or the second bridge is immersed in the game board, the first winning opening or the second winning opening in the first bridge or the second bridge It is possible to suppress over-winning that causes the game ball that has been guided to enter the first winning port or the second winning port.

Feature E6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature E1 to feature E4 of the present invention group,
At least one of the first bridge and the second bridge has a fall prevention portion (fall prevention portion 5125 , 5225).

According to feature E6 of the group of inventions, at least one of the first bridge and the second bridge is a fall prevention device that prevents the game ball from falling in the projecting direction of the first bridge and the second bridge. Since the part is provided, it is possible to reliably enter the game ball into at least one of the first winning hole and the second winning hole.

Feature E7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature E1 to feature E6 of the present invention group,
the first prize winning opening having a cover (covers 511, 511B) provided so as to open to one side in the horizontal direction;
and the second winning opening having a cover (covers 521, 521B) provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction,
A gaming machine, wherein the upper surface of the cover protrudes in the opening direction from the lower surface of the cover.

According to feature E7 of the group of the present invention, the upper surface of the cover protrudes further toward the opening than the lower surface of the cover. A game ball is less likely to erroneously enter the first winning hole or the second winning hole as compared with the case where the shape does not protrude.

According to the characteristic group E of the present invention, it is possible to diversify the movement of the game ball flowing down the game area, and to improve the attention of the player to the game. You can solve problems.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine equipped with a display device that variably displays a plurality of patterns. This gaming machine has a shooting means for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board, and when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means), a jackpot lottery or the like is performed. An internal lottery is executed, and the variable display of patterns is started. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns on the display device, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

However, the starting ball entry means and the entry of the game ball into the variable winning device follow a fixed path from the vertically upward side to the vertically downward side, and the movement of the game ball becomes monotonous. , there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine) comprising shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board and ball entry means for entering game balls flowing down the game area. 10),
The ball entry means
A first winning opening (first winning opening 51D) provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction;
A second winning opening (second winning opening 52D) provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction,
The game machine is
A first ball-enterable state in which a game ball enters the first winning hole, a second ball-enterable state in which a game ball enters the second winning hole, and the first winning hole and a ball entry state switching means for switching between a state in which a game ball is not allowed to enter any of the second winning holes,
The ball entering state switching means is
a bridge (moving bridge bodies 551, 551E) provided between the first prize winning port and the second prize winning port;
A bridge drive unit (bridge drive unit 553) for moving the bridge along the horizontal direction,
The bridge is
a first guide surface (first guide surface 551a) that slopes downward toward the first winning opening side;
A second guide surface (second guide surface 551b) that slopes downward toward the second winning opening side,
The bridge drive unit moves the bridge to the first winning hole side, thereby entering the game ball into the first winning hole via the first guide surface. By switching to the enabled state and moving the bridge to the second winning hole side, the second ball entering possibility for entering the game ball into the second winning hole via the second guide surface state, and by moving the bridge to the center of the first prize winning port and the second prize winning port, the state is switched to the state in which balls cannot be entered.

According to feature F1 of the present invention group, since the first guide surface is inclined so as to descend toward the first prize winning opening side, the bridge driving section moves the bridge toward the first winning opening side. By doing so, it is possible to switch to the first ball-enterable state in which the game ball is entered into the first winning hole via the first guide surface. Since the second guide surface inclines so as to descend toward the second prize winning opening side, the bridge driving section moves the bridge toward the second winning opening side to move the second guide surface. It is possible to switch to a second ball-enterable state in which a game ball is entered into the second winning hole through the game ball. Further, since the first prize winning port and the second prize winning port are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge driving section places the bridge in the center of the first prize winning port and the second prize winning port. By moving it, it is possible to switch to the state where it is impossible to enter the ball. Therefore, the gaming machine can diversify the movement of the game ball flowing down the game area, and can improve the attention of the player to the game.
Further, the first prize winning port is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction, and the second prize winning port is provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction. , by distributing the game balls in the horizontal left and right directions, the balls enter the first winning hole or the second winning hole. Therefore, in order to switch between the first ball-enterable state, the second ball-enterable state, and the ball-enterable state, for example, compared to the case of adopting a mechanism such as an opening and closing door, the ball-entering state switching means is , the space of the game area can be effectively used for installation.

Feature F2.
In the gaming machine described in feature F1 of the invention group,
The ball entering state switching means is
a first guide plate (first guide plate 554) that guides the game ball falling toward the second guide surface to the first guide surface;
A second guide plate (second guide plate 555) that guides the game ball falling toward the first guide surface to the second guide surface,
The bridge drive unit protrudes the first guide plate with respect to the game board and retracts the second guide plate with respect to the game board, thereby moving the first guide plate and the second guide plate. Switching to the first ball-enterable state in which a game ball enters the first winning hole via one guide surface, protruding the second guide plate with respect to the game board, and the second guide plate. By immersing one guide plate into the game board, a game ball enters the second winning hole via the second guide plate and the second guide surface. A game machine characterized by switching to a state in which a ball can be entered, and by causing the first guide plate and the second guide plate to sink into the game board, thereby switching to the state in which a ball cannot be entered.

According to the feature F2 of the group of inventions, the first guide plate guides the game balls falling toward the second guide surface to the first guide surface, so that the bridge drive section guides the first guide plate to the first guide surface. By protruding from the game board, it is possible to switch to the first ball-enterable state in which the game ball is entered into the first winning hole via the first guide plate and the first guide surface. Since the second guide plate guides the game ball falling toward the first guide surface to the second guide surface, the bridge driving section protrudes the second guide plate from the game board, It is possible to switch to a second ball-enterable state in which a game ball is entered into the second winning hole via the second guide plate and the second guide surface. Further, since the first prize winning port and the second prize winning port are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge driving section moves the first guide plate and the second guide plate to the game board. By immersing it in the ball, you can switch to the state where it is impossible to enter. Therefore, the ball-entering state switching means can guide the game ball falling toward the second guide surface to the first guide surface via the first guide plate in the first ball-enterable state, In the second ball-enterable state, game balls falling toward the first guide surface can be guided to the second guide surface via the second guide plate.

Feature F3.
In the gaming machine described in feature F2 of the invention group,
The ball-entering state switching means moves the bridge toward the first winning hole side to project the first guide plate with respect to the game board and move the second guide plate to the game board. By immersing the bridge in the board and moving the bridge toward the second prize winning opening, the second guide plate is projected with respect to the game board, and the first guide plate is moved to the game board. A game machine characterized by comprising a link mechanism (link mechanism 556) for immersing in the.

According to feature F3 of the group of inventions, the ball-entering state switching means includes a link mechanism for interlocking the first guide plate and the second guide plate to protrude and retract by moving the bridge. Power sources such as motors and actuators can be dispensed with.

Feature F4.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3 of the present invention group,
the first prize winning opening having a cover (cover 511) provided so as to open to one side in the horizontal direction;
The second winning opening having a cover (cover 521) provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction,
A gaming machine, wherein the upper surface of the cover protrudes in the opening direction from the lower surface of the cover.

According to the feature F4 of the group of inventions, the upper surface of the cover is shaped to protrude further toward the opening than the lower surface of the cover. A game ball is less likely to erroneously enter the first winning hole or the second winning hole as compared with the case where the shape does not protrude.

According to the feature group F of the present invention, it is possible to diversify the movement of the game ball flowing down the game area, and to improve the attention of the player to the game. You can solve problems.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine equipped with a display device that variably displays a plurality of patterns. This gaming machine has a shooting means for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board, and when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means), a jackpot lottery or the like is performed. An internal lottery is executed, and the variable display of patterns is started. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns on the display device, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

However, the starting ball entry means and the entry of the game ball into the variable winning device follow a fixed path from the vertically upward side to the vertically downward side, and the movement of the game ball becomes monotonous. , there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine) comprising shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board and ball entry means for entering game balls flowing down the game area. 10),
The ball entry means
A first winning opening (first winning openings 51F, 51G) provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction;
A second winning opening (second winning openings 52F, 52G) provided on the lower side in the vertical direction of the first winning opening and opened to one side in the horizontal direction,
The game machine is
A first ball-enterable state in which a game ball enters the first winning hole, a second ball-enterable state in which a game ball enters the second winning hole, and the first winning hole and a ball-entering state switching means for switching between a ball-entering disabled state in which a game ball is not allowed to enter any of the second winning holes.

According to feature G1 of the present invention group, the gaming machine has a first ball-enterable state in which a game ball enters a first winning hole, and a second state in which a game ball enters a second winning hole. Since a ball entry state switching means is provided for switching between a ball entry possible state and a ball entry impossible state in which the game ball is not allowed to enter either the first prize winning port or the second prize winning port, the ball flows down the game area. The movement of the game ball can be diversified, and the attention of the player to the game can be improved.
Also, the first prize winning port and the second prize winning port are provided so as to open to one side in the horizontal direction. The second prize winning port is provided vertically below the first prize winning port. Therefore, since the direction of the game ball flowing down to enter the first winning hole and the second winning hole becomes the same direction, the ball entering state switching means selects the first ball entering possible state or the second entering state. When switching to the ball-enabled state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which of the first winning hole and the second winning hole the game ball enters. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature G2.
In the gaming machine described in feature G1 of the invention group,
The ball entering state switching means is
A first bridge (upper bridge 571) provided so as to be able to protrude from the game board and inclined so as to descend toward the first winning opening side;
a second bridge (lower bridge 572) which is provided so as to be protrusive and retractable with respect to the game board and is inclined so as to descend toward the second winning opening side;
A bridge drive unit (bridge drive unit 573) that causes the first bridge and the second bridge to project and sink into the game board,
The bridge drive unit protrudes the first bridge with respect to the game board and retracts the second bridge with respect to the game board, thereby causing the first bridge to move through the first bridge. Switching to the first ball entry possible state in which a game ball is entered into the winning opening of the above, protruding the second bridge with respect to the game board, and immersing the first bridge with respect to the game board by switching to the second ball-enterable state in which a game ball is entered into the second winning hole via the second bridge, and the first bridge and the second bridge are switched to the game A game machine characterized by switching to the ball-entering impossible state by immersing the player in the board.

According to feature G2 of the present invention group, the first bridge is inclined so as to descend toward the first prize winning port side, so that the bridge drive unit protrudes the first bridge with respect to the game board. By doing so, it is possible to switch to the first ball-enterable state in which the game ball is entered into the first winning hole via the first bridge. Since the second bridge inclines so as to descend toward the second winning hole side, the bridge drive unit protrudes the second bridge with respect to the game board to can be switched to a second ball-enterable state in which a game ball is entered into the second winning hole. Further, since the first prize winning port and the second prize winning port are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge driving section immerses the first bridge and the second bridge with respect to the game board. By doing so, you can switch to the state where you cannot enter the ball. Therefore, the gaming machine can simplify the configuration of the ball entering state switching means.

Feature G3.
In the gaming machine described in feature G2 of the invention group,
A gaming machine, wherein a width of protrusion of the first bridge and the second bridge from the gaming board is set to be narrower than a diameter of a game ball.

According to feature G3 of the present invention group, the width of protrusion of the first bridge and the second bridge from the game board is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball. The first bridge and the second bridge can be quickly immersed in the game board as compared with the width setting. Therefore, the bridge drive unit, immediately after the first bridge or the second bridge is immersed in the game board, the first winning opening or the second winning opening in the first bridge or the second bridge It is possible to suppress over-winning that causes the game ball that has been guided to enter the first winning port or the second winning port.

Feature G4.
In the gaming machine described in feature G2 or feature G3 of the invention group,
At least one of the first bridge and the second bridge is provided with a fall prevention portion that prevents the game ball from falling in the projection direction side of the first bridge and the second bridge. and

According to feature G4 of the group of inventions, at least one of the first bridge and the second bridge is a fall prevention device that prevents the game ball from falling in the projecting direction of the first bridge and the second bridge. Since the part is provided, it is possible to reliably enter the game ball into at least one of the first winning hole and the second winning hole.

Feature G5.
In the gaming machine described in feature G1 of the invention group,
The ball entering state switching means is
A bridge (elevating bridge 56) provided on one side in the horizontal direction of the first winning opening and the second winning opening;
A bridge drive unit (bridge drive unit 563) that raises and lowers the bridge,
The bridge is
A first elevating state in which the game ball is led to the first winning opening by tilting downward toward the first winning opening;
A second elevation state in which the game ball is guided to the second winning opening by tilting downward toward the second winning opening;
A third lifting state in which game balls are not guided to the first winning hole and the second winning hole,
The bridge drive unit switches to the first ball entry possible state in which a game ball enters the first winning hole via the bridge by setting the bridge to the first elevation state, By setting the bridge to the second elevating state, the bridge is switched to the second ball-enterable state in which a game ball enters the second winning hole via the bridge, and the bridge is moved to the third state. A game machine characterized by switching to the ball-entering-impossible state by setting the up-and-down state.

According to feature G5 of the present invention group, in the first elevation state, the bridge inclines so as to descend toward the first winning opening side and guides game balls to the first winning opening. By setting the bridge to the first lifting state, the driving section can switch to the first ball-enterable state in which the game ball enters the first winning hole via the bridge. In the second elevation state, the bridge inclines so as to descend toward the second prize winning port side and guides the game ball to the second prize winning port side, so that the bridge drive unit moves the bridge to the second lifting and lowering. By setting it to the state, it is possible to switch to the second ball-enterable state in which the game ball is entered into the second winning hole via the bridge. In addition, since the bridge does not guide the game balls to the first winning opening and the second winning opening in the third lifting state, the bridge driving section sets the bridge to the third lifting state to enter the game ball. You can switch to the ball disabled state. Therefore, the gaming machine can simplify the configuration of the ball entering state switching means.

According to the characteristic group G of the present invention, the movement of the game ball flowing down the game area can be diversified, and the player's attention to the game can be improved. You can solve problems.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine equipped with a display device that variably displays a plurality of patterns. This gaming machine has a shooting means for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board, and when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means), a jackpot lottery or the like is performed. An internal lottery is executed, and the variable display of patterns is started. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns on the display device, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

However, the starting ball entry means and the entry of the game ball into the variable winning device follow a fixed path from the vertically upward side to the vertically downward side, and the movement of the game ball becomes monotonous. , there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered.

<Characteristic group H>
Feature H1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine) comprising shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board and ball entry means for entering game balls flowing down the game area. 10),
The ball entry means
A first winning opening (first winning opening 51) provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction;
A second winning opening (second winning opening 52) provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction,
The game machine is
A first ball-enterable state in which a game ball enters the first winning hole, a second ball-enterable state in which a game ball enters the second winning hole, and the first winning hole and a ball entry state switching means for switching between a state in which a game ball is not allowed to enter any of the second winning holes,
The ball entering state switching means is
a bridge (rotating bridge 541) provided between the first winning opening and the second winning opening;
A bridge drive unit (rotation drive unit 543) that rotates the bridge,
The bridge is
A first rotation state (left rotation state) that inclines so as to descend toward the first winning opening side and guides the game ball to the first winning opening;
A second rotation state (right rotation state) that tilts downward toward the second winning opening and guides the game ball to the second winning opening,
By setting the bridge to the first rotating state, the bridge drive unit switches to the first ball entering possible state for entering a game ball into the first winning hole via the bridge. , by setting the bridge to the second rotating state, switching to the second ball-enterable state in which a game ball is entered into the second winning hole via the bridge. game machine.

According to feature H1 of the present invention group, in the first rotating state, the bridge is tilted so as to descend toward the side of the first winning opening, and guides the game ball to the first winning opening. By setting the bridge to the first rotating state, the bridge driving section can switch to the first ball-enterable state for entering the game ball into the first winning hole via the bridge. In the second rotating state, the bridge inclines so as to descend toward the second winning hole side and guides the game ball to the second winning hole side. By setting to the rotating state, it is possible to switch to the second ball-enterable state in which the game ball is entered into the second winning hole via the bridge. Therefore, the gaming machine can diversify the movement of the game ball flowing down the game area, and can improve the attention of the player to the game.
Further, the first prize winning port is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction, and the second prize winning port is provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction. , by distributing the game balls in the horizontal left and right directions, the balls enter the first winning hole or the second winning hole. Therefore, in order to switch between the first ball-enterable state, the second ball-enterable state, and the ball-enterable state, for example, compared to the case of adopting a mechanism such as an opening and closing door, the ball-entering state switching means is , the space of the game area can be effectively used for installation.

Feature H2.
In the gaming machine described in feature H1 of the invention group,
The ball entering state switching means is
The bridge (rotating bridge 541) provided so as to be able to project and retract with respect to the game board;
The bridge driving section (rotating driving section 543 and advance/retreat driving section 544) that rotates the bridge after projecting and retracting the bridge with respect to the game board and projecting the bridge with respect to the game board. and
The bridge is
After protruding from the game board, a first rotation state (left rotation state) in which the game ball is guided downward toward the first winning opening by inclining toward the first winning opening )When,
After protruding from the game board, a second rotation state (right rotation state) in which the game ball is guided downward toward the second winning opening by inclining toward the second winning opening ) and
The bridge drive unit projects the bridge with respect to the game board, and then sets the bridge in the first rotational state, thereby driving game balls into the first winning hole via the bridge. After switching to the first ball-enterable state in which the ball is entered, and projecting the bridge with respect to the game board, by setting the bridge to the second rotating state, through the bridge It is characterized by switching to the second ball-enterable state in which a game ball enters the second winning hole, and switching to the ball-enterable state by immersing the bridge in the game board. game machine.

According to feature H2 of the present invention group, the bridge protrudes with respect to the game board in the first rotating state, and then tilts so as to descend toward the first winning opening side. Since the game ball is guided to the winning hole, the bridge driving part sets the bridge to the first rotating state, thereby allowing the game ball to enter the first winning hole via the bridge. state can be switched. In the second rotating state, the bridge protrudes from the game board and then tilts downward toward the second winning hole to guide the game ball to the second winning hole. By setting the bridge to the second rotating state, the driving section can switch to the second ball-enterable state for entering the game ball into the second winning hole via the bridge. In addition, since the first prize winning port and the second prize winning port are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge driving section can move the bridge into the game board so that the ball cannot be entered. can be switched to Therefore, the bridge driving section can prevent the path of the game ball from being obstructed when switching to the non-enterable state.

Feature H3.
In the gaming machine described in feature H1 of the invention group,
The bridge driving unit is characterized by switching to the ball-entering disabled state by rotating the bridge so as not to allow the game ball to enter either the first winning hole or the second winning hole. Amusement machine.

According to the feature H3 of the present invention group, the bridge drive unit rotates the bridge so as not to allow the game ball to enter either the first winning hole or the second winning hole, thereby causing the ball entry impossible state. can be switched to Therefore, the bridge driving section can switch the bridge to the ball-entry disabled state without adding a new structure.

Feature H4.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature H1 to feature H3 of the invention group,
The ball-entering state switching means switches between the first ball-enterable state, the second ball-enterable state, the ball-enterable state, and a holding state for holding a game ball,
The bridge is
A horizontal state in which the game ball is held without being guided to the first winning hole and the second winning hole,
The gaming machine, wherein the bridge drive section switches the bridge to the holding state by setting the bridge to the horizontal state.

According to the feature H4 of the group of inventions, the bridge holds the game balls in the horizontal state without guiding the game balls to the first winning hole and the second winning hole, so the bridge drive unit sets the bridge to the horizontal state. By doing so, it is possible to switch to a holding state in which the game ball is held. Therefore, the gaming machine can diversify the functions of the ball entering state switching means.

Feature H5.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4 of the invention group,
A game machine, wherein the width of the bridge projecting from the game board is set to be narrower than the diameter of a game ball.

According to feature H5 of the present invention group, the width of the bridge projecting from the game board is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball. By comparison, bridges can be quickly immersed in the game board. Therefore, immediately after the bridge is immersed in the game board, the bridge drive unit moves the game balls that have been guided to the first winning hole or the second winning hole by the bridge to the first winning hole or the second winning hole. It is possible to suppress over-winning that causes the winning opening to win.

Feature H6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature H1 to feature H5 of the invention group,
The bridge is characterized by comprising a fall prevention portion that prevents the game ball from falling toward the projecting direction side of the bridge.

According to feature H6 of the present invention group, the bridge is provided with a fall prevention portion that prevents game balls from falling in the projecting direction of the bridge. A game ball can be entered.

Feature H7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H6 of the invention group,
the first prize winning opening having a cover (cover 511) provided so as to open to one side in the horizontal direction;
The second winning opening having a cover (cover 521) provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction,
A gaming machine, wherein the upper surface of the cover protrudes in the opening direction from the lower surface of the cover.

According to feature H7 of the group of inventions, the upper surface of the cover protrudes further toward the opening than the lower surface of the cover. A game ball is less likely to erroneously enter the first winning hole or the second winning hole as compared with the case where the shape does not protrude.

According to the characteristic group H of the present invention, it is possible to diversify the movement of the game ball flowing down the game area, and to improve the attention of the player to the game. You can solve problems.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine equipped with a display device that variably displays a plurality of patterns. This gaming machine has a shooting means for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board, and when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means), a jackpot lottery or the like is performed. An internal lottery is executed, and the variable display of patterns is started. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns on the display device, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

However, the starting ball entry means and the entry of the game ball into the variable winning device follow a fixed path from the vertically upward side to the vertically downward side, and the movement of the game ball becomes monotonous. , there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered.

<Characteristic group I>
Features I1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine) comprising shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board and ball entry means for entering game balls flowing down the game area. 10),
The ball entry means is
A first winning opening (first winning openings 51, 51B, 51D) provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction;
A second winning opening (second winning openings 52, 52A, 52B, 52D) provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction,
The game machine is
A first ball-enterable state in which a game ball enters the first winning hole, a second ball-enterable state in which a game ball enters the second winning hole, and the first winning hole and a state in which a game ball is not allowed to enter any of the second winning openings, and a ball entering state switching means provided between the first winning opening and the second winning opening. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature I1 of the present invention group, the gaming machine has a first ball-enterable state in which a game ball enters the first winning hole, and a second state in which a game ball enters the second winning hole. A ball entering state switching means for switching between a ball entering possible state and a ball entering impossible state in which the game ball is not allowed to enter either the first winning hole or the second winning hole is provided, so that the game ball flows down the game area. The movement of the player can be diversified, and the player's attention to the game can be improved.
Further, the first prize winning port is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction, and the second prize winning port is provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction. , by distributing the game balls in the horizontal left and right directions, the balls enter the first winning hole or the second winning hole. Therefore, in order to switch between the first ball-enterable state, the second ball-enterable state, and the ball-enterable state, for example, compared to the case where a mechanism such as an opening/closing door is employed, the ball-entering state switching means is , the space of the game area can be effectively used for installation.

Feature I2.
In the gaming machine described in feature I1 of the invention group,
The ball entering state switching means is
A first derivative (first bridge 512, 512B) that guides the game ball to the first winning hole;
A second derivative (second bridge 522, 522B) that guides the game ball to the second winning hole;
A derivative driving unit (first bridge driving unit 514, 514B and second bridge driving unit 524, 524B) that independently drives the first inductor and the second inductor,
The induction drive unit drives the first induction to switch to the first ball entry possible state in which a game ball enters the first winning hole, and drives the second induction. A gaming machine characterized by switching to the second ball-enterable state in which a game ball is allowed to enter the second prize-winning hole.

According to feature I2 of the present invention group, the induction drive unit switches to the first entry possible state in which the game ball enters the first winning hole by driving the first induction, and the second By driving the derivative, it is possible to switch to the second ball-enterable state in which the game ball is allowed to enter the second winning hole. Therefore, the gaming machine can diversify the movement of the game ball flowing down the game area, and can improve the attention of the player to the game.

Feature I3.
In the gaming machine described in feature I2 of the invention group,
The ball entering state switching means is
The first derivative (first bridge 512, 512B) which is provided so as to be able to protrude with respect to the game board and is inclined so as to descend toward the first prize winning opening side;
The second derivative (second bridge 522, 522B) which is provided so as to be protrusive and retractable with respect to the game board and is inclined so as to descend toward the second winning opening side;
The derivative driving unit (first bridge driving unit 514, 514B and second bridge driving unit 524, 524B) that causes the first derivative and the second derivative to protrude with respect to the game board,
The derivative drive unit projects the first derivative with respect to the game board, thereby entering the game ball into the first winning hole via the first derivative. By switching to the enabled state and protruding the second derivative with respect to the game board, the second ball entry possible for allowing a game ball to enter the second winning hole via the second derivative. state, and by immersing the first derivative and the second derivative in the game board, the state is changed to the state in which a ball cannot be entered.

According to feature I3 of the group of the present invention, the first derivative inclines so as to descend toward the first prize winning port side, so that the derivative drive unit protrudes the first derivative with respect to the game board. By doing so, it is possible to switch to the first ball-enterable state in which the game ball is entered into the first winning hole via the first derivative. Since the second derivative inclines so as to descend toward the second prize winning port side, the derivative drive unit protrudes the second derivative with respect to the game board, thereby can be switched to a second ball-enterable state in which a game ball is entered into the second winning hole. In addition, since the first prize winning port and the second prize winning port are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the derivative driving section immerses the first derivative and the second derivative with respect to the game board. By doing so, you can switch to the state where you cannot enter the ball. Therefore, the gaming machine can diversify the movement of the game ball flowing down the game area, and can improve the attention of the player to the game.

Feature I4.
In the gaming machine described in feature I3 of the invention group,
A gaming machine, wherein the first derivative and the second derivative are provided so as to cross each other.

According to feature I4 of the group of the present invention, the first inductor and the second inductor are provided so as to intersect, so if they are provided so as not to intersect (for example, offset in the vertical direction). provided), the ball entry state switching means can be installed by effectively utilizing the space of the game area.

Feature I5.
In the gaming machine described in feature I1 of the invention group,
The ball entering state switching means is
A switching derivative (moving bridge body 551 and rotating bridge 541) that guides the game ball to either the first winning hole or the second winning hole;
A switching induction driving unit (bridge driving unit 553, rotation driving unit 543, and forward/backward driving unit 544) that drives the switching induction,
The switching induction drive unit drives the switching induction to enter the first ball entry possible state in which the game ball enters the first winning hole, or enters the game ball into the second winning hole. A game machine characterized by switching to the second ball-enterable state in which a ball is allowed to enter.

According to feature I5 of the group of the present invention, the switching induction driving unit drives the switching induction to enter the first ball entry possible state or the second winning opening for entering the game ball into the first winning opening. It is possible to switch to a second ball-enterable state in which a game ball is allowed to enter. Therefore, the gaming machine can diversify the movement of the game ball flowing down the game area, and can improve the attention of the player to the game.

Feature I6.
In the gaming machine described in feature I5 of the invention group,
The ball entering state switching means is
The switching induction driving unit (bridge driving unit 553) for moving the switching induction (moving bridge main body 551) along the horizontal direction,
The switch derivative is
a first guide surface (first guide surface 551a) that slopes downward toward the first winning opening side;
A second guide surface (second guide surface 551b) that slopes downward toward the second winning opening side,
The switching induction driving section moves the switching induction to the first winning opening side to enter the game ball into the first winning opening via the first guide surface. By switching to the ball entry possible state and moving the switching derivative to the second winning hole side, the second game ball enters the second winning hole via the second guide surface. A gaming machine characterized by switching to a ball-enterable state and switching to the ball-enterable state by moving the switching derivative to the center of the first prize winning port and the second prize winning port.

According to feature I6 of the present invention group, the first guide surface is inclined so as to descend toward the first prize winning opening side, so that the switching induction driving section moves toward the first winning opening side. By moving , it is possible to switch to the first ball-enterable state in which the game ball is entered into the first winning hole via the first guide surface. Since the second guide surface is inclined so as to descend toward the second prize winning opening side, the switching induction driving section moves the switching induction toward the second winning opening side, whereby the second guide surface is inclined downward. It is possible to switch to the second ball-enterable state in which the game ball is entered into the second winning hole via the surface. Further, since the first prize winning port and the second prize winning port are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the switching induction drive section switches to the center of the first prize winning port and the second prize winning port. By moving the derivative, it is possible to switch to the non-enterable state. Therefore, the gaming machine can diversify the movement of the game ball flowing down the game area, and can improve the attention of the player to the game.

Feature I7.
In the gaming machine described in feature I6 of the invention group,
The ball entering state switching means is
a first guide plate (first guide plate 554) that guides the game ball falling toward the second guide surface to the first guide surface;
A second guide plate (second guide plate 555) that guides the game ball falling toward the first guide surface to the second guide surface,
The switching guide drive unit protrudes the first guide plate with respect to the game board and retracts the second guide plate with respect to the game board, thereby moving the first guide plate and the Switching to the first ball-enterable state in which a game ball enters the first winning hole via the first guide surface, protruding the second guide plate with respect to the game board, By immersing the first guide plate into the game board, the second guide plate enters the game ball into the second winning hole via the second guide plate and the second guide surface. A game machine characterized by switching to a state where a ball can be entered, and by causing the first guide plate and the second guide plate to sink into the game board, thereby switching to the state where a ball cannot be entered.

According to feature I7 of the present invention group, the first guide plate guides the game ball falling toward the second guide surface to the first guide surface. projecting from the game board, it is possible to switch to the first ball-enterable state in which the game ball is entered into the first winning hole via the first guide plate and the first guide surface. Since the second guide plate guides the game ball falling toward the first guide surface to the second guide surface, the switching induction drive section protrudes the second guide plate with respect to the game board. , can be switched to a second ball-enterable state in which a game ball is allowed to enter the second winning hole via the second guide plate and the second guide surface. In addition, since the first prize winning port and the second prize winning port are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the switching induction driving section moves the first guide plate and the second guide plate to the game board. By immersing yourself in it, you can switch to a state where you cannot enter the ball. Therefore, the ball-entering state switching means can guide the game ball falling toward the second guide surface to the first guide surface via the first guide plate in the first ball-enterable state, In the second ball-enterable state, game balls falling toward the first guide surface can be guided to the second guide surface via the second guide plate.

Feature I8.
In the gaming machine described in feature I5 of the invention group,
The ball entering state switching means is
A switching induction drive unit (rotation drive unit 543) for rotating the switching induction (rotation bridge 541) is provided,
The switch derivative is
A first rotation state (left rotation state) that inclines so as to descend toward the first winning opening side and guides the game ball to the first winning opening;
A second rotation state (right rotation state) that tilts downward toward the second winning opening and guides the game ball to the second winning opening,
The switching induction driving section sets the switching induction to the first rotational state, thereby enabling the first ball entry that allows a game ball to enter the first winning hole via the switching induction. state, and by setting the switching derivative to the second rotating state, switching to the second ball-enterable state in which a game ball enters the second winning hole via the switching derivative. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature I8 of the group of the present invention, in the first rotating state, the switch guide inclines so as to descend toward the side of the first winning opening, and guides the game ball to the first winning opening. The switching induction drive unit can switch to the first ball entry possible state for entering the game ball into the first winning hole via the switching induction by setting the switching induction to the first rotating state. can. In the second rotating state, the switching induction is inclined so as to descend toward the second winning opening and guide the game ball to the second winning opening. By setting to the second rotating state, it is possible to switch to the second ball entering possible state in which the game ball enters the second winning hole via the switching induction. Therefore, the gaming machine can diversify the movement of the game ball flowing down the game area, and can improve the attention of the player to the game.

Feature I9.
In the gaming machine described in feature I8 of the invention group,
The ball entering state switching means is
The switching inductor (rotating bridge 541) provided so as to be able to project and retract with respect to the game board;
The switching derivative is projected and retracted with respect to the game board, and after the switching derivative is projected with respect to the game board, the switching derivative driving unit (rotational driving unit 543 and advance/retreat) that rotates the switching derivative Drive unit 544),
The switch derivative is
After protruding from the game board, a first rotation state (left rotation state) in which the game ball is guided downward toward the first winning opening by inclining toward the first winning opening )When,
After protruding from the game board, a second rotation state (right rotation state) in which the game ball is guided downward toward the second winning opening by inclining toward the second winning opening ) and
The switching inducer drive unit projects the switching inducer with respect to the game board, and then sets the switching inducer to the first rotating state, thereby achieving the first winning through the switching inducer. By switching to the first ball-enterable state for entering a game ball into the mouth, protruding the switching derivative from the game board, and then setting the switching derivative to the second rotating state. , by switching to the second ball-enterable state in which a game ball enters the second winning hole via the switching derivative, and by immersing the switching derivative into the game board, the ball cannot be entered. A game machine characterized by switching between states.

According to feature I9 of the present invention group, in the first rotating state, the switching induction protrudes with respect to the game board, and then tilts so as to descend toward the first winning opening side. Since the game ball is guided to the winning opening, the switching induction driving section sets the switching induction to the first rotating state to enter the game ball into the first winning opening via the switching induction. can be switched to a state where the ball can be entered. In the second rotating state, the switching guide protrudes from the game board and then tilts downward toward the second winning opening to guide the game ball to the second winning opening. The switching induction drive unit can switch to the second ball entry possible state for entering the game ball into the second winning hole via the switching induction by setting the switching induction to the second rotating state. . In addition, since the first prize winning port and the second prize winning port are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the switching induction driving section immerses the switching induction with respect to the game board so that a ball can be entered. Can be switched to disabled state. Therefore, the switching induction driving section can prevent the flow path of the game ball from being blocked when switching to the non-enterable state.

Feature I10.
In the gaming machine described in feature I8 of the invention group,
The switching induction drive unit switches the switching induction to the non-enterable state by rotating the switching induction so as not to enter the game ball into either the first winning hole or the second winning hole. A game machine characterized by

According to feature I10 of the present invention group, the switching induction drive unit rotates the switching induction so that the game ball does not enter either the first winning hole or the second winning hole, thereby Can be switched to disabled state. Therefore, the switching induction driving section can switch the switching induction to the non-enterable state without adding a new structure.

According to the characteristic group I of the present invention, the movement of the game ball flowing down the game area can be diversified, and the attention of the player to the game can be improved. You can solve problems.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine equipped with a display device that variably displays a plurality of patterns. This gaming machine has a shooting means for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board, and when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means), a jackpot lottery or the like is performed. An internal lottery is executed, and the variable display of patterns is started. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns on the display device, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

However, the starting ball entry means and the entry of the game ball into the variable winning device follow a fixed path from the vertically upward side to the vertically downward side, and the movement of the game ball becomes monotonous. , there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered.

<Characteristic group J>
Feature J1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine) comprising shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board and ball entry means for entering game balls flowing down the game area. 10),
The ball entry means
a first winning opening (first winning opening 51) provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction;
A second winning opening (second winning openings 52, 52A) provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction,
The game machine is
A first ball-enterable state in which a game ball enters the first winning hole, a second ball-enterable state in which a game ball enters the second winning hole, and the first winning hole and a state in which a game ball is not allowed to enter any of the second winning holes, and a ball entering state switching means provided between the first winning hole and the second winning hole. prepared,
The ball entering state switching means is
A first derivative (first bridge 512) that guides the game ball to the first winning hole;
A second derivative (second bridge 522) that guides the game ball to the second winning hole,
By independently driving the first inductor and the second inductor, the inductor driver (first bridge driver 514 and a second bridge driver 524),
The derivative driving unit enables the first ball entry enabling the game ball to enter the first winning hole by setting the first induction to be valid and setting the second induction to be invalid. By switching to the state, setting the second derivative to valid, and setting the first derivative to invalid, the second ball entry possible state for entering the game ball into the second winning hole A game machine characterized by switching to the ball-entering impossible state by switching and setting the first derivative and the second derivative to be invalid.

According to feature J1 of the present invention group, the gaming machine has a first ball-enterable state in which a game ball enters a first winning hole, and a second state in which a game ball enters a second winning hole. A ball entering state switching means for switching between a ball entering possible state and a ball entering impossible state in which the game ball is not allowed to enter either the first winning hole or the second winning hole is provided, so that the game ball flows down the game area. The movement of the player can be diversified, and the player's attention to the game can be improved.
In addition, the induction driving unit sets the first induction to be valid and sets the second induction to be invalid, thereby switching to the first ball entry possible state in which the game ball enters the first winning hole. , by setting the second derivative to be valid and setting the first derivative to be invalid, switching to the second ball entry possible state for entering the game ball into the second winning hole, the first derivative and By setting the second derivative to be invalid, it is possible to switch to the non-enterable state. In other words, the guide drive unit switches between the first ball-enterable state, the second ball-enterable state, and the ball-enterable state by switching the first guide and the second guide between valid and invalid states. , both the first derivative and the second derivative cannot be effectively set in the first and second enterable states.

Furthermore, the first prize winning port is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction, and the second prize winning port is provided so as to open to the other side in the horizontal direction. , by distributing the game balls in the horizontal left and right directions, the balls enter the first winning hole or the second winning hole. Therefore, in order to switch between the first ball-enterable state, the second ball-enterable state, and the ball-enterable state, for example, compared to the case of adopting a mechanism such as an opening and closing door, the ball-entering state switching means is , the space of the game area can be effectively used for installation.

Feature J2.
In the gaming machine described in feature J1 of the invention group,
The ball entering state switching means is
The first derivative (first bridge 512) which is provided so as to be able to protrude from the game board and which is inclined downward toward the first prize winning port side;
The second derivative (second bridge 522) which is provided so as to be able to protrude from the game board and which is inclined downward toward the second winning opening side;
The derivative driving unit (first bridge driving unit 514 and second bridge driving unit 524) that causes the first derivative and the second derivative to protrude with respect to the game board,
The induction driving section effectively sets the first induction and the second induction by projecting the first induction and the second induction with respect to the game board, and the first induction A gaming machine, wherein the first derivative and the second derivative are disabled by making the derivative and the second derivative immerse themselves in the game board.

According to feature J2 of the group of the present invention, the first derivative inclines so as to descend toward the first winning port side, so that the derivative drive unit protrudes the first derivative with respect to the game board. By allowing the first derivative to be effectively set, it is possible to switch to the first ball-enterable state in which the game ball is allowed to enter the first winning hole via the first derivative. Since the second derivative inclines so as to descend toward the second prize-winning port side, the derivative driving section makes the second derivative effective by projecting the second derivative with respect to the game board. , and can be switched to a second ball-enterable state in which a game ball is entered into the second winning hole via the second derivative. In addition, since the first prize winning port and the second prize winning port are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the derivative driving section immerses the first derivative and the second derivative with respect to the game board. , the first derivative and the second derivative can be disabled and switched to a non-enterable state.

Feature J3.
In the game machine described in feature J2 of the invention group,
A gaming machine, wherein the first derivative and the second derivative are provided so as to cross each other.

According to the feature J3 of the group of the present invention, the first inductor and the second inductor are provided so as to intersect, so when they are provided so as not to intersect (for example, they are offset in the vertical direction). provided), the ball entry state switching means can be installed by effectively utilizing the space of the game area.

Feature J4.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J3 of the present invention group,
The game machine is
Starting ball entry means (upper operation port 36 and lower operation port 37) for entering a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters,
Game state transition means ( a main controller 60);
A variable winning device (variable winning device 5) that shifts to a state in which a game ball can enter when shifting to the specific control state,
The variable winning device is
a small winning ball winning opening (first winning opening 51) as the first winning opening for executing a payout of a predetermined number of winning balls when a game ball enters;
A multi-ball winning hole (second winning hole 52) as the second winning hole that executes the payout of a larger number of winning balls than the small winning ball winning hole when a game ball enters;
and the ball entry state switching means,
The game state transition means switches to the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state by the ball-entering state switching means when the state is changed to the specific control state, and the state is changed to the specific control state. , the game machine is characterized in that, when the state has not shifted to the state where the ball cannot be entered, the state is switched to the state where the ball cannot be entered by the state switching means.

According to feature J4 of the present invention group, the variable winning device includes the ball entering state switching means, so that when the state is shifted to the specific control state, the ball entering state switching means switches to the first ball entering possible state. By switching to , the game ball can be entered into the small winning ball winning opening for executing the payout of a predetermined number of winning balls, and by switching to the second ball entering possible state by the ball entering state switching means, A game ball can be made to enter a multi-prize ball winning hole that pays out a larger number of prize balls than a small-prize ball winning hole. In addition, when the variable winning device does not shift to the specific control state, the ball-entering state switching means switches the ball-entering state to a non-enterable state, thereby allowing the game balls to enter the small-ball winning port and the multi-ball winning port. You can prevent it from entering the ball. Therefore, when the variable prize winning device shifts to the specific control state, the number of prize balls can be changed by switching the ball entering possible state with the ball entering state switching means. Attention can be improved.

Feature J5.
In the gaming machine described in feature J4 of the invention group,
The game state transition means is
a ball-enterable state selection unit (prize ball determination process) that selects either the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state;
When the first ball entry possible state is selected by the ball entry possible state selection unit, the ball entry possible state switching means switches to the first ball entry possible state, and the ball entry possible state selection unit selects the first ball entry possible state. when the second ball-enterable state is selected, the ball-enterable state switching unit (large winning opening opening process) for switching to the second ball-enterable state by the ball-enterable state switching means A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature J5 of the present invention group, when the game state transition means selects the first ball entry possible state by the ball entry possible state selection unit, the ball entry state switching means selects the first ball entry. When the ball entering possible state is switched to the entering possible state and the second entering possible state is selected by the entering possible state selecting unit, the entering possible state switching unit for switching to the second entering possible state by the entering possible state switching means is provided. Since it is provided, the player pays attention to the selection result of the ball-enterable state selection section and expects the second ball-enterable state to occur. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature J6.
In the gaming machine described in feature J5 of the invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the ball-enterable state selection unit executes a lottery to select either the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state based on a predetermined probability. .

According to feature J6 of the present invention group, the ball-enterable state selection unit executes a lottery to select either the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state based on a predetermined probability. Therefore, the player pays attention to the lottery result of the ball-enterable state selection unit, and expects the second ball-enterable state to occur. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature J7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J3 of the present invention group,
The game machine is
Starting ball entry means (upper operation port 36 and lower operation port 37) for entering a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters,
A game in which the game state is shifted from the normal control state to a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. State transition means (main controller 60);
A variable winning device (variable winning device 5A) that shifts to a state in which a game ball can enter when shifting to the specific control state,
The normal control state is
A first gaming state (low probability mode);
A second game state (high probability mode) different from the first game state,
The variable winning device is
a normal winning opening (first winning opening 51) as the first winning opening for executing a payout of a predetermined number of winning balls when a game ball enters;
a specific winning opening (second winning opening 52A) as the second winning opening for setting the normal control state to the second gaming state when a game ball enters;
and the ball entry state switching means,
The game state transition means switches to the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state by the ball-entering state switching means when the state is changed to the specific control state, and the state is changed to the specific control state. , the game machine is characterized in that, when the state has not shifted to the state where the ball cannot be entered, the state is switched to the state where the ball cannot be entered by the state switching means.

According to feature J7 of the present invention group, the variable prize winning device includes the ball entering state switching means, so that when the state is shifted to the specific control state, the first ball entering possible state is established by the entering ball state switching means. By switching to , the game ball can be entered into the normal winning hole for executing the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls, and by switching to the second ball enterable state by the ball entering state switching means, normal control is performed A game ball can enter a specific winning hole that sets the state to the second game state. In addition, the variable winning device prevents the game ball from entering the normal winning opening and the specific winning opening by switching the ball entry state switching means to the non-enterable state when the transition to the specific control state has not occurred. can be Therefore, when the variable winning device shifts to the specific control state, the normal control state can be set to the second game state by switching the ball entry possible state with the ball entry state switching means. It is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature J8.
In the gaming machine described in feature J7 of the invention group,
The game state transition means is
Based on the result of an internal lottery executed when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means, it is determined whether or not to switch to the second ball entry possible state by the ball entry state switching means. a ball entry state determination unit (large winning opening opening process);
When the game ball does not enter the specific winning opening in the specific control state, the normal control state is set to the first game state, and when the game ball enters the specific winning opening, the A game machine comprising a game state setting unit (transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode) for setting the normal control state to the second game state.

According to feature J8 of the present invention group, the game state transition means causes the ball entering state switching means to select the second ball based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means. Since the second ball-enterable state is provided, the player pays attention to the decision result of the ball-enterable state determiner. will be expected to be Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature J9.
In the gaming machine described in feature J7 or feature J8 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the ball-entering state switching means switches the second ball-enterable state to the first ball-enterable state when a game ball enters the specific winning hole.

According to feature J9 of the present invention group, the ball-entering state switching means switches the second ball-enterable state to the first ball-enterable state when the game ball enters the specific winning hole. After entering the game ball into the specific winning hole, the player can enter the game ball into the normal winning hole. Then, the normal prize winning port can execute the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls when a game ball enters. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

According to the characteristic J group of the present invention, it is possible to diversify the movement of the game ball flowing down the game area, and it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game. You can solve problems.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine equipped with a display device that variably displays a plurality of patterns. This gaming machine has a shooting means for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board, and when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means), a jackpot lottery or the like is performed. An internal lottery is executed, and the variable display of patterns is started. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns on the display device, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

However, the starting ball entry means and the entry of the game ball into the variable winning device follow a fixed path from the vertically upward side to the vertically downward side, and the movement of the game ball becomes monotonous. , there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered.

<Characteristic group K>
Features K1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine) comprising shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board and ball entry means for entering game balls flowing down the game area. 10),
The ball entry means
a first winning opening (first winning openings 51, 51B) provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction;
A second winning opening (second winning openings 52, 52B) provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction,
The game machine is
A first ball-enterable state in which a game ball enters the first winning hole, a second ball-enterable state in which a game ball enters the second winning hole, and the first winning hole and a state in which a game ball is not allowed to enter any of the second winning holes, and a ball entering state switching means provided between the first winning hole and the second winning hole. prepared,
The ball entering state switching means is
A first derivative (first bridge 512, 512B) that guides the game ball to the first winning hole;
A second derivative (second bridge 522, 522B) that guides the game ball to the second winning hole;
By independently driving the first inductor and the second inductor, the inductor driver (first bridge driver 514, 514B and a second bridge driver 524, 524B),
The derivative driving unit switches to the first ball-enterable state in which a game ball enters the first winning hole by setting the first derivative to be effective, and activates the second derivative. By setting the game ball to enter the second winning hole, the state is switched to the second ball entry possible state, and by setting the first derivative and the second derivative to invalid, the previous A gaming machine characterized by switching to a state in which a ball cannot be entered.

According to the feature K1 of the present invention group, the gaming machine has a first ball-enterable state in which a game ball enters the first winning hole, and a second entering state in which a game ball enters the second winning hole. A ball entering state switching means for switching between a ball entering possible state and a ball entering impossible state in which the game ball is not allowed to enter either the first winning hole or the second winning hole is provided, so that the game ball flows down the game area. It is possible to diversify the movement of the player and improve the attention of the player to the game.
In addition, the induction drive unit switches to the first ball entry possible state in which the game ball enters the first winning hole by setting the first induction to be effective, and sets the second induction to be effective. By doing so, it is possible to switch to the second ball-enterable state in which the game ball enters the second winning hole, and to switch to the ball-enterable state by setting the first derivative and the second derivative to be invalid. can. In other words, the guide drive unit switches between the first ball-enterable state, the second ball-enterable state, and the ball-enterable state by switching the first guide and the second guide between valid and invalid states. , in the first enterable state and the second enterable state, both the first derivative and the second derivative can be effectively set.

Furthermore, the first prize winning port is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction, and the second prize winning port is provided so as to open to the other side in the horizontal direction. , by distributing the game balls in the horizontal left and right directions, the balls enter the first winning hole or the second winning hole. Therefore, in order to switch between the first ball-enterable state, the second ball-enterable state, and the ball-enterable state, for example, compared to the case of adopting a mechanism such as an opening and closing door, the ball-entering state switching means is , the space of the game area can be effectively used for installation.

Feature K2.
In the gaming machine described in feature K1 of the invention group,
The ball entering state switching means is
The first derivative (the first bridge 512B) which is provided so as to be able to protrude with respect to the game board and is inclined so as to descend toward the first prize winning opening side;
The second derivative (second bridge 522B) which is provided so as to be protrusive and retractable with respect to the game board and is inclined so as to descend toward the second winning opening side;
The derivative driving unit (first bridge driving unit 514B and second bridge driving unit 524B) that causes the first derivative and the second derivative to protrude with respect to the game board,
The induction driving section effectively sets the first induction and the second induction by projecting the first induction and the second induction with respect to the game board, and the first induction A gaming machine, wherein the first derivative and the second derivative are disabled by making the derivative and the second derivative immerse themselves in the game board.

According to the feature K2 of the group of the present invention, the first derivative inclines so as to descend toward the first prize winning port side, so that the derivative driving section protrudes the first derivative with respect to the game board. By allowing the first derivative to be effectively set, it is possible to switch to the first ball-enterable state in which the game ball is allowed to enter the first winning hole via the first derivative. Since the second derivative inclines so as to descend toward the second prize-winning port side, the derivative driving section makes the second derivative effective by projecting the second derivative with respect to the game board. , and can be switched to a second ball-enterable state in which a game ball is entered into the second winning hole via the second derivative. In addition, since the first prize winning port and the second prize winning port are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the derivative driving section immerses the first derivative and the second derivative with respect to the game board. , the first derivative and the second derivative can be disabled and switched to a non-enterable state.

Feature K3.
In the gaming machine described in feature K2 of the invention group,
A gaming machine, wherein the first derivative and the second derivative are provided so as to cross each other.

According to the feature K3 of the group of the present invention, the first inductor and the second inductor are provided so as to intersect, so when they are provided so as not to intersect (for example, they are offset in the vertical direction). provided), the ball entry state switching means can be installed by effectively utilizing the space of the game area.

Feature K4.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K3 of the invention group,
The game machine is
Starting ball entry means (upper operation opening 36 and first prize winning opening 51B) for entering the game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters;
Game state transition means ( a main controller 60);
A variable winning device (variable winning device 5B) that shifts to a state in which a game ball can enter when shifting to the specific control state,
The variable winning device is
Equipped with a large winning opening (second winning opening 52B) as the second winning opening for executing the payout of a predetermined number of winning balls when a game ball enters,
The starting ball entry means is
a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 36);
A second starting ball-entering portion (first winning hole 51B) as the first winning hole different from the first starting ball-entering portion,
The game state transition means switches to the first ball-enterable state by the ball-entering state switching means when setting the second starting ball-entering section to the open state, and shifts to the specific control state. , when the ball-entering state switching means switches to the second ball-enterable state and the second start-up ball-entering section is set to the closed state, and when the transition to the specific control state has not occurred is a gaming machine characterized in that the ball-entering state switching means switches to the ball-entering impossible state.

According to the feature K4 of the present invention group, the game machine is provided with the ball entry state switching means. By switching to the ball-enterable state, the game ball can be entered into the second start-up ball-entering unit that executes an internal lottery when the game ball enters. In addition, since the gaming machine is provided with the ball entering state switching means, when the state is shifted to the specific control state, the entering state of the game ball is switched to the second ball entering possible state by the ball entering state switching means. A game ball can be made to enter a big winning hole that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls when the ball is played. Further, when the second start-up ball-entering section is set to the closed state, and when the game machine does not shift to the specific control state, the game machine switches to the ball-entering disabled state by the ball-entering state switching means. It is possible to prevent game balls from entering the 2-start ball entry section and the big winning opening. Therefore, the game machine can guide the game ball to a different winning hole by switching the ball-enterable state with the ball-enterable state switching means, so that the player's attention to the game can be improved.

Feature K5.
In the gaming machine described in feature K3 of the invention group,
The game machine is
Starting ball entry means (upper operation port 36 and lower operation port 37) for entering a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters,
Game state transition means ( a main controller 60);
A variable winning device (variable winning device 5C) that shifts to a state in which a game ball can enter when shifting to the specific control state,
The variable winning device is
a small winning ball winning opening (first winning opening 51) as the first winning opening for executing a payout of a predetermined number of winning balls when a game ball enters;
A multi-ball winning hole (second winning hole 52) as the second winning hole that executes the payout of a larger number of winning balls than the small winning ball winning hole when a game ball enters;
A game ball is held by setting the first ball-enterable state, the second ball-enterable state, the ball-enterable state, the first derivative, and the second derivative to valid. and the entering ball state switching means for switching between the holding state and the holding state,
The game state transition means switches to the holding state by the ball entering state switching means when the state is shifted to the specific control state, and then enters the first ball entering possible state or the second entering possible state. state, and if it is not shifted to the specific control state, the ball-entering state switching means switches to the ball-entering impossible state.

According to feature K5 of the group of inventions, the variable winning device includes the ball-entering state switching means. By switching to the first ball-enterable state, the game ball can be entered into the small-prize-ball winning port for executing the payout of the predetermined number of prize balls, and the state is switched to the holding state by the ball-entering state switching means. After that, by switching to the second ball entry possible state, the game ball can be entered into the multiple winning ball winning opening for executing the payout of a larger number of winning balls than the small winning ball winning opening. In addition, when the variable winning device does not shift to the specific control state, the ball-entering state switching means switches the ball-entering state to a non-enterable state, thereby allowing the game balls to enter the small-ball winning port and the multi-ball winning port. You can prevent it from entering the ball. Therefore, when the variable winning device shifts to the specific control state, the variable prize winning device can change the number of winning balls by switching the ball-enterable state after switching to the holding state by the ball-entering state switching means. , the player pays attention to the destination of the game ball held by the entering-ball state switching means, and thus the degree of attention of the player to the game can be improved.

Feature K6.
In the gaming machine described in feature K5 of the invention group,
After switching to the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state by the ball-enterable state switching means, the game state transition means returns the state to the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state. A game (round game) in the specific control state is performed until switching to the state in which a ball can be entered. A game machine characterized by switching to the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state after switching to the holding state by a switching means.

According to the feature K6 of the present invention group, the game state transition means switches to the hold state by the ball entry state switching means each time the game in the specific control state is executed, when the transition is made to the specific control state. Since the state is switched to the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state, the player pays attention to the destination of the game ball held by the ball-enterable state switching means each time the game in the specific control state is executed. , and the degree of attention of the player to the game can be improved.

Feature K7.
In the gaming machine described in feature K6 of the invention group,
The game state transition means is
a ball-enterable state selection unit (round prize ball determination process) that selects either the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state;
When the first ball entry possible state is selected by the ball entry possible state selection unit, the ball entry possible state switching means switches to the first ball entry possible state, and the ball entry possible state selection unit selects the first ball entry possible state. a ball-enterable state switching unit for switching to the second ball-enterable state by the ball-enterable state switching means when the second ball-enterable state is selected in machine.

According to the feature K7 of the group of inventions, the game state transition means selects the first ball entry possible state by the ball entry state switching means when the first ball entry possible state is selected by the ball entry possible state selection unit. When the ball entering possible state is switched to the entering possible state and the second entering possible state is selected by the entering possible state selecting unit, the entering possible state switching unit for switching to the second entering possible state by the entering possible state switching means is provided. Since it is provided, the player pays attention to the selection result of the ball-enterable state selection section and expects the second ball-enterable state to occur. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature K8.
In the gaming machine described in feature K7 of the invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the ball-enterable state selection unit executes a lottery to select either the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state based on a predetermined probability. .

According to feature K8 of the group of inventions, the ball-enterable state selection unit executes a lottery to select either the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state based on a predetermined probability. Therefore, the player pays attention to the lottery result of the ball-enterable state selection unit, and expects the second ball-enterable state to occur. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

According to the characteristic K group of the present invention, it is possible to diversify the movement of the game ball flowing down the game area, and it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game. You can solve problems.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine equipped with a display device that variably displays a plurality of patterns. This gaming machine has a shooting means for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board, and when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means), a jackpot lottery or the like is performed. An internal lottery is executed, and the variable display of patterns is started. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns on the display device, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

However, the starting ball entry means and the entry of the game ball into the variable winning device follow a fixed path from the vertically upward side to the vertically downward side, and the movement of the game ball becomes monotonous. , there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered.

<Characteristic group L>
Feature L1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine) comprising shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board and ball entry means for entering game balls flowing down the game area. 10),
The ball entry means
A first winning opening (first winning openings 51, 51D) provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction;
A second winning opening (second winning openings 52, 52D) provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction,
The game machine is
A first ball-enterable state in which a game ball is not allowed to enter the first winning hole and is not allowed to enter the second winning hole, and a game ball is allowed to enter the second winning hole. In addition, a second ball-enterable state in which a game ball is not allowed to enter the first winning hole, and a ball-incapable state in which a game ball is not allowed to enter either the first winning hole or the second winning hole. a ball-entering state switching means provided between the first winning hole and the second winning hole,
The ball entering state switching means is
A switching derivative (moving bridge main body 551 and rotating bridge 541) composed of at least one member that guides a game ball to either the first winning hole or the second winning hole;
A switching induction driving unit (bridge driving unit 553, rotation driving unit 543, and forward/backward driving unit 544) that integrally drives the switching induction,
The switching induction drive unit drives the switching induction to enter the first ball entry possible state in which the game ball enters the first winning hole, or enters the game ball into the second winning hole. A game machine characterized by switching to the second ball-enterable state in which a ball is allowed to enter.

According to the feature L1 of the present invention group, the switching induction driving section drives the switching induction to enter the game ball into the first winning hole in the first ball-enterable state or the second winning hole. It is possible to switch to a second ball-enterable state in which a game ball is allowed to enter. Therefore, the gaming machine can diversify the movement of the game ball flowing down the game area, and can improve the attention of the player to the game.
In addition, since the switching induction is composed of at least one member that guides the game ball to either the first winning opening or the second winning opening, the switching induction drive unit is in the first ball entry possible state and the second winning opening. In the ball-enterable state, game balls are not guided to both the first winning hole and the second winning hole.

Furthermore, the first prize winning port is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction, and the second prize winning port is provided so as to open to the other side in the horizontal direction. , by distributing the game balls in the horizontal left and right directions, the balls enter the first winning hole or the second winning hole. Therefore, in order to switch between the first ball-enterable state, the second ball-enterable state, and the ball-enterable state, for example, compared to the case of adopting a mechanism such as an opening and closing door, the ball-entering state switching means is , the space of the game area can be effectively used for installation.

Feature L2.
In the gaming machine described in feature L1 of the invention group,
The ball entering state switching means is
The switching induction driving unit (bridge driving unit 553) for moving the switching induction (moving bridge main body 551) along the horizontal direction,
The switch derivative is
a first guide surface (first guide surface 551a) that slopes downward toward the first winning opening side;
A second guide surface (second guide surface 551b) that slopes downward toward the second winning opening side,
The switching induction driving section moves the switching induction to the first winning opening side to enter the game ball into the first winning opening via the first guide surface. By switching to the ball entry possible state and moving the switching derivative to the second winning hole side, the second game ball enters the second winning hole via the second guide surface. A gaming machine characterized by switching to a ball-enterable state and switching to the ball-enterable state by moving the switching derivative to the center of the first prize winning port and the second prize winning port.

According to feature L2 of the present invention group, the first guide surface is inclined so as to descend toward the first prize winning opening side, so that the switching induction driving section moves toward the first winning opening side. By moving , it is possible to switch to the first ball-enterable state in which the game ball is entered into the first winning hole via the first guide surface. Since the second guide surface is inclined so as to descend toward the second prize winning opening side, the switching induction driving section moves the switching induction toward the second winning opening side, whereby the second guide surface is inclined downward. It is possible to switch to the second ball-enterable state in which the game ball is entered into the second winning hole via the surface. Further, since the first prize winning port and the second prize winning port are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the switching induction drive section switches to the center of the first prize winning port and the second prize winning port. By moving the derivative, it is possible to switch to the non-enterable state. Therefore, the gaming machine can diversify the movement of the game ball flowing down the game area, and can improve the attention of the player to the game.

Feature L3.
In the gaming machine described in feature L2 of the invention group,
The ball entering state switching means is
A first guide plate (first guide plate 554) as the switching guide that guides the game ball falling toward the second guide surface to the first guide surface;
A second guide plate (second guide plate 555) as the switching guide that guides the game ball falling toward the first guide surface to the second guide surface,
The switching guide drive unit protrudes the first guide plate with respect to the game board and retracts the second guide plate with respect to the game board, thereby moving the first guide plate and the Switching to the first ball-enterable state in which a game ball enters the first winning hole via the first guide surface, protruding the second guide plate with respect to the game board, By immersing the first guide plate into the game board, the second guide plate enters the game ball into the second winning hole via the second guide plate and the second guide surface. A game machine characterized by switching to a state where a ball can be entered, and by causing the first guide plate and the second guide plate to sink into the game board, thereby switching to the state where a ball cannot be entered.

According to feature L3 of the present invention group, the first guide plate guides the game ball falling toward the second guide surface to the first guide surface. projecting from the game board, it is possible to switch to the first ball-enterable state in which the game ball is entered into the first winning hole via the first guide plate and the first guide surface. Since the second guide plate guides the game ball falling toward the first guide surface to the second guide surface, the switching induction drive section protrudes the second guide plate with respect to the game board. , can be switched to a second ball-enterable state in which a game ball is allowed to enter the second winning hole via the second guide plate and the second guide surface. In addition, since the first prize winning port and the second prize winning port are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the switching induction driving section moves the first guide plate and the second guide plate to the game board. By immersing yourself in it, you can switch to a state where you cannot enter the ball. Therefore, the ball-entering state switching means can guide the game ball falling toward the second guide surface to the first guide surface via the first guide plate in the first ball-enterable state, In the second ball-enterable state, game balls falling toward the first guide surface can be guided to the second guide surface via the second guide plate.

Feature L4.
In the gaming machine described in feature L1 of the invention group,
The ball entering state switching means is
A switching induction drive unit (rotation drive unit 543) for rotating the switching induction (rotation bridge 541) is provided,
The switch derivative is
A first rotation state (left rotation state) that inclines so as to descend toward the first winning opening side and guides the game ball to the first winning opening;
A second rotation state (right rotation state) that tilts downward toward the second winning opening and guides the game ball to the second winning opening,
The switching induction driving section sets the switching induction to the first rotational state, thereby enabling the first ball entry that allows a game ball to enter the first winning hole via the switching induction. state, and by setting the switching derivative to the second rotating state, switching to the second ball-enterable state in which a game ball enters the second winning hole via the switching derivative. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature L4 of the group of the present invention, in the first rotating state, the switch guide inclines so as to descend toward the side of the first winning opening and guides the game ball to the first winning opening. The switching induction drive unit can switch to the first ball entry possible state for entering the game ball into the first winning hole via the switching induction by setting the switching induction to the first rotating state. can. In the second rotating state, the switching induction is inclined so as to descend toward the second winning opening and guide the game ball to the second winning opening. By setting to the second rotating state, it is possible to switch to the second ball entering possible state in which the game ball enters the second winning hole via the switching induction. Therefore, the gaming machine can diversify the movement of the game ball flowing down the game area, and can improve the attention of the player to the game.

Feature L5.
In the gaming machine described in feature L4 of the invention group,
The ball entering state switching means is
The switching inductor (rotating bridge 541) provided so as to project and retract with respect to the game board;
The switching derivative is projected and retracted with respect to the game board, and after the switching derivative is projected with respect to the game board, the switching derivative driving unit (rotational driving unit 543 and advance/retreat) that rotates the switching derivative Drive unit 544),
The switch derivative is
After protruding from the game board, a first rotation state (left rotation state) in which the game ball is guided downward toward the first winning opening by inclining toward the first winning opening )When,
After protruding from the game board, a second rotation state (right rotation state) in which the game ball is guided downward toward the second winning opening by inclining toward the second winning opening ) and
The switching inducer drive unit projects the switching inducer with respect to the game board, and then sets the switching inducer to the first rotating state, thereby achieving the first winning through the switching inducer. By switching to the first ball-enterable state for entering a game ball into the mouth, protruding the switching derivative from the game board, and then setting the switching derivative to the second rotating state. , by switching to the second ball-enterable state in which a game ball enters the second winning hole via the switching derivative, and by immersing the switching derivative into the game board, the ball cannot be entered. A gaming machine characterized by switching between states.

According to the feature L5 of the group of the present invention, the switching guide protrudes with respect to the game board in the first rotating state, and then tilts downward toward the first prize winning port side to reach the first position. Since the game ball is guided to the winning opening, the switching induction driving section sets the switching induction to the first rotating state to enter the game ball into the first winning opening via the switching induction. can be switched to a state where the ball can be entered. In the second rotating state, the switching guide protrudes from the game board and then tilts downward toward the second winning opening to guide the game ball to the second winning opening. The switching induction drive unit can switch to the second ball entry possible state for entering the game ball into the second winning hole via the switching induction by setting the switching induction to the second rotating state. . In addition, since the first prize winning port and the second prize winning port are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the switching induction driving section immerses the switching induction with respect to the game board so that a ball can be entered. Can be switched to disabled state. Therefore, the switching induction driving section can prevent the flow path of the game ball from being blocked when switching to the non-enterable state.

Feature L6.
In the gaming machine described in feature L4 of the invention group,
The switching induction drive unit switches the switching induction to the non-enterable state by rotating the switching induction so as not to enter the game ball into either the first winning hole or the second winning hole. A game machine characterized by

According to the feature L6 of the present invention group, the switching induction drive unit rotates the switching induction so as not to enter the game ball into either the first winning hole or the second winning hole, thereby Can be switched to disabled state. Therefore, the switching induction driving section can switch the switching induction to the non-enterable state without adding a new structure.

Feature L7.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features L1 to L6 of the present invention group,
The game machine is
Starting ball entry means (upper operation port 36 and lower operation port 37) for entering a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters,
Game state transition means ( a main controller 60);
A variable winning device (variable winning device 5) that shifts to a state in which a game ball can enter when shifting to the specific control state,
The variable winning device is
a small winning ball winning opening (first winning opening 51) as the first winning opening for executing a payout of a predetermined number of winning balls when a game ball enters;
A multi-ball winning hole (second winning hole 52) as the second winning hole that executes the payout of a larger number of winning balls than the small winning ball winning hole when a game ball enters;
and the ball entry state switching means,
The game state transition means switches to the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state by the ball-entering state switching means when the state is changed to the specific control state, and the state is changed to the specific control state. , the game machine is characterized in that, when the state has not shifted to the state where the ball cannot be entered, the state is switched to the state where the ball cannot be entered by the state switching means.

According to feature L7 of the present invention group, since the variable winning device includes the ball entering state switching means, when the state is shifted to the specific control state, the first ball entering possible state is established by the entering ball state switching means. By switching to , the game ball can be entered into the small winning ball winning opening for executing the payout of a predetermined number of winning balls, and by switching to the second ball entering possible state by the ball entering state switching means, A game ball can be made to enter a multi-prize ball winning hole that pays out a larger number of prize balls than a small-prize ball winning hole. In addition, when the variable winning device does not shift to the specific control state, the ball-entering state switching means switches the ball-entering state to a non-enterable state, thereby allowing the game balls to enter the small-ball winning port and the multi-ball winning port. You can prevent it from entering the ball. Therefore, when the variable prize winning device shifts to the specific control state, the number of prize balls can be changed by switching the ball entering possible state with the ball entering state switching means. Attention can be improved.

Feature L8.
In the gaming machine described in feature L7 of the invention group,
The game state transition means is
a ball-enterable state selection unit (prize ball determination process) that selects either the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state;
When the first ball entry possible state is selected by the ball entry possible state selection unit, the ball entry possible state switching means switches to the first ball entry possible state, and the ball entry possible state selection unit selects the first ball entry possible state. when the second ball-enterable state is selected, the ball-enterable state switching unit (large winning opening opening process) for switching to the second ball-enterable state by the ball-enterable state switching means A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature L8 of the present invention group, when the game state transition means selects the first possible ball entry state by the ball entry possible state selection section, the first ball entry state is selected by the ball entry state switching means. When the ball entering possible state is switched to the entering possible state and the second entering possible state is selected by the entering possible state selecting unit, the entering possible state switching unit for switching to the second entering possible state by the entering possible state switching means is provided. Since it is provided, the player pays attention to the selection result of the ball-enterable state selection section and expects the second ball-enterable state to occur. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature L9.
In the gaming machine described in feature L8 of the invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the ball-enterable state selection unit executes a lottery to select either the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state based on a predetermined probability. .

According to feature L9 of the group of inventions, the ball-enterable state selection unit executes a lottery to select either the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state based on a predetermined probability. Therefore, the player pays attention to the lottery result of the ball-enterable state selection unit, and expects the second ball-enterable state to occur. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature L10.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L6 of the present invention group,
The game machine is
Starting ball entry means (upper operation port 36 and lower operation port 37) for entering a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters,
A game in which the game state is shifted from the normal control state to a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. State transition means (main controller 60);
A variable winning device (variable winning device 5A) that shifts to a state in which a game ball can enter when shifting to the specific control state,
The normal control state is
A first gaming state (low probability mode);
A second game state (high probability mode) different from the first game state,
The variable winning device is
a normal winning opening (first winning opening 51) as the first winning opening for executing a payout of a predetermined number of winning balls when a game ball enters;
a specific winning opening (second winning opening 52A) as the second winning opening for setting the normal control state to the second gaming state when a game ball enters;
and the ball entry state switching means,
The game state transition means switches to the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state by the ball-entering state switching means when the state is changed to the specific control state, and the state is changed to the specific control state. , the game machine is characterized in that, when the state has not shifted to the state where the ball cannot be entered, the state is switched to the state where the ball cannot be entered by the state switching means.

According to feature L10 of the present invention group, the variable prize winning device includes the ball entering state switching means, so that when the state shifts to the specific control state, the first ball entering possible state is established by the entering ball state switching means. By switching to , the game ball can be entered into the normal winning hole for executing the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls, and by switching to the second ball enterable state by the ball entering state switching means, normal control is performed A game ball can enter a specific winning hole that sets the state to the second game state. In addition, the variable winning device prevents the game ball from entering the normal winning opening and the specific winning opening by switching the ball entry state switching means to the non-enterable state when the transition to the specific control state has not occurred. can be Therefore, when the variable winning device shifts to the specific control state, the normal control state can be set to the second game state by switching the ball entry possible state with the ball entry state switching means. It is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature L11.
In the gaming machine described in feature L10 of the invention group,
The game state transition means is
Based on the result of an internal lottery executed when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means, it is determined whether or not to switch to the second ball entry possible state by the ball entry state switching means. a ball entry state determination unit (large winning opening opening process);
When the game ball does not enter the specific winning opening in the specific control state, the normal control state is set to the first game state, and when the game ball enters the specific winning opening, the A game machine comprising a game state setting unit (transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode) for setting the normal control state to the second game state.

According to the feature L11 of the present invention group, the game state transition means causes the ball entry state switching means to select the second ball based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Since the second ball-enterable state is provided, the player pays attention to the decision result of the ball-enterable state determiner. will be expected to be Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature L12.
In the gaming machine described in feature L10 or feature L11 of the invention group,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the ball-entering state switching means switches the second ball-enterable state to the first ball-enterable state when a game ball enters the specific winning hole.

According to the feature L12 of the present invention group, the ball-entering state switching means switches the second ball-enterable state to the first ball-enterable state when the game ball enters the specific winning hole. After entering the game ball into the specific winning hole, the player can enter the game ball into the normal winning hole. Then, the normal prize winning port can execute the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls when a game ball enters. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature L13.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features L4 to L6 of the present invention group,
The game machine is
Starting ball entry means (upper operation port 36 and lower operation port 37) for entering a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters,
Game state transition means ( a main controller 60);
A variable winning device (variable winning device 5C) that shifts to a state in which a game ball can enter when shifting to the specific control state,
The variable winning device is
a small winning ball winning opening (first winning opening 51) as the first winning opening for executing a payout of a predetermined number of winning balls when a game ball enters;
A multi-ball winning hole (second winning hole 52) as the second winning hole that executes the payout of a larger number of winning balls than the small winning ball winning hole when a game ball enters;
Before switching between the first ball-enterable state, the second ball-enterable state, the ball-enterable state, and a holding state in which the game ball is held by setting the switching induction to a horizontal state and entry ball state switching means,
The game state transition means switches to the holding state by the ball entering state switching means when the state is shifted to the specific control state, and then enters the first ball entering possible state or the second entering possible state. state, and if it is not shifted to the specific control state, the ball-entering state switching means switches to the ball-entering impossible state.

According to feature L13 of the present invention group, the variable prize winning device includes the ball entry state switching means. By switching to the first ball-enterable state, the game ball can be entered into the small-prize-ball winning port for executing the payout of the predetermined number of prize balls, and the state is switched to the holding state by the ball-entering state switching means. After that, by switching to the second ball entry possible state, the game ball can be entered into the multiple winning ball winning opening for executing the payout of a larger number of winning balls than the small winning ball winning opening. In addition, when the variable winning device does not shift to the specific control state, the ball-entering state switching means switches the ball-entering state to a non-enterable state, thereby allowing the game balls to enter the small-ball winning port and the multi-ball winning port. You can prevent it from entering the ball. Therefore, when the variable winning device shifts to the specific control state, the variable prize winning device can change the number of winning balls by switching the ball-enterable state after switching to the holding state by the ball-entering state switching means. , the player pays attention to the destination of the game ball held by the entering-ball state switching means, and thus the degree of attention of the player to the game can be improved.

Feature L14.
In the gaming machine described in feature L13 of the invention group,
After switching to the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state by the ball-enterable state switching means, the game state transition means returns to the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state. A game in the specific control state (round game) is performed until switching to the state in which a ball can be entered. A game machine characterized by switching to the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state after switching to the holding state by a switching means.

According to the feature L14 of the present invention group, the game state transition means switches to the hold state by the ball-entering state switching means each time a game in the specific control state is executed when the game transitions to the specific control state. Since the state is switched to the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state, the player pays attention to the destination of the game ball held by the ball-enterable state switching means each time the game in the specific control state is executed. , and the degree of attention of the player to the game can be improved.

Feature L15.
In the gaming machine described in feature L14 of the invention group,
The game state transition means is
a ball-enterable state selection unit (round prize ball determination process) that selects either the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state;
When the first ball entry possible state is selected by the ball entry possible state selection unit, the ball entry possible state switching means switches to the first ball entry possible state, and the ball entry possible state selection unit selects the first ball entry possible state. a ball entry possible state switching unit (bridge rotation processing) for switching to the second ball entry possible state by the ball entry state switching means when the second ball entry possible state is selected in A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature L15 of the present invention group, when the game state transition means selects the first possible ball entry state by the ball entry possible state selection section, the first ball entry state is selected by the ball entry state switching means. When the ball entering possible state is switched to the entering possible state and the second entering possible state is selected by the entering possible state selecting unit, the entering possible state switching unit for switching to the second entering possible state by the entering possible state switching means is provided. Since it is provided, the player pays attention to the selection result of the ball-enterable state selection section and expects the second ball-enterable state to occur. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature L16.
In the gaming machine described in feature L15 of the invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the ball-enterable state selection unit executes a lottery to select either the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state based on a predetermined probability. .

According to feature L16 of the present invention group, the ball-enterable state selection unit executes a lottery to select either the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state based on a predetermined probability. Therefore, the player pays attention to the lottery result of the ball-enterable state selection unit, and expects the second ball-enterable state to occur. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

According to the characteristic group L of the present invention, it is possible to diversify the movement of the game ball flowing down the game area, and it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game. You can solve problems.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine equipped with a display device that variably displays a plurality of patterns. This gaming machine has a shooting means for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board, and when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means), a jackpot lottery or the like is performed. An internal lottery is executed, and the variable display of patterns is started. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns on the display device, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

However, the starting ball entry means and the entry of the game ball into the variable winning device follow a fixed path from the vertically upward side to the vertically downward side, and the movement of the game ball becomes monotonous. , there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered.

INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY As described above, the present invention can be suitably used for game machines such as pachinko game machines.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine, 36... Upper operation opening, 37... Lower operation opening, 5-5G... Variable winning device, 39... Out opening, 47... Symbol display device, 60... Main control unit, 62... MPU, 90... Sound emission Control device, 92...MPU, 100...Display control device, 102...MPU.

The game machine of the present invention comprises a shooting means capable of shooting game balls, a specific area where the game balls shot by the shooting means can reach, and a position where the game balls reaching the specific area can enter. a first ball-entering means, a second ball-entering means, a first privilege granting means for imparting a first privilege based on the fact that a game ball enters the first ball-entering means, and a second a second privilege granting means for granting a second privilege different from the first privilege based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entering means; A first position where a ball can be entered by means and is difficult to enter the second ball entering means, and a predetermined game ball reaching a specific area is difficult to enter by the first ball entering means and is difficult to enter the second ball entering means. A variable means that can be changed at least to a second position where the ball can be entered by the ball-entering means, and a variable means that is variable to the first position based on the establishment of a first condition, which is different from the first condition. and variable control means for changing the position to the second position based on the establishment of the second condition, the variable means being composed of one variable member, and the game machine is configured to operate in a predetermined game state. It is characterized by being controllable so that it is difficult for a game ball that has reached the specific area to enter either the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising shooting means for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board, and ball entry means for entering game balls flowing down the game area,
The ball entry means
a first ball-entering area provided so as to open on one side in a substantially horizontal direction;
a second ball entry area provided so as to open on the other side in the substantially horizontal direction,
The game machine is
A first ball-enterable state in which a game ball can enter the first ball-entering area, a second ball-enterable state in which a game ball can enter the second ball-entering area, and the second ball-entering area. A ball-entering state can be switched to a state in which a game ball is not allowed to enter either one of the ball-entering areas or the second ball-entering area, and the ball-entering state can be switched between the first ball-entering area and the second ball-entering area. A gaming machine comprising: a guiding section capable of guiding a game ball to either the first ball-entering area or the second ball-entering area between the ball-entering areas; and ball-entering generating means.

Images